MY PEUGEOT RIFTER

HANDBOOK

Access to the Handbook

MOBILE APPLICATION ONLINE

Install the (content available Visit the website and select the Scan MyPeugeot App PEUGEOT offline). ‘MyPeugeot’ section to view or download the handbook or go to the following address:

http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/APddb/

Scan this QR Code for direct access.

Then select: – the vehicle, Select: – the issue period corresponding to the vehicle’s initial – the language, registration date. – the vehicle and body style, – the issue period of the handbook corresponding to the vehicle’s initial registration date.

This symbol indicates the latest information available.

Welcome Key

Safety warning Thank you for choosing a Peugeot Rifter. This document presents the key information and recommendations required Additional information for you to be able to explore your vehicle in complete safety. We strongly

recommend familiarising yourself with this document and the Warranty and

Maintenance Record. Environmental protection feature Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of the equipment described in this

document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification for the Left-hand drive vehicle country in which it was sold.

The descriptions and illustrations are for guidance only.

Automobiles PEUGEOT reserves the right to modify the technical specifications, Right-hand drive vehicle equipment and accessories without having to update this guide.

If ownership of your vehicle is transferred, please ensure this Handbook is Location of the equipment / button passed on to the new owner. described using a black area.

Key This key allows you to identify the special features of your vehicle:

5 seats

7 seats

Contents

Overview ■ Rear seats (row 2) 42 Advanced Grip Control 75 Labels 4 Rear seats (row 3) 43 Hill Assist Descent Control 76 Interior fittings 45 Seat belts 77

Two-position luggage cover shelf Airbags 79

Eco-driving ■ (removable) 50 Child seats 82 Eco-coaching 8 Luggage cover (7-seat) 51 Deactivating the front passenger airbag 84 Warning triangle 52 ISOFIX child seats 87 Heating and Ventilation 52 i-Size child seats 90 Instruments 1 Heating 53 Manual child lock 90 Instrument Panel 9 Manual air conditioning 53 Electric child lock 91 Warning and indicator lamps 11 Dual-zone automatic air conditioning 53 Indicators 16 Front demisting - defrosting 55 Driving Trip computer 21 Rear screen demisting - defrosting 56 6 Setting the date and time 22 Rear heating and air conditioning 57 Driving recommendations 92 Additional heating/ventilation system 57 Starting/switching off the engine 93 Manual parking brake 96 Access 2 Electric parking brake 97 Electronic key with remote control function Lighting and visibility 4 Hill start assist 99 and built-in key, 23 Lighting control stalk 61 5-speed manual gearbox 100 Back-up procedures 27 Direction indicators 62 6-speed manual gearbox 100 Central locking / unlocking 30 Automatic illumination of headlamps 62 Automatic gearbox 101 Doors 31 Daytime running lamps / Sidelamps 63 Gear efficiency indicator 104 General recommendations for the sliding Parking lamps 63 Stop & Start 104 side doors 31 Automatic headlamp dipping 63 Under-inflation detection 106 Alarm 33 Headlamp beam height adjustment 65 Driving and manoeuvring aids - General Electric windows 35 Wiper control stalk 65 recommendations 107 Tilting rear door windows 36 Changing a wiper blade 67 Speed Limit Recognition and Automatic wiping 67 Recommendation 109 Ease of use and comfort 3 Speed limiter 112 Cruise control - particular General recommendations for the seats 37 Safety 5 recommendations 114 Front seats 37 General safety recommendations 69 Programmable cruise control 114 PEUGEOT i-Cockpit 37 Emergency or assistance call 69 Adaptive Cruise Control 116 Steering wheel adjustment 40 Hazard warning lamps 72 Memorising speeds 119 Mirrors 40 Horn 73 Active Safety Brake with Distance Alert and Rear bench seat (row 2) 41 Electronic stability control (ESC) 73 Intelligent emergency braking assistance 120

2 Contents

Active Lane Keeping Assistance 122 Towing 170 Menus 206 Blind Spot Monitoring System 126 Voice commands 208 Active Blind Spot Monitoring System 127 Navigation 211 Technical data Distraction detection 128 9 Connected navigation 214 Parking sensors 129 Dimensions 172 Applications 216 Visiopark 1 131 Engine technical data and towed loads 173 Radio 219 Park Assist 133 Identification markings 178 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 220 Media 221 Telephone 222 Practical information Bluetooth® audio system 10 7 Settings 225 First steps 179 Compatibility of fuels 138 Frequently asked questions 226 Refuelling 138 Steering mounted controls 179 Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 139 Menus 180 Snow chains 140 Radio 181 Alphabetical index ■ Towing device 140 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 182 Towing device with quickly detachable towball Media 183 142 Telephone 185 Energy economy mode 142 Frequently asked questions 188 Roof bars / Roof rack 143 Bonnet 144 PEUGEOT Connect Radio 11 Engine compartment 145 First steps 191 Checking levels 145 Steering mounted controls 192 Speed checks 147 Menus 193 AdBlue® (BlueHDi) 149 Applications 194 Free-wheeling 151 Radio 194 Advice on care and maintenance 151 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 196 Access to additional videos Media 196 In the event of a breakdown Telephone 198

8

Running out of fuel (Diesel) 153 Settings 201 Tool kit 153 Frequently asked questions 203 Temporary puncture repair kit 154 Spare wheel 156 PEUGEOT Connect Nav 12 Changing a bulb 159 First steps 205 Changing a fuse 164 Steering mounted controls 206 bit.ly/helpPSA 12 V battery 166

3 Overview

Labels “Deactivating the front passenger airbag” “Electric parking brake” section: Instruments and controls section:

“General recommendations for seats” section:

“Bonnet” and “Changing a bulb” sections:

“ISOFIX child seats” section:

“12 V battery” section:

“Manual child lock” section:

“Temporary puncture repair kit” and “Spare wheel” sections:

“Additional heating/ventilation” section:

1. Bonnet release 2. Dashboard fuses Horn 3. 4. Instrument panel

4 Overview

Instruments and controls 5. Alarm Steering mounted controls Courtesy lamp Warning lamp display for seat belts and front passenger airbag Panoramic roof blind control Interior rear view mirror Monitoring mirror Emergency and assistance call buttons

6. Monochrome screen with audio system Touch screen with PEUGEOT Connect Radio or PEUGEOT Connect Nav 7. USB port External lighting / direction indicators control 8. Heating 1. Manual air conditioning stalk Dual-zone automatic air conditioning Voice recognition activation button Front demisting - defrosting 2. Wiper / screenwash / trip computer control Rear screen demisting – defrosting stalk Controls to select the multimedia source 9. Electric parking brake 3. "START/STOP" button (SRC), manage music (LIST) and manage phone calls (" " symbol) 10. Gearbox telephone Speed Limiter / Programmable Cruise Control 11. 12 V socket 4. / Adaptive cruise control controls 12. 230 V accessory socket 5. Instrument panel display mode selection 13. Glove box wheel USB port (inside the glove box) 6. Voice control Bonnet release 14. Glove box 1. Volume adjustment 2. Dashboard fuses 15. Front passenger airbag deactivation (on the 7. Audio system setting controls 3. Horn side of the glove box, with the door open) 4. Instrument panel

5 Overview

Side switch panel Central switch panel

1. Manual headlamp beam height adjustment 1. Hazard warning lamps 2. DSC / ASR systems 2. Locking / unlocking from the inside 3. Stop & Start 3. Hill Assist Descent 4. Parking sensors 4. Eco mode 5. Additional heating / ventilation 5. Advanced Grip Control 6. Active Lane Departure Warning System 6. Electric parking brake 7. Tyre under-inflation detection 7. Starting / switching off the engine 8. Electric child lock 9. Heated windscreen

Control on the driver's door

Electric child lock

6 Eco-driving

Eco-driving Use electrical equipment wisely bicycle carrier, trailer, etc.). Preferably, use a Before moving off, if the passenger compartment roof box. Eco-driving refers to a range of everyday is too warm, ventilate it by opening the windows Remove roof bars and roof racks after use. practices that allow the motorist to optimise their and air vents before using the air conditioning. At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit fuel consumption and CO emissions. 2 At speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h), close the summer tyres. Optimise your use of the gearbox windows and leave the air vents open. Comply with servicing instructions With a manual gearbox, move off gently and Consider using equipment that can help keep Check tyre pressures regularly, with the tyres change up promptly. While accelerating, change the temperature in the passenger compartment cold, referring to the label in the door aperture on up early. down (sunroof blind and window blinds, etc.). the driver's side. With an automatic gearbox, favour automatic Unless automatically regulated, switch off the air Carry out this check in particular: mode and avoid pressing the accelerator pedal conditioning as soon as the desired temperature – before a long journey. heavily or suddenly. has been reached. – at each change of season. The gear efficiency indicator prompts you to Switch off the demisting and defrosting functions, – after a long period out of use. engage the most suitable gear: whenever this if they are not managed automatically. Do not overlook the spare wheel and, where indication is displayed on the instrument panel, Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible. applicable, the tyres on your trailer or caravan. follow it straight away. Switch off the headlamps and foglamps when Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine oil, With an automatic gearbox, this indicator the visibility conditions do not require their use. oil filter, air filter, passenger compartment filter, appears only in manual mode. Avoid running the engine before moving off, etc.) and observe the schedule of operations in Drive smoothly particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm up the manufacturer's service schedule. much faster while driving. Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR system As a passenger, avoid connecting your engine braking rather than the brake pedal and is faulty, your vehicle will emit pollution. Visit multimedia devices (film, music, video game, press the accelerator gradually. These attitudes a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop etc.) to help reduce consumption of electrical help to save fuel, reduce CO emissions and as soon as possible to restore your vehicle’s 2 energy, and hence fuel. decrease general traffic noise. nitrogen oxide emissions to regulatory Disconnect all portable devices before leaving If the vehicle has the steering-mounted compliance. the vehicle. "CRUISE" control, use cruise control at speeds When filling the fuel tank, do not continue after above 25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is Limit the causes of excess consumption the third nozzle cut-out, to avoid overflow. flowing well. Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the You will only see the fuel consumption of your heaviest items in the boot, as close as possible new vehicle settle down to a consistent average to the rear seats. after the first 1,900 miles (3,000 kilometres). Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and minimise wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack,

7 Eco-driving

Eco mode instrument panel, you can assess your driving in real time with the braking and acceleration This mode optimises the heating and indicator. air conditioning functions to reduce fuel consumption. Information displayed on the touch screen Activation/Deactivation The four tabs - "Trip", "Air conditioning",

"Maintenance" and "Driving" - provide tips to help you optimise your driving style. Information relating to the driving style may also

be displayed in real time.

The "Report" tab assesses your driving style on a daily basis and gives an overall score for the week. You can reset this report at any time by pressing

"Reset". ► To activate or deactivate this mode, press this With PEUGEOT Connect Radio button. ► In the "Applications" menu, select The indicator lamp is illuminated when the "Eco-coaching". system is activated. With PEUGEOT Connect Nav ► In the "Applications" menu, then the Eco-coaching "Vehicle Apps" tab, select This function provides you with advice and "Eco-coaching". information to help you adopt a more economical and environmentally friendly driving style. It takes into account multiple parameters, including braking optimisation, acceleration management, gear changes, tyre inflation and use of the heating/air conditioning systems. Information displayed on the instrument panel By selecting the "Eco-coaching" tab of the central display in the matrix

8 Instruments

Instrument panel Indicators with LCD text or With LCD symbols instrument panel 1 matrix instrument panel Speedometer

1. Fuel gauge. 2. Engine coolant temperature gauge. With LCD text instrument panel

Display screen

When travelling abroad, you may need to change the units of distance: the road

speed must be displayed in the country’s official unit (miles or km). The unit is changed Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h). via the screen configuration menu, with the vehicle stationary.

9 Instruments

With matrix instrument panel Control buttons With LCD text instrument panel Rev counter

With matrix instrument panel

With LCD symbols instrument panel

A. Temporary reminder of servicing information, or reminder of the driving range with the SCR system and the AdBlue®. Depending on version: go back up a level or

A. Lighting dimmer. cancel the current operation.

After a long press on SET: change the set 1. Cruise control or speed limiter settings. B. Lighting dimmer. time values and the units. 2. Gear shift indicator. Depending on version: browse a menu or list, Rev counter (x 1000 rpm). B. Reminder of servicing information or the Gear with an automatic gearbox. or change a value. driving range with the SCR system and the 3. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h) with LCD C. Reset the trip distance recorder (long press). AdBlue®. Warning and indicator symbols and LCD text instrument panel. Reset the service indicator. Reset the function selected (service indicator Display area with matrix instrument panel: Depending on version: enter the configuration lamps alert or function status message, trip or trip distance recorder). menu and confirm a choice (short press). Displayed as symbols, the warning and indicator computer, digital speedometer (mph or km/h), After a long press: change the set time values lamps inform the driver of the occurrence of a etc. and the units. malfunction (warning lamps) or of the operating Service indicator, then total distance recorder 4. status of a system (operation or deactivation (miles or km) and trip distance recorder indicator lamps). Certain lamps light up in two (miles or km). ways (fixed or flashing) and/or in several colours. Display area with LCD text instrument panel: alert or function status message, trip Associated warnings computer, etc. The illumination of a lamp may be accompanied by an audible signal and/or a message displayed 5. Engine coolant temperature gauge. in a screen. 6. Engine oil level indicator. Relating the type of alert to the operating status 7. Fuel gauge. of the vehicle allows you to determine whether the situation is normal or whether a fault has

10 Instruments

Rev counter occurred: refer to the description of each lamp List of warning and for further information. 1 indicator lamps When the ignition is switched on Red warning/indicator lamps

Certain red or orange warning lamps come on for a few seconds when the ignition is switched STOP on. These warning lamps should go off as soon Fixed, associated with another warning as the engine is started. lamp, accompanied by the display of a For more information on a system or a function, message and an audible signal. refer to the corresponding section. A serious fault with the engine, braking system, power steering, automatic gearbox or a major Warning lamp continuously electrical fault has been detected. lit Carry out (1) and then (2). The illumination of a red or orange warning lamp Engine oil pressure Rev counter (x 1000 rpm). indicates the occurrence of a fault that needs Fixed. further investigation. There is a fault with the engine lubrication system. Warning and indicator If a warning lamp remains lit Carry out (1) and then (2). The references (1), (2) and (3) in the warning lamps Brakes and indicator lamp description indicate whether Displayed as symbols, the warning and indicator Fixed. you should contact a qualified professional in lamps inform the driver of the occurrence of a The brake fluid level has dropped addition to the immediate recommended actions. malfunction (warning lamps) or of the operating significantly. (1): You must stop the vehicle. status of a system (operation or deactivation Carry out (1), then top up with brake fluid Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off indicator lamps). Certain lamps light up in two that complies with the manufacturer's the ignition. ways (fixed or flashing) and/or in several colours. recommendations. If the problem persists, carry (2): Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified out (2). Associated warnings workshop. Fixed. The illumination of a lamp may be accompanied (3): Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The electronic brake force by an audible signal and/or a message displayed workshop. distribution (EBFD) system is faulty. in a screen. Carry out (1) and then (2). Relating the type of alert to the operating status of the vehicle allows you to determine whether the situation is normal or whether a fault has

11 Instruments

Parking brake Door open ► With an automatic gearbox, with P selected, Fixed. Fixed, associated with a message place the supplied chocks against one of the The parking brake is applied or not identifying the access. wheels. properly released. An audible signal supplements the alert if the Then carry out (2). Maximum engine coolant temperature speed is higher than 6 mph (10 km/h). Flashing, when the vehicle °C Fixed (warning lamp or LED), with A door, the boot, the tailgate or the tailgate is started. 90 the needle in the red zone screen is still open (depending on version). The parking brake has not been properly (depending on version). Close the access. released. The cooling system temperature is too high. If your vehicle is equipped with a right-hand Carry out (1) and try to fully release the parking Carry out (1), then allow the engine to cool hinged door, its opening will not be indicated by brake using the control lever, with your foot on before topping up the level, if necessary. If the this warning lamp. the brake pedal. problem persists, carry out (2). Electric parking brake If the problem persists, carry out (2). Fixed, accompanied by the Battery charge Fixed. message "Parking brake Fixed. The electric parking brake is applied. fault". The battery charging circuit has a fault Orange warning/indicator lamps The parking brake is faulty: manual and (dirty or loose terminals, slack or cut alternator Automatic functions (with electric parking automatic functions may not be working. belt, etc.). brake) When stationary, to immobilise the vehicle: Clean and retighten the terminals. If the warning Fixed. ► Pull and hold the control lever for lamp does not go off when the engine is started, The "automatic application" (on switching approximately 7 to 15 seconds, until the indicator carry out (2). off the engine) and "automatic release" functions lamp comes on in the instrument panel. Power steering are deactivated. If this procedure does not work, secure the Fixed. Activate the functions again. vehicle: The power steering has a fault. Malfunction (with electric parking brake) ► Park on a level surface. Drive carefully at moderate speed, then carry Fixed, accompanied ► With a manual gearbox, engage a gear. out (3). by the message ► With an automatic gearbox, select P, then Seat belts not fastened / unfastened "Parking brake fault". place the supplied chocks against one of the Fixed or flashing, accompanied by The parking brake no longer delivers optimum wheels. an increasing audible signal. performance for parking the vehicle safely in all Then carry out (2). A seat belt has not been fastened or has been circumstances. Fixed, accompanied by the unfastened (depending on version). Make the vehicle safe: message "Parking brake fault". ► Park on a level surface. The vehicle cannot be immobilised with the ► With a manual gearbox, engage a gear. engine running.

12 Instruments

If manual application and release commands are There is a risk that the catalytic converter will be Reinitialise the detection system after adjusting not working, the electric parking brake control destroyed. the pressure. 1 lever is faulty. Carry out (2) without fail. Under-inflation warning lamp The automatic functions must be used at all Fixed. flashing then fixed and Service times and are automatically re-enabled in the The emission control system has a fault. warning lamp fixed. event of a control lever fault. The warning lamp should go off when the engine The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty. Carry out (2). is started. Under-inflation detection is no longer monitored. Low fuel level Carry out (3) quickly. Check the tyre pressures as soon as possible 1 Fixed (warning lamp or LED) and Fixed. and carry out (3). 1 /2 needle in the red zone (depending A minor engine fault has been Anti-lock braking system (ABS) on version), accompanied by an audible signal detected. Fixed. and a message. Carry out (3). The anti-lock braking system has a fault. The audible signal and the message are Fixed. The vehicle retains conventional braking. repeated with increasing frequency as the fuel A major engine fault has been Drive carefully at moderate speed, then carry level drops towards zero. detected. out (3). Carry out (1) and then (2). When it first comes on there remainsless than 6 Distance Alert / Active Safety Brake litres of fuel in the tank. Diesel engine pre-heating Fixed, accompanied by the display of a Refuel without delay to avoid running out of fuel. Fixed. message. Never drive until completely empty, this could The period of illumination depends on the The system has been deactivated via the vehicle damage the emission control and injection climatic conditions. configuration menu. systems. The ignition is on. Flashing. Presence of water in diesel filter Wait until the warning lamp goes off before The system is operating. Fixed (with LCD symbols instrument starting. The vehicle brakes briefly so as to reduce the panel). If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off speed of collision with the vehicle ahead. The diesel filter contains water. and then on, wait until the indicator lamp goes off Fixed, accompanied by a message and Risk of damage to the injection system : carry again, then start the engine. an audible signal. out (2) without delay. Under-inflation The system has a fault. Engine self-diagnosis system Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal Carry out (3). Flashing. and a message. Fixed. The engine management system has a The pressure in one or more wheels is too low. The system has a fault. fault. Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as If these warning lamps come on after the engine possible. is switched off and then restarted, carry out (3).

13 Instruments

Particle filter (Diesel) You can install a "rearward facing" child seat, Active Lane Departure Warning System Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal unless there is a fault with the airbags (airbag Fixed. and a message about the risk of particle warning lamp on). The system has been automatically filter blockage. Dynamic stability control (DSC) and anti- deactivated or placed on standby. The particle filter is beginning to saturate. slip regulation (ASR) Flashing indicator. As soon as traffic conditions allow, regenerate Fixed. You are about to cross a broken the filter by driving at a speed of at least 40 mph The system is deactivated. lane marking without operating the direction (60 km/h) until the warning lamp goes off. Press the button to reactivate it. indicators. Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal The DSC/ASR system is activated automatically The system is activated, then corrects the and a message signalling that the additive when the vehicle is started, and from around 30 trajectory on the side of the lane marking level in the particle filter is too low. mph (50 km/h). detected. The minimum level of the additive reservoir has Flashing. Fixed. been reached. DSC/ASR regulation is activated in the The system has a fault. Top up as soon as possible: carry out (3). event of a loss of grip or trajectory. Carry out (3). Airbags Fixed. AdBlue® (with 1.6 BlueHDi Euro 6.1) Fixed. The DSC/ASR system has a fault. Fixed, on switching on the ignition, One of the airbags or seat belt Carry out (3). accompanied by an audible signal and a pyrotechnic pretensioners is faulty. Hill start assist message indicating the driving range. Carry out (3). Fixed, accompanied by the The driving range is between 1,500 and 370 Front passenger airbag (ON) message "Anti roll-back system miles (2,400 and 600 km). ® Fixed. fault". You must quickly top up the AdBlue , or carry The front passenger airbag is activated. The system has a fault. out (3). ® The control is in the "ON" position. Carry out (3). AdBlue warning lamp flashing and Service warning lamp fixed, In this case, do NOT install a "rearward Emergency brake malfunction (with accompanied by an audible signal and a facing" child seat on the front passenger seat electric parking brake) message indicating the driving range. - Risk of serious injury! Fixed, accompanied by the The driving range is less than 375 miles Front passenger airbag(OFF) message "Parking brake fault". (600 km). Fixed. Emergency braking does not deliver optimal You must top up the AdBlue® to avoid a The front passenger airbag is deactivated. performance. breakdown, or carry out (3). The control is in the "OFF" position. If automatic release is not available, use manual AdBlue® warning lamp flashing and release or carry out (3). Service warning lamp fixed, accompanied by an audible signal and a

14 Instruments message indicating that starting is prevented. To restart the engine, top up the AdBlue® or carry To start the engine, carry out (2). ® The AdBlue tank is empty: the regulatory engine out (2). Service 1 ® immobiliser prevents the engine from being It is essential to add at least 5 litres of AdBlue Temporarily on, accompanied by the restarted. to the tank. display of a message. ® To restart the engine, top up the AdBlue , or SCR emissions control system (BlueHDi) One or more minor faults have been detected for carry out (2). Fixed when the ignition is which there is no specific warning lamp. ® You must add at least 5 litres of AdBlue to its switched on, accompanied Identify the cause of the fault using the message tank. by an audible signal and a message. displayed in the instrument panel. AdBlue® (with 1.5 BlueHDi Euro 6.2/ 6.3) A malfunction involving the SCR emissions You can deal with certain anomalies yourself, for On for around 30 seconds when starting control system has been detected. example an open door or the start of saturation the vehicle, accompanied by a message This alert disappears once the exhaust of the particle filter. indicating the driving range. emissions return to normal levels. For any other problems, such as a fault with the The driving range is between 1,500 and 500 Flashing AdBlue® warning tyre under-inflation detection system, carry out miles (2,400 and 800 km). lamp on switching on the (3). Top up the AdBlue®. ignition, with the Service and Engine self- Fixed, accompanied by the display of a Fixed, on switching on the ignition, diagnostics warning lamps on fixed, message. accompanied by an audible signal and a accompanied by an audible signal and a One or more major faults for which there is no message indicating the driving range. message indicating the driving range. specific warning lamp have been detected. The driving range is between 500 and 62 miles Depending on the message displayed, it may be Identify the cause of the anomaly using the (800 and 100 km). possible to drive for up to 685 miles (1,100 km) message displayed in the instrument panel, then Promptly top up the AdBlue®, or carry out (3). before the engine immobiliser is triggered. carry out (3). Flashing, accompanied by an audible Carry out (3) without delay, to avoid starting Fixed, accompanied by the message signal and a message indicating the being prevented. ‘Parking brake fault’. driving range. Flashing AdBlue® warning Automatic release of the electric parking brake is The driving range is less than 62 miles (100 km). lamp on switching on the unavailable. You must top up the AdBlue® to avoid engine ignition, with the Service and Engine self- Carry out (2). starting being prevented, or carry out (3). diagnostics warning lamps on fixed, Service warning lamp fixed and Flashing, accompanied by an audible accompanied by an audible signal and a service spanner flashing then signal and a message indicating that message indicating that starting is prevented. fixed. starting is prevented. The engine immobiliser prevents the engine The servicing interval has been exceeded. The AdBlue® tank is empty: the legally required from restarting (over the authorised driving limit The vehicle must be serviced as soon as engine immobiliser system prevents the engine after confirmation of an emissions control system possible. from starting. malfunction). Only with BlueHDi Diesel engines.

15 Instruments

Rear foglamp Sidelamps Foot on the clutch Fixed. Fixed. Fixed. The lamp is on. The lamps are on. Stop & Start: the change to START mode Green warning/indicator lamps Direction indicators is rejected because the clutch pedal is not fully Direction indicators with audible signal. depressed. Stop & Start The direction indicators are on. Fully depress the clutch pedal. Fixed. Automatic wiping When the vehicle stops the Stop & Start Dipped beam headlamps Fixed. puts the engine into STOP mode. Fixed. Automatic front wiping is activated. Flashing temporarily. The lamps are on. STOP mode is momentarily unavailable Automatic headlamp dipping or START mode is automatically triggered. Fixed. Indicators Hill Assist Descent Control The function has been activated Fixed. via the touch screen (Driving / Vehicle menu). Service indicator The lighting control stalk is in the "AUTO" The system has been activated, but the The service indicator is displayed on the position. conditions for regulation are not met (gradient, instrument panel. Depending on the vehicle speed too high, gear engaged). Blue warning/indicator lamps version: Flashing indicator. Main beam headlamps – the distance recorder display line indicates The function is starting regulation. Fixed. the distance remaining before the next service The vehicle is being braked; the brake lamps The lamps are on. is due, or the distance travelled since it was due come on during the descent. preceded by the sign “-”. Black/white warning lamps Eco mode – an alert message indicates the distance Fixed. Foot on brake remaining, as well as the period before the next ECO mode is active. Fixed. service is due or how long it is overdue. Certain parameters are adjusted with a view to Omission or insufficient pressure on the Service spanner reducing fuel consumption. brake pedal. Lights up temporarily when the ignition is Automatic wiping With an automatic gearbox, with the engine switched on. Fixed. running, before releasing the parking brake, to Between 1,800 miles (3,000 km) and 600 miles Automatic windscreen wiping is activated. move out of position P. (1,000 km) remain before the next service is due. Front foglamps Fixed, when the ignition is switched on. Fixed. The service is due in less than 600 miles The front foglamps are lit. (1,000 km).

16 Instruments

Have your vehicle serviced very soon. ► Release the button when =0 is displayed; the With the vehicle stationary, use the left-hand Service spanner flashing spanner disappears. thumbwheel on the steering wheel or the "SET" 1 button on the instrument panel to move through Flashing then fixed, when the If you have to disconnect the battery the menus to configure certain vehicle settings. ignition is switched on. following this operation, lock the vehicle Thumbwheel operation: (With BlueHDi Diesel engines, combined with the and wait at least 5 minutes for the reset to be – Press: open the Main menu; confirm the Service warning lamp.) registered. The servicing interval has been exceeded. selection. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. – Rotate (other than in a menu): scroll through Service reminder the list of available active functions. The distance indicated (in miles or You can access service information at any time. – Rotate (in a menu): move up or down in the kilometres) is calculated according to the ► Press this button. menu. distance covered and the time elapsed since The service information is displayed for a few the last service. seconds, then disappears. Distance recorders The alert may be triggered close to a due The total and trip distances are displayed for date. Instrument panel display screen thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off, when the driver's door is opened and when the Resetting the service indicator vehicle is locked or unlocked.

The service indicator must be reset after each Total distance recorder

service. ► Switch off the ignition.

► Press and hold this button. This recorder measures the total distance ► Switch on the ignition; the distance recorder travelled by the vehicle since its initial display begins a countdown. registration.

17 Instruments

Trip distance recorder – in zone B, the engine coolant temperature is ignition is switched on, at the same time as the too high; the maximum temperature and central servicing information. This recorder measures the distance travelled STOP warning lamps come on, accompanied by since it was last reset by the driver. The level read will only be correct if the an audible signal and a warning message. Resetting the trip recorder vehicle is on level ground and the engine You MUST stop as soon as it is safe to do so. has been off for more than 30 minutes. Wait a few minutes before switching off the engine.

Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Oil level correct

workshop. Checking After driving for a few minutes, the temperature

and pressure in the cooling system increase. ► With the ignition on, press the button until To top up the level: This is indicated by a message on the instrument zeros appear. ► wait at least one hour for the engine to cool, panel. ► unscrew the cap by two turns to allow the Low oil level Engine coolant temperature pressure to drop,

► when the pressure has dropped, remove the cap, ► top up the level to the "MAX" mark. For more information on Checking levels, refer to the corresponding section. This is indicated by a message on the instrument Be aware of the risk of scalding when panel. topping up the coolant. Do not fill above If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using the maximum level (indicated on the the dipstick, the level must be topped up to avoid reservoir). damaging the engine.

With the engine running, when the needle or bar Engine oil level indicator graph (depending on version) is: On versions fitted with an electric oil gauge, the – in zone A, the engine coolant temperature is state of the engine oil level is displayed on the correct, instrument panel for a few seconds when the

18 Instruments

Oil level gauge fault Manual display of the range With 1.6 BlueHDi (Euro 6.1) engines

1 While the driving range is greater than Warning/ Action Remaining 1,500 miles (2,400 km), it is not displayed indicator range automatically.

lamps lit

Top up as Between This is indicated by a message on the instrument soon as 1,500 and

panel. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified possible. 375 miles workshop. (2,400 and 600 km) ® AdBlue range indicators (BlueHDi) A top-up is Between 375 The Diesel BlueHDi engines are equipped with vital, there and 0 miles a system that associates the SCR (Selective is the risk (600 and Catalytic Reduction) emissions control system ► Press this button to temporarily display the that the 0 km)

and the Diesel particle filter (DPF) for the driving range. engine will treatment of exhaust gases. They cannot be prevented ® Actions required related to a lack of function without AdBlue fluid. ® from starting. ® AdBlue

When the level of AdBlue falls below the reserve level (between 1,500 miles and 0 miles The following warning lamps light up when the To be able 0 miles (km) (2,400 and 0 km)), a warning lamp lights up quantity of AdBlue® is lower than the reserve to restart when the ignition is switched on and an estimate level corresponding to a range of 1,500 miles the engine, add at least of the distance that can be travelled before (2,400 km). engine starting is prevented is displayed in the Together with the warning lamps, messages 5 litres of ® instrument panel. regularly remind you of the need to top up to AdBlue to avoid engine starting being prevented. Refer to its tank. The engine starting prevention system the Warning and indicator lamps section for required by regulations is activated details of the messages displayed. automatically once the AdBlue® tank is empty. It is then no longer possible to start the For more information on AdBlue® engine until the minimum level of AdBlue® has (BlueHDi engines), and in particular on been topped up. topping up, refer to the corresponding section.

19 Instruments

With 1.5 BlueHDi Euro 6.2 / 6.3 engines Malfunction of the SCR emissions control While driving, the message is displayed every 30 system seconds. The alert is repeated when switching Warning Action Remaining on the ignition.

lamps lit driving Malfunction detection You can continue driving for up to 685 miles

range (1,100 km) before the engine immobiliser

If a malfunction is detected, system is triggered. Top up. Between these warning lamps come on, 1,500 miles

accompanied by an audible Have the system checked by a and 500 signal and an "Emissions fault” PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified miles (2,400 or “NO START IN” message. workshop as soon as possible. km and With the lamps on (not in the AUTO position) , 800 km) Starting prevented press button A to increase the brightness of the lighting, or button B to decrease it. Top up as Between The alert is triggered while driving, when the Whenever the ignition is switched on, the Release the button when the desired brightness soon as 500 miles fault is detected for the first time, and thereafter "Emissions fault: Starting prevented" or "NO is reached. possible. and 62 miles when switching on the ignition for subsequent START IN" message is displayed. (800 km and journeys, while the cause of the fault persists. 100 km) To be able to restart the engine, contact Touch screen lighting If the fault is temporary, the alert

a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Between dimmer A top-up is disappears during the next journey, after workshop. essential, 62 miles self-diagnostic checks of the SCR emissions due to the and 0 miles control system. risk that the (100 km and

engine will 0 km) Malfunction confirmed during the Lighting dimmer be prevented permitted driving phase (between 685 This control lets you manually adjust the from starting. miles and 0 miles (1,100 km and 0 km)) brightness of the instrument panel according to

the exterior light level. To be able 0 miles (km) If the fault indication is still displayed to restart permanently after 31 miles (50 km) of driving, the the engine, fault in the SCR system is confirmed.

add at least The AdBlue warning lamp flashes, and an

5 litres of "Emissions fault: Starting prevented in X ► In the Settings menu, select "Brightness". AdBlue® to miles" or "NO START IN X miles" message is its tank. displayed, indicating the driving range in miles or Or select "OPTIONS", "Screen configuration" kilometres. then "Brightness".

20 Instruments

► Adjust the brightness by pressing the arrows or moving the slider. 1 The brightness can be set differently for

day mode and night mode.

Trip computer

Information displayed about the current journey With the lamps on (not in the AUTO position) , (range, fuel consumption, average speed, etc.). ► Or press the thumbwheel on the steering press button A to increase the brightness of the wheel. lighting, or button B to decrease it. Information display Release the button when the desired brightness Details are displayed successively. Trip reset is reached. – Trip mileage. The reset is performed when the trip counter is – Range. displayed. Touch screen lighting – Current fuel consumption. ► Press the button on the end of the wiper dimmer – Average speed. control stalk for more than two seconds. – Stop & Start time counter. ► Press the thumbwheel on the steering wheel – Information from the speed limit recognition for more than two seconds. system.

► In the Settings menu, select "Brightness". ► Press this button for more than 2 seconds. ► Press the button located on the end of the Or select "OPTIONS", "Screen configuration" wiper control stalk. then "Brightness".

21 Instruments

A few definitions… Average fuel consumption Setting the date and time (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) Range Calculated since the last trip computer Without audio system (miles or km) reset. Distance that can still be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank (based on the Average speed

average fuel consumption over the last few miles (mph or km/h)

(kilometres) travelled). Calculated since the last trip computer reset. This value may vary following a change in the driving style or terrain, resulting in Distance travelled a significant change in the spot fuel (miles or km) consumption. Calculated since the last trip computer reset. When the range falls below 19 miles (30 km), dashes are displayed. Stop & Start time counter

After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range (minutes/seconds or hours/minutes) is recalculated and is displayed if it exceeds 62 Set the date and time via the instrument panel miles (100 km). display. If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, a time ► Press and hold this button. If dashes instead of figures continue to counter calculates the time spent in STOP mode be displayed when driving, contact a during a journey. ► Press one of these buttons to select PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. It resets to zero every time the ignition is the setting to be changed. switched on. ► Briefly press this button to confirm. Spot fuel consumption (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) ► Press one of these buttons to change Calculated during the last few seconds. the setting and confirm again to record the change.

This function is only displayed at speeds above 19 mph (30 km/h).

22 Access Electronic key with Keyless Entry and Starting "Keyless Entry and Starting" on your 2 This allows the remote central locking or person remote control function unlocking of the vehicle. and built-in key, It is also used to locate and start the vehicle, as well as providing protection against theft. Remote control key Integral key This allows the central locking or unlocking of the This is used to lock and unlock the vehicle when vehicle using the door lock or remotely. the remote control cannot operate: It also allows the vehicle to be located, the fuel – remote control battery discharged, vehicle filler cap to be removed and refitted and the battery discharged or disconnected, etc. engine to be started or switched off, as well as – vehicle located in an area subject to strong providing protection against theft.

electromagnetic interference. The remote control buttons are not active It allows the unlocking, locking and starting of the with the ignition switched on. vehicle, while carrying the remote control on your person in the recognition zone "A". Unfolding / Folding the key In the ignition on (accessories) position,

with the "START/STOP" button, the hands-free function is deactivated and it is ► Keep this button 1 pulled across to remove impossible to open the doors. the key 2 from the device. For more information on Starting/switching If the alarm is activated, the audible off the engine and in particular the "ignition signal triggered on opening a door with on" position, refer to the corresponding the key (integral with the remote control) will section. stop when the ignition is switched on. If one of the doors or the boot is still open ► Press this button to unfold or fold the key. or if the electronic key for the Keyless The remote control may be damaged if Entry and Starting​ system has been left inside you do not press the button. the vehicle, central locking will be disabled. However, if the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, it will be activated after 45 seconds.

23 Access

If the vehicle is unlocked but the doors or Electrical interference inoperative. It would then be necessary to tailgate are not subsequently opened, the The electronic key may not operate if reset it. vehicle will automatically lock itself again after close to certain electronic devices: telephone The remote control does not work when the approximately 30 seconds. If the vehicle is (switched on or on standby), laptop computer, key is in the ignition switch, even when the fitted with an alarm, it will also be reactivated strong magnetic fields, etc. ignition is switched off. automatically. Locating the vehicle Anti-theft protection Automatic door mirror folding and Do not modify the electronic vehicle This function helps you to spot your vehicle from unfolding can be deactivated by a immobiliser, as this might result in a distance, with the vehicle locked: PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. malfunctions. – The direction indicators flash for approximately For vehicles with a key ignition switch, 10 seconds. As a safety measure, never leave the remember to remove the key and turn the – The courtesy lamps come on. vehicle, even for a short time, without steering wheel to engage the steering lock. ► Press this button. taking the Keyless Entry and Starting system’s electronic key with you. Locking the vehicle Be aware of the risk of theft of the vehicle if Remote lighting Driving with the doors locked could make the key is present in one of the defined areas it more difficult for the emergency services to Briefly pressing this button switches on while the vehicle is unlocked. enter the vehicle in an emergency. the lighting remotely (sidelamps, dipped As a safety precaution, remove the key from beam headlamps and number plate lamps). the ignition or take the electronic key with you To preserve the battery charge in the Pressing this button again before the end of the when leaving the vehicle, even for a short electronic key and the vehicle's battery, timed period cancels remote lighting. the "hands-free" functions are set to time. hibernation mode after 21 days without use. Advice To restore these functions, press one of the Purchasing a second-hand vehicle remote control buttons or start the engine with Remote control Have the key codes memorised by a the electronic key in the reader. The remote control is a sensitive, high- PEUGEOT dealer, to ensure that the keys For more information on starting with the frequency device; avoid handling it in your in your possession are the only ones able to Keyless Entry and Starting system, refer to pocket, due to the risk of unintentionally start the vehicle. the corresponding section. unlocking the vehicle. Avoid pressing the remote control buttons while out of range of the vehicle, due to the risk of rendering the remote control

24 Access

Accumulations (water, dust, grime, salt, Using the remote control With side-hinged doors/tailgate etc.) on the inner surface of the door 2 ► Press this button to unlock the vehicle. handle may affect detection. If cleaning the inner surface of the door handle using a cloth does not restore With the Keyless Entry and detection, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Starting "on your person"

A sudden splash of water (stream of water, high pressure jet washer, etc.) may be identified by the system as the desire to open the vehicle.

Unlocking

Unlocking is signalled by rapid flashing of ► To unlock the vehicle, with the remote control the direction indicators for a few on your person and in the recognition zone A, seconds. run your hand behind one of the door handles Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold (front doors). and the alarm is deactivated. ► Pull the handle to open the corresponding door. With the key ► To completely unlock the vehicle, insert the key in the lock then turn it towards the front of ► To unlock the vehicle, with the remote control the vehicle. in the recognition zone A, pass your hand ► Then pull the handle to open the door. behind the side-hinged door handle or press the If fitted to your vehicle, the alarm is not tailgate unlocking control. deactivated. Opening a door will trigger the ► Pull the side-hinged door handle or raise the alarm, which can be stopped by switching the tailgate. ignition on.

25 Access

With a tailgate opening rear screen With the key With side-hinged doors

► To lock the vehicle, insert the key in the lock then turn it towards the rear of the vehicle. With the remote control ► To lock the vehicle, press this button.

If your vehicle is so equipped, pressing and holding this button closes the

windows. The window stops in position when ► To lock the vehicle, with the remote control you release the button. in recognition zone A, press the left-hand door locking control.

If your vehicle is fitted with an alarm, ► With the Keyless Entry and Starting device With the Keyless Entry and pressing and holding the locking button on your person, to unlock the vehicle, press the Starting "on your person" enables the windows to be closed. The tailgate opening rear screen unlocking control. window stops in position when you release The screen partly opens; raise it to open it fully. the button.

Locking Driving with the doors locked could make it more difficult for the emergency Ensure that no person or object prevents services to enter the vehicle in an emergency. the correct closing of the windows. ► To lock the vehicle, with the remote control As a safety measure, never leave the vehicle, Be particularly aware of children when in the recognition zone A, press with a finger or even for a short time, without taking the operating the windows. thumb on the markings of one of the front or rear remote control with you. door handles. If your vehicle is not fitted with an alarm, If a door is not properly closed (except the the locking/deadlocking is signalled by right-hand door with side-hinged rear the fixed illumination of the direction doors): indicators for about two seconds. – when the vehicle is stationary and engine Depending on your version, the door mirrors running, this warning lamp comes on, fold at the same time.

26 Access accompanied by a warning message for a few If your vehicle is fitted with an alarm, ► To deadlock the vehicle, press the control seconds, pressing and holding the locking button again within five seconds. 2 – when the vehicle is moving (at speeds above enables the windows to be closed. The 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes on, window stops in position when you release accompanied by an audible signal and a warning the button. Back-up procedures message for a few seconds. Lost keys, remote control, Deadlocking With the Keyless Entry and Starting on your person electronic key

Go to a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's registration certificate, your personal identification documents and if possible, the label Deadlocking renders the exterior and bearing the key code. interior door controls inoperative. The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to retrieve the It also deactivates the manual central control key code and the transponder code, enabling a button. ► To lock the vehicle, with the remote control new key to be ordered. Therefore, never leave anyone inside the in recognition zone A, press on the markings of vehicle when it is deadlocked. one of the front or rear door handles. ► To deadlock the vehicle, press the marking Complete unlocking/locking again within five seconds. of the vehicle with the key With the key Use this procedure in the following situations: With side-hinged doors ► To deadlock the vehicle, turn the key in the – Remote control battery discharged.

driver's door lock towards the rear of the vehicle. – Remote control malfunction. ► Then within five seconds, turn the key – Vehicle battery discharged. towards the rear again. – Vehicle in an area subject to strong With the remote control electromagnetic interference. In the first case, change the remote control ► To deadlock the vehicle, press this battery. button. In the second case, reinitialise the remote ► Then press this button again within five control. seconds after locking. Refer to the corresponding sections. At the same time, depending on version, ► To lock the vehicle, with the remote control ► Insert the key in the door lock. the electric door mirrors fold in. in recognition zone A, press the left-hand door ► Turn the key towards the front/rear to unlock/ locking control. lock the vehicle.

27 Access

► Turn the key rearwards again within Locking part of the vehicle (front ► Insert the integral key into the latch (without 5 seconds to deadlock the vehicle. passenger door/sliding side door/ forcing) and then turn the assembly. ► Remove the key and refit the cap. If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, it will side-hinged doors) ► Close the door(s) and check from the outside not be activated when locking with the ► With a sliding side door or side-hinged that the vehicle is locked correctly. key. doors, if fitted to your vehicle, check that the If the alarm is activated, the siren sounds electric child lock is not activated. Unlocking of one part of the vehicle when the door is opened; switch on the ► Open the door. (front passenger door/sliding side ignition to stop it. door/side-hinged doors) ► Use the interior opening handle. If the vehicle is unlocked with the key in or the lock after locking it with the remote ► With side-hinged doors, insert the integral control or the Keyless Entry and Starting key in the (left-hand) door lock, then turn it. system, all doors and the boot are unlocked. Front passenger door For more information on the Child lock

If the vehicle is unlocked with the key in the on a sliding side door or side-hinged lock after locking it with the key, only the doors, refer to the corresponding section. doors (front door and sliding side door(s)) are unlocked. The swing doors and tailgate Unlocking the tailgate

are not unlocked. They can be unlocked after switching on the ignition. Sliding side door

Central locking not functioning Use these procedures in the following cases: – Central locking malfunction.

– Battery disconnected or discharged.

► From inside the vehicle, insert a small In the event of a malfunction of the screwdriver into hole A on the lock to unlock the central locking system, the battery must Side-hinged doors ► Remove the cap located on the edge of the tailgate. be disconnected to ensure that the vehicle is door. ► Move the latch to the left. locked fully.

28 Access

In the event of a malfunction or if you With Keyless Entry and Starting ‒ Battery Reinitialising the remote experience difficulty opening or closing type: CR2032 / 3 volts. 2

the tailgate, have it checked by a PEUGEOT control dealer or a qualified workshop without delay, Following replacement of the battery or in to avoid the issue deteriorating and prevent the event of a fault, it may be necessary to any risk of the tailgate dropping, potentially reinitialise the remote control. causing serious injury. Without Keyless Entry and Starting

Changing the battery If the battery is discharged, this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and an onscreen message. Without Keyless Entry and Starting ‒ ► Unclip the cover by inserting a small Battery type: CR2032 / 3 volts. screwdriver in the slot and raise the cover.

► Remove the discharged battery from its housing. ► Insert the new battery, observing the polarity,

and clip the cover onto the housing. ► Switch off the ignition. ► Reinitialise the remote control. ► Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition on). For more information on Reinitialising the ► Immediately press the closed padlock button remote control, refer to the corresponding for a few seconds. section. ► Switch off the ignition and remove the key Do not throw used remote control batteries from the ignition switch. away, as they contain metals that are harmful The remote control is now fully operational to the environment. Take them to an approved again. disposal point.

29 Access

This is signalled by a mechanical noise from the locks. If the boot is open, only the locking of the

other doors is carried out. The indicator lamp

in the button remains off.

When locking from inside, the door mirrors do not fold.

► Insert the mechanical key (incorporated into When locking/deadlocking from the The indicator lamp also goes off when the remote control) into the lock to open the outside unlocking one or more accesses. vehicle. When the vehicle is locked or deadlocked ► Place the electronic key against the back-up from the outside, the indicator lamp flashes Automatic mode reader on the steering column and hold it there and the button is inoperative. This is the automatic central locking of the until the ignition is switched on. ► After normal locking, pull one of the vehicle when driving, also called anti-intrusion ► Switch on the ignition by pressing the interior door controls to unlock the vehicle. security. "START/STOP" button. ► After deadlocking, it is necessary to use For more information on Anti-intrusion ► With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever the remote control, Keyless Entry and Starting security, refer to the corresponding section. in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal. or the integral key to unlock the vehicle. ► With an automatic gearbox, while in mode P, depress the brake pedal. Anti-intrusion security If the fault persists after reinitialisation, contact Manual mode This system allows automatic simultaneous a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop ► Press this button to lock / unlock the locking of the doors and boot as soon as the without delay. vehicle. speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). Driving with the doors locked could make Central locking / unlocking it difficult for the emergency services to Operation enter the vehicle in an emergency. If one of the doors or the boot is open, the This function enables the doors to be locked or automatic central locking does not take place. unlocked simultaneously from inside the vehicle. If one of the doors is open, the central This is signalled by the sound of the locks locking from the inside does not function. rebounding, accompanied by illumination of this warning lamp in the instrument panel, an

30 Access

audible signal and the display of an alert Side-hinged doors Opening to approximately 180° message. 2 Keeping the left-hand door closed with the Activation/Deactivation right-hand door open You can activate or deactivate this function permanently. ► With the ignition on, press the central locking button until an audible signal is triggered and a corresponding message of confirmation is displayed. If fitted to your vehicle, a check strap system

The state of the system stays in the memory allows the doors to be opened from about 90° to when the ignition is switched off. It is possible to drive with the right-hand about 180°. Driving with the doors locked may render door open, to enable the transportation ► Pull the yellow control when the door is open. access by the emergency services to the of long loads. The check strap will engage again automatically interior difficult in an emergency. The left-hand door is kept closed by the on closing. distinctive "yellow" lock, positioned at the Carrying long or voluminous objects base of the door. General If you want to drive with the boot open, This closed door must not be used to retain you should press the central locking button loads. recommendations for the to lock the doors. Otherwise, every time the Driving with the right-hand door open is a sliding side doors speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 special dispensation. Please comply with the km/h), the locks will rebound and the alerts usual safety instructions on how to warn other Doors must only be operated when the mentioned above will appear. drivers. vehicle is stationary. Pressing the central locking button unlocks For your safety and that of your passengers, the vehicle. as well as for correct operation of the doors, Above 6 mph (10 km/h), this unlocking is you are strongly advised not to drive with a temporary. door open. Always check that it is safe to operate the door and in particular, be sure not to leave children or animals near the door controls without supervision.

31 Access

An audible warning, "door open” warning Doors and door clearances On a steep slope lamp and onscreen message are there to remind you. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop if you want to deactivate this warning. Lock the vehicle when you use an automatic car wash.

Take care when opening doors while the vehicle Before opening or closing and while is on a slope facing uphill. The sloping terrain moving doors, ensure that no person, could cause the door to open more quickly than animal or object is in the door frame or any usual.

other position that would block the desired On a steep slope, manually guide the side door When open, a door projects beyond the body. movement, inside or outside the vehicle. to help it to close. Allow adequate clearance when parking If this advice is not followed, injuries or If the vehicle is on a slope facing downhill, alongside walls, lamp-posts, high pavements, damage may occur if a person or an object is the door may not stay open, instead closing etc. trapped or caught. suddenly, with a risk of injury. Always hold the door to ensure that it does not close Take care not to block the guide space unexpectedly. on the floor, to allow the door to slide On a steep slope, the door's weight may correctly. cause it to move, opening or closing For safety and functional reasons, do not suddenly as a result. drive with the sliding side door open. Avoid leaving the vehicle unsupervised on a

steep slope with one or more doors open. If To hold the sliding side door in the open this advice is not followed, injuries or damage position, open the door fully to engage When open, a door never projects may occur if a person or an object is trapped the latch (located at the bottom of the door). beyond the rear bumper. or caught.

32 Access

Alarm The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a Following an instruction to lock the

window, enters the passenger compartment or vehicle, the exterior perimeter monitoring 2 moves inside the vehicle. is activated after 5 seconds and the interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring after 45 If your vehicle is fitted with Additional

seconds.

Heating / Ventilation, volumetric monitoring is not compatible with this system. For more information on Additional Heating If an opening (door, boot or bonnet) is not / Ventilation, refer to the corresponding closed properly, the vehicle is not locked section. but the exterior perimeter monitoring will be

activated after 45 seconds at the same time System which protects and provides a deterrent as the interior volumetric and anti-tilt against theft and break-ins. Anti-tilt monitoring monitoring. The system checks for any change in the attitude Self-protection function of the vehicle. The system checks for the disconnection Deactivation The alarm is triggered if the vehicle is lifted or of any of its components. ► Press the unlocking button on the remote moved. The alarm is triggered if the battery, button or control. siren wiring is disconnected or damaged. When the vehicle is parked, the alarm or For all work on the alarm system, contact a will not be triggered if the vehicle is ► Unlock the vehicle with the Keyless Entry and PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. knocked. Starting system. The monitoring system is deactivated: the indicator lamp in the button goes off and the Exterior perimeter Locking the vehicle with full direction indicators flash for about 2 seconds. The system checks whether the vehicle is alarm system opened. When the vehicle automatically locks The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open Activation itself again (as happens if a door or the boot is not opened within 30 seconds of one of the doors or the bonnet. ► Switch off the engine and exit the vehicle. unlocking), the monitoring system is also ► Lock the vehicle using the remote control or reactivated automatically. Volumetric the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system. The system checks for any variation in volume in The monitoring system is active: the red indicator the passenger compartment. lamp in the button flashes every second and the direction indicators come on for about 2 seconds.

33 Access

Locking the vehicle Reactivating the interior volumetric ► switch on the ignition; the alarm stops; the with exterior perimeter and anti-tilt monitoring indicator lamp in the button goes off. ► Deactivate the perimeter monitoring by monitoring only unlocking the vehicle with the remote control or Locking the vehicle without Disable volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring to the Keyless Entry and Starting system. activating the alarm avoid unwanted alarm triggering in certain cases, The indicator lamp in the button goes off. ► Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key such as: ► Reactivate all monitoring by locking the (integral to the remote control) in the driver's – Slightly open window or sunroof. vehicle with the remote control or the Keyless door lock. – Washing the vehicle. Entry and Starting system. – Changing a wheel. The red indicator lamp in the button once again Malfunction – Towing your vehicle. flashes every second. When the ignition is switched on, fixed – Transport on a ship or ferry. Triggering of the alarm illumination of the red indicator lamp in the Deactivating the interior volumetric button indicates a malfunction of the system. This is indicated by sounding of the siren Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a and anti-tilt monitoring and flashing of the direction indicators for 30 qualified workshop. ► Switch off the ignition and within 10 seconds seconds. press the alarm button until its red indicator lamp Depending on the country of sale, certain Automatic activation is on fixed. monitoring functions remain active until the alarm (Depending on the country of sale) ► Get out of the vehicle. has been triggered eleven times consecutively. The system is activated automatically 2 minutes ► Immediately lock the vehicle using the remote When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote after the last door or the boot is closed. control or the "Keyless Entry and Starting" control or the "Keyless Entry and Starting" ► To avoid triggering the alarm on entering the system. system, rapid flashing of the red indicator lamp vehicle, first press the unlocking button on the Only the exterior perimeter monitoring is in the button informs you that the alarm was remote control or unlock the vehicle using the activated; the red indicator lamp in the button triggered during your absence. When the ignition “Keyless Entry and Starting” system. flashes every second. is switched on, the flashing stops immediately. To be taken into account, the deactivation must be carried out every time the Failure of the remote control ignition is switched off. To deactivate the monitoring functions: ► unlock the vehicle using the key (integral to the remote control) in the driver's door lock, ► open the door; the alarm is triggered,

34 Access

Electric windows Automatic operation The red indicator lamp in the button comes on and a confirmation message is displayed. 2 (Depending on version) The lamp will remain lit until the controls are ► To open/close the window, press/pull the reactivated. switch past its resistance point: the window The rear electric windows can still be controlled opens/closes completely when the switch is using the driver's controls. released. Operating the switch again stops the movement of the window. Reinitialising the electric windows Window controls remain operational for After reconnecting the battery, or in the event approximately 45 seconds after switching of abnormal window movement, the anti-pinch off the ignition or after locking the vehicle. function must be reinitialised. After that time, the controls are disabled. To reactivate them, switch on the ignition or The anti-pinch function is disabled during the unlock the vehicle. following sequence of operations. For each window: Anti-pinch ► Lower the window fully, then raise it; it will rise in steps of a few centimetres each time the 1. Left-hand front (Depending on version) control is pressed. Repeat the operation until the 2. Right-hand front If the window meets an obstacle while rising, it window is fully closed. 3. Right-hand rear (depending on version) stops and immediately partially lowers again. ► Continue to pull the control upwards for at 4. Left-hand rear (depending on version) least one second after the window reaches the 5. Deactivation of the electric window controls Deactivating the rear closed position. located by the rear seats (depending on controls for the rear electric version) If an electric window meets an obstacle windows during operation, the movement of the

Manual operation window must be reversed. To do this, press the relevant switch. ► To open/close the window, press/pull the When the driver operates the passengers’ switch without passing the point of resistance; electric window switches, it is important to the window stops as soon as the switch is ensure that nothing can prevent the window released. For your children's safety, press control 5 to from closing properly. deactivate the controls for the rear electric It is important to ensure that passengers use windows, irrespective of their positions. the electric windows correctly.

35 Access

Pay particular attention to children when operating windows. Be aware of passengers and/or other persons present when closing windows using the key or the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system.

Tilting rear door windows Opening

► Turn the lever outwards. ► Push it fully to secure the window in the open position. Closing ► Pull the lever to release the window. ► Turn the lever fully inwards to secure the window in the closed position.

36 Ease of use and comfort

General – In row 3, be careful not to leave your feet Front seats under the row 2 seat while it is being tilted. 3 recommendations for the – When a row 3 seat is in the fully folded position, ensure that the strap is correctly PEUGEOT i-Cockpit seats hooked to the Top Tether fixing of the row 2 For safety reasons, seat adjustments backrest: risk of unexpected tipping of the must only be made when the vehicle is seat. stationary. Before carrying out the manoeuvres, Folding or unfolding the seat backrests check that nothing and no one is must only be done with the vehicle obstructing the moving elements and their stationary. locking. To avoid sudden folding, take care to hold the backrest and support it until it is horizontal. Before moving the seat backwards, put your hand underneath the seat ensure that there is no person or object Never cushion to guide the seat downwards or Before taking to the road and to make the that might prevent the full travel of the seat. upwards, you could get your fingers trapped. most of the ergonomic layout of the PEUGEOT There is a risk of trapping or pinching Place your hand on the grip/strap (depending i-Cockpit, carry out these adjustments in the passengers if present in the rear seats or of on equipment) at the top of the seat cushion. following order: jamming the seat if large objects are placed – head restraint height. on the floor behind the seat. Please note: an incorrectly latched – seat backrest angle. backrest compromises the safety of – seat cushion height. Do not place hard or heavy objects on passengers in the event of sudden braking or – longitudinal seat position. the backrests forming a table. They could an impact. – steering wheel depth and then height. become dangerous projectiles in the event of The contents of the boot may be thrown – rear view mirror and door mirrors. sudden braking or a collision. forward - risk of severe injury! – Do not remove a head restraint without Once these adjustments have been stowing it; secure it to a support inside the made, check that the "head up" vehicle. instrument panel can be viewed correctly over – Check that the seat belts remain accessible the smaller diameter steering wheel. to the passenger and easy to fasten. – Passengers must never take their seat without adjusting and fastening their seat belt.

37 Ease of use and comfort

Refitting the armrest

Adjustments Tilting the backrest Armrest

Longitudinal

► Push the control backwards then use your weight and your legs to adjust the backrest. Lumbar (driver only)

► To put the armrest in the vertical position, ► Slot the armrest into the backrest, ensuring that you align the bayonet lugs with the holes. raise it until it locks into place. ► Raise the control and slide the seat forwards ► Lower the armrest to return it to the position ► Push the armrest shaft towards the backrest. or backwards. for use. ► While holding it in this position, rotate the The armrest can be removed from the passenger armrest towards the front. The armrest is once

seat. again secured onto the backrest. Height ► Turn the knob manually to obtain the desired Removing the armrest (driver only) level of lumbar support. Retractable position

► Raise the armrest into the vertical position.

► If the vehicle is so equipped, pull the control upwards to raise or push it downwards to lower, ► Push the armrest shaft towards the backrest. as many times as necessary to obtain the ► While holding it in this position, rotate the position required. armrest towards the rear.

► Pull the armrest to detach it from the For more information on the Seat belts, backrest. refer to the corresponding section.

38 Ease of use and comfort

Refitting the armrest ► If the centre console inconveniences you, Do not use the function when the seat remove the passenger's seat armrest. is not occupied. 3 ► Push the control rearwards fully to tilt and Reduce the heating intensity as soon as guide the assembly. possible. This position allows you to transport long loads When the seat and passenger compartment inside the vehicle with the doors closed. have reached a satisfactory temperature, When retracted, the maximum permitted weight switch the function off; reducing electricity on the backrest is 50 kg. consumption in turn decreases fuel ► To reposition the seat cushion, raise the consumption. backrest until it locks in the raised position. Prolonged use of the heated seats is not Heated seat control recommended for those with sensitive

skin. ► Slot the armrest into the backrest, ensuring There is a risk of burns for people whose that you align the bayonet lugs with the holes. perception of heat is impaired (illness, taking ► Push the armrest shaft towards the backrest. medication, etc.). ► While holding it in this position, rotate the To keep the heated pad intact and to prevent armrest towards the front. The armrest is once a short circuit: again secured onto the backrest. – do not place sharp or heavy objects on the seat, Retractable position – do not kneel or stand on the seat,

– do not spill liquids onto the seat, – never use the heating function if the seat is wet.

► Approximately 30 seconds after starting the engine, press the control. The temperature is controlled automatically. Pressing again interrupts operation.

If you press the control while the engine

is not running, the request will be memorised for approximately 2 minutes.

39 Ease of use and comfort

Steering wheel Mirrors Manual folding Heated mirrors You can manually fold the mirrors (parking adjustment obstruction, narrow garage, etc.) Door mirrors ► Turn the mirror towards the vehicle.

Adjustment

Electric folding If the vehicle is so equipped, the mirrors can be folded electrically from the inside, with the vehicle parked and the ignition on:

► Place control A in the centre ► Press this button. ► When stationary, pull the control lever to position. release the steering wheel. ► Pull control A back. For more information on Rear screen ► Adjust the height and reach. demisting/defrosting, refer to the ► Lower the control lever to lock the steering corresponding section. ► Lock the vehicle from the outside. wheel.

As a safety precaution, these operations Electric unfolding Interior rear view mirror The electric unfolding of the mirrors is via the must only be carried out while the vehicle ► Move control A or turn control C (depending Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which remote control or the key when unlocking the is stationary. on the version you have) to the right or to the left darkens the mirror glass and reduces the vehicle. Unless folding was selected with control to select the corresponding mirror. nuisance to the driver caused by the sun, A, pull the control back again to the central ► Move control B or C (depending on the headlamps of other vehicles, etc. version you have) in any of the four directions to position. adjust. The folding / unfolding on locking / Manual model ► Return control or (depending on the A C unlocking can be deactivated. Contact a Day/night position version you have) to its centre position. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. As a safety measure, the mirrors should If necessary, it is possible to fold the mirrors be adjusted to reduce the blind spots. manually. The objects observed are, in reality, closer than they appear. Take this into account when assessing the

distance of vehicles approaching from behind.

40 Ease of use and comfort

Heated mirrors ► Pull the lever to change to the anti-dazzle and without turning around. It can be folded "night” position. easily to avoid dazzle. 3 ► Push the lever to change to the normal "day" position. Adjustment Rear bench seat (row 2)

► Set the mirror to the normal “day” position. Folding the backrests Automatic "electrochrome" model First steps: This system automatically and gradually ► lower the head restraints,

transitions between day and night use, with the ► if necessary, move the front seats forward, ► Press this button. aid of a sensor that measures the light arriving ► check that nothing or no person might from the rear of the vehicle. interfere with the folding of the backrests For more information on Rear screen (clothing, luggage, etc.), , refer to the To ensure optimum visibility while demisting/defrosting ► check that the outer seat belts are lying flat corresponding section. manoeuvring, the mirror lightens on the backrests. automatically when reverse gear is engaged. The folding of the backrest is Interior rear view mirror accompanied by a slight lowering of the Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which Child-monitoring mirror

corresponding seat cushion. darkens the mirror glass and reduces the When the backrest is released, the red nuisance to the driver caused by the sun, indicator is visible in the release grips on the headlamps of other vehicles, etc. outer seats.

Manual model Day/night position

A child-monitoring mirror is installed above the interior rear view mirror. It allows the vehicle's rear passengers to be observed and

facilitates discussion between the front and rear passengers without changing the mirror setting ► Turn the backrest release handle 1.

41 Ease of use and comfort

► Guide the backrest down to the horizontal The folding of the backrest is Central seat Central seat

position. accompanied by a slight lowering of the corresponding seat cushion. Repositioning the backrests When the backrest is released, the red indicator is visible in the release grips on the First check that the outer seat belts are outer seats. lying vertically flat alongside the backrest latching rings. Folding from the passenger ► Put the backrest in the upright position and compartment push it firmly to latch it home. ► Check that the red indicator in the release Outer seat (left-hand or right-hand) ► Pull the backrest release tab 1. grip 1 is no longer visible. ► Guide the backrest down to the horizontal position. ► Ensure that the outer seat belts are not ► Pull the backrest release paddle 2 or 3 trapped during the manoeuvre. With the central seat, only the strap must towards you. be used. The backrest folds fully onto the cushion. Rear seats (row 2) Folding from the boot Repositioning the backrests Outer seat (left-hand or right-hand) Folding the backrests Outer seat (left-hand or right-hand)

First steps: First check that the outer seat belts are ► lower the head restraints, ► Turn the backrest release handle 1. lying vertically flat alongside the backrest ► if necessary, move the front seats forward, ► Guide the backrest down to the horizontal latching rings. ► check that nothing or no person might position. ► Put the backrest in the upright position and interfere with the folding of the backrests push it firmly to latch it home. (clothing, luggage, etc.), ► Check that the red indicator on the release ► check that the outer seat belts are lying flat grips 1 of the outer seats is no longer visible. on the backrests. ► Ensure that the outer seat belts are not trapped during the manoeuvre. Check that the backrest of the upright central seat is correctly aligned with the backrests of the outer seats.

42 Ease of use and comfort

Central seat Central seat ► Put the backrest in the upright position and 3 push it firmly to latch it home. ► Check that the central seat belt is not trapped during the manoeuvre.

Rear seats (row 3) While driving, it is prohibited to have a passenger seated next to a seat in the fully folded position.

Access to row 3

► Pull the backrest release paddle 2 or 3 towards you. The backrest folds fully onto the cushion. Repositioning the backrests Outer seat (left-hand or right-hand)

First check that the outer seat belts are If you want to load luggage onto the row 3 lying vertically flat alongside the backrest backrests while in the table position, the row 2

latching rings. seats must also be folded down. ► Using the row 2 seat grip, fold the backrest. ► Put the backrest in the upright position and ► To reposition it, tilt the backrest backwards Longitudinal adjustment push it firmly to latch it home. until it locks into place. ► Check that the red indicator on the release Long grips 1 of the outer seats is no longer visible. Labels in row 3

► Ensure that the outer seat belts are not trapped during the manoeuvre.

Check that the backrest of the upright central seat is correctly aligned with the backrests of the outer seats.

43 Ease of use and comfort

Fully folded position ► Hook the strap 3 on the row 2 head restraint ► Fold the seat backwards to fix its rear rod. anchorage feet. Long Returning the seat to the sitting position ► Use the control 1 to lift the backrest to its ► Fold the entire seat backwards. original position. Placing the seat in the fully folded position ► Check that the seat belt is not trapped during ► Raise the head restraint. ► Place the backrest in the table position. the manoeuvre.

Removing the seat ► Lower the head restraint as far as it will go. Head restraint height ► Place the seat in the fully folded position. adjustment

► Raise the control and slide the seat forwards or backwards. Table position Placing the backrest in the table position ► Lower the head restraint as far as it will go.

► Pull on the strap 3 to open the seat

anchorages. ► To raise it, pull it upwards as far as possible ► While still holding the strap , lift the seat. 3 (notch). Refitting the seat ► To remove it, press the lug A and pull it ► Pull on the strap to open the seat 3 upwards. anchorages. ► To put it back in place, engage the head ► Operate control 1 to fold the backrest onto ► While still holding the strap 3, place them in the seat cushion. restraint rods in the openings keeping them in

the anchorage points on the floor. Repositioning the backrest line with the seat backrest. ► Lift the bar 2, located behind the seat, to ► Release the strap 3. ► Unlock it by pulling control 1. ► To lower it, press the lug A and push down on release the feet of the seat from their anchorage ► Ensure that no object or feet are obstructing ► Return it to its initial position the head restraint at the same time. in the floor. the rear anchorage points 4 and that the seat ► Check that the assembly is anchored ► Tilt the entire seat forwards. belt is correctly positioned and available. properly.

44 Ease of use and comfort

► Fold the seat backwards to fix its rear The head restraint has a frame with Interior fittings anchorage feet. notches which prevents it from lowering; 3 ► Use the control 1 to lift the backrest to its this is a safety device in case of impact. original position. The adjustment is correct when the upper Mats ► Raise the head restraint. edge of the head restraint is level with the top of the head. Fitting

Never drive with the head restraints removed; Head restraint height they must be fitted and correctly adjusted. adjustment Never drive with passengers seated at the rear when the head restraints are removed or not in the high position; the head restraints must be in place and in the high position.

For more information on the Seat belts, refer to the corresponding section. When fitting the mat for the first time, on the driver's side use only the fasteners supplied in the enclosed sachet. The other mats are simply laid over the carpet.

► To raise it, pull it upwards as far as possible Removing/refitting (notch). ► To remove it on the driver's side, move the ► To remove it, press the lug A and pull it seat backwards and unclip the fasteners. upwards. ► To refit it, position the mat and secure it by ► To put it back in place, engage the head pressing. restraint rods in the openings keeping them in ► Check that the mat is secured correctly. line with the seat backrest. ► To lower it, press the lug A and push down on To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: the head restraint at the same time. – Only use mats which are suitable for the fasteners already present in the vehicle; these fasteners must be used.

45 Ease of use and comfort

– Never fit one mat on top of another. Rear storage compartment Light ambience 12 V accessory socket(s) The use of mats not approved by PEUGEOT This compartment is accessible from the rear The light ambience can be may interfere with access to the pedals and seats and from the vehicle's boot. configured from the vehicle’s hinder the operation of the cruise control/ It has a capacity of 60 litres and the maximum configuration menu. speed limiter. permitted load is 10 kg.

Blind The approved mats have two fasteners located underneath the seat. Opening/Closing

Roof and roof storage

Overhead storage compartment and central storage compartment

► Plug in a 12 V accessory (with a maximum rated power of 120 W) using a suitable adapter.

► To open it from the rear seats, slide the rear storage compartment shutters. ► Press and hold the button; the blind opens/ Observe the maximum power rating to

closes, stopping when the button is released. avoid damaging your accessory.

If the blind becomes trapped while The connection of an electrical device moving, reverse its movement. To do not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a

this, press the relevant switch. USB charger, may adversely affect the The overhead storage compartment (1) is When pressing the button to open/close the operation of vehicle electrical systems, located above the sun visors and can be used to blind, the driver must ensure that nothing and causing faults such as poor radio reception or store miscellaneous objects. no one might interfere with its movement. interference with displays in the screens. The driver must ensure that passengers use There is a storage space (2) located in the roof lining. ► To open it from the vehicle’s boot, place your the blind correctly. The maximum permitted load is 6 kg. thumb on the boot recess then pull the handle. Pay particular attention to children when operating the blind. In the event of sharp deceleration, Open the rear storage compartment with objects placed in the central storage care, to prevent any objects stored inside compartment of the roof may be transformed from falling out. into projectiles.

46 Ease of use and comfort

12 V accessory socket(s) USB port(s) connected by MirrorLinkTM, Android Auto® or ® CarPlay , enabling certain smartphone 3 applications to be used on the touch screen. For best results, use a cable made or approved by the device manufacturer. These applications can be managed using the steering mounted controls or the audio system controls. 220 V/50 Hz socket

► Plug in a 12 V accessory (with a maximum

rated power of 120 W) using a suitable adapter. AC 220V 50Hz 120W Observe the maximum power rating to avoid damaging your accessory.

Ports 1 and 2 can be used to charge a portable The connection of an electrical device device. It is located on the side of the central storage not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a Port 1 also enables audio files sent to your audio compartment. USB charger, may adversely affect the system to be played via the vehicle's speakers. This socket (max. power: 150 W) operates with operation of vehicle electrical systems, the engine running, and with the Stop & Start causing faults such as poor radio reception or When the USB port is used, the portable system in STOP mode. interference with displays in the screens. device charges automatically. ► Lift the protective cover. A message is displayed if the power drawn ► Check that the green indicator lamp is on. by the portable device exceeds the current ► Connect your multimedia or other electrical supplied by the vehicle. device (telephone charger, laptop computer, For more information on how to use this CD-DVD player, bottle warmer, etc.). equipment, refer to the Audio equipment In the event of a malfunction, the and telematics section . green indicator lamp flashes. Have the socket checked by a PEUGEOT dealer Port 1 also allows a smartphone to be or a qualified workshop.

47 Ease of use and comfort

Connect only one device at a time to the The portable device to be charged must be Operating check If the problem persists, have the system checked socket (do not use extension leads or compatible with the Qi standard, either by design The state of the indicator lamp allows the by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. multi-socket adapters). or by using a compatible holder or shell. operation of the charger to be monitored. Connect only devices with class II insulation The charging area is identified by the Qi symbol. Floor boxes (shown on the device). The charger works with the engine running and State of the Meaning Do not use metal-cased devices (e.g. electric with the Stop & Start system in STOP mode. indicator lamp shaver, etc.). Charging is managed by the smartphone. Off Engine switched off. With Keyless Entry and Starting, the charger’s No compatible devices As a safety measure, if power operation may be briefly disrupted when a door detected. consumption is high and power is is opened or the ignition is switched off. Charging finished. required by the vehicle's electrical system Charging Fixed green Compatible device (due to severe weather conditions, electrical detected. ► With the charging area clear, place a device overload, etc.), power to the socket may be Charging. There are two boxes located under the rear cut off, in which case the green indicator lamp in its centre. passenger footwells. Flashing orange Foreign object detected in goes off. ► To open them, slide your fingers into the the charging zone. notch and lift the cover. When the portable device is detected, the Device not well centred in Wireless smartphone charger’s indicator lamp lights up green. It the charging zone. Aircraft style tables

remains lit for the whole time that the battery is charger Fixed orange Fault with the device's

being charged. battery meter. The system is not designed to charge Device battery multiple devices simultaneously. temperature too high.

Charger malfunction.

If the indicator lamp is lit orange: Do not leave any metal objects (coins, – remove the device, then place it back in the

keys, vehicle remote control, etc.) in the centre of the charging zone. It allows wireless charging of a portable device or such as a smartphone, using the magnetic charging area while a device is being charged, due to the risk of overheating or – remove the device and try again in a quarter ► To put the table back in place, pull it upwards. induction principle, in accordance with the Qi 1.1 of an hour. standard. interrupting the charging process. As a safety precaution, the aircraft style table unhooks itself if excessive pressure is applied.

48 Ease of use and comfort

If the problem persists, have the system checked ► To store the table, pull it downwards. High load retaining net by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. 3 Do not place hard or heavy objects on Floor boxes the table. Such objects could become

projectiles in the event of sudden deceleration.

Side blinds They are fitted to the windows of the sliding side doors (depending on version).

There are two boxes located under the rear This net, hooked onto the upper mountings and passenger footwells. the lower rings or lugs, enables the use of the full ► To open them, slide your fingers into the loading volume, up to the roof: notch and lift the cover. – Behind the front seats (row 1) when the rear seats are folded. Aircraft style tables – Behind the rear seats (row 2).

When positioning the net, check that the strap loops are visible from the boot; this

will make slackening or tightening them ► To raise or lower the blind, pull it by the tab. easier. To avoid damaging the blind: – Guide it slowly, using the tab, while Remove the luggage cover shelf or roller raising or lowering it. (depending on version). – Make sure the tab is securely fastened before opening the door.

► To put the table back in place, pull it upwards. As a safety precaution, the aircraft style table unhooks itself if excessive pressure is applied.

49 Ease of use and comfort

Installation behind row 1 spring hook to the ring on the corresponding Never use the ISOFIX ring, which is for low position, you can store it folded by sliding it

strap. fixing the strap of a child seat with Top towards the backrests of the rear seats. ► Fold down the rear seats. Tether. ► To deploy it from the boot, grasp it and unfold ► Tighten the straps without raising the bench it to the boot pillars. seat. The maximum authorised weight on the ► Check that the net is hooked and tightened Two-position luggage cover luggage cover shelf is 25 kg. correctly. shelf (removable) Installation behind row 2 Standard Luggage cover

Standard Long

Long ► Open the covers on the upper mountings 1. ► Unroll the high load retaining net. In the 5-seat configuration, it is installed behind ► Position one end of the net's metal bar in the the second row seats, with the third row seats corresponding upper mounting 1, then do the stored folded away. same with the other end. In the 7-seat configuration, it is stored behind the ► Fully extend the straps. third row seats.

► Fold or remove the luggage cover. In the event of sudden deceleration, ► Open the covers on the upper mountings 2. objects placed on the load space cover ► Unroll the high load retaining net. can turn into projectiles. ► Position one end of the net's metal bar in the corresponding upper mounting 2, then do the same with the other end.

► Attach the hook on each of the net's straps to the corresponding stowing ring 4 (located on It can be installed in two different positions: high the floor). and low.

► Tighten the straps. It consists of two sections which can be folded ► Wind each strap around bar 3 located under ► Check that the net is hooked and tightened back on each other. the front seat cushion (row 1), then secure each correctly. ► To fold it from the boot, grasp it and fold it back on itself up to the rear seats. From the

50 Ease of use and comfort low position, you can store it folded by sliding it Installation towards the backrests of the rear seats. 3 ► To deploy it from the boot, grasp it and unfold it to the boot pillars. The maximum authorised weight on the luggage cover shelf is 25 kg.

Luggage cover ► The roller can be stored behind row 2 or 3.

Long Removal

► Remove the roller guides from the rails in Long ► Position the left and right ends of the roller in pillars B. the cut-outs A. ► Guide the roller as it reels in. In the 5-seat configuration, it is installed behind ► Pull out the roller until it reaches the boot ► Unlock the roller by pressing one of the the second row seats, with the third row seats pillars. handles located at the ends of the roller bracket. stored folded away. ► Insert the roller guides into the rails in the In the 7-seat configuration, it is stored behind the pillars B. Stowing rings

third row seats.

In the event of sudden deceleration, objects placed on the load space cover can turn into projectiles.

► Depending on version, you can access the boot by opening the rear screen in the tailgate and attaching the roller guides into the rails in the pillars C. Use the stowing rings on the rear floor to secure loads.

51 Ease of use and comfort

As a safety precaution in case of sharp braking, Heating and Ventilation If the interior temperature is very high Stop & Start we recommend placing heavy objects as far after the vehicle has stood for a long The heating and air conditioning systems forwards as possible (i.e. near the cab). time in the sunshine, air the passenger only operate when the engine is running. We recommend using the stowing rings on the Advice compartment for a few moments. Temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start floor to firmly secure the load. Using the ventilation and air Put the air flow control at a setting high system to maintain a comfortable temperature enough to quickly change the air in the in the passenger compartment. When washing your vehicle, never clean conditioning system passenger compartment. For more information on the Stop & Start, the inside directly using a water jet. ► To ensure that air is distributed evenly, keep the external air intake grilles at the base refer to the corresponding section. of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents, the Condensation created by the air Warning triangle air outlets and the air extractor in the boot conditioning results in a discharge of As a safety precaution, before leaving your free from obstructions. water underneath the vehicle. This is perfectly Heating

vehicle to set up and install the triangle, always ► Do not cover the sunshine sensor located normal. switch on the hazard warning lamps and put on on the dashboard; this sensor is used to your high visibility vest. regulate the automatic air conditioning Servicing the ventilation and air system. conditioning system

Storage compartment ► Operate the air conditioning system for at ► Ensure that the passenger compartment

least 5 to 10 minutes once or twice a month to filter is in good condition and have the filter keep it in perfect working order. elements replaced regularly. Manual air conditioning ► If the system does not produce cold air, We recommend using a composite passenger The air conditioning system only operates with switch it off and contact a PEUGEOT dealer compartment filter. Thanks to its special active the engine running. or a qualified workshop. additive, this type of filter helps to purify the When towing the maximum load on a steep air breathed by the occupants and keep the gradient in high temperatures, switching off passenger compartment clean (by reducing the air conditioning increases the available allergic symptoms, unpleasant odours and engine power, enhancing the towing capacity. greasy deposits). ► To ensure correct operation of the 1. Temperature.

Avoid driving for too long with the air conditioning system, have it checked 2. Air flow. There is a compartment in the interior trim of the ventilation off or with prolonged operation according to the recommendations in the 3. Air distribution. boot in which to store a warning triangle. of interior air recirculation. Risk of misting and Maintenance and Warranty Guide. 4. Interior air recirculation. deterioration of the air quality! 5. Air conditioning on/off.

52 Ease of use and comfort

Stop & Start Air flow – enhance the effectiveness of the demisting The heating and air conditioning systems function in winter, above 3°C. 3 ► Turn the thumbwheel 2 to obtain a only operate when the engine is running. comfortable air flow. Temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start On/Off system to maintain a comfortable temperature If you set the air flow control to the ► Press button 5 to activate/deactivate the air in the passenger compartment. minimum position (off), the temperature conditioning system. For more information on the Stop & Start, in the vehicle will no longer be controlled. A When the air conditioning is in operation, to refer to the corresponding section. slight air flow can still be felt however, cool the air more quickly, you can use interior resulting from the forward movement of the air recirculation for a few moments by pressing vehicle. button 4. Then restore the intake of exterior air. Heating The air conditioning does not operate Temperature when the air flow adjustment is set to off. ► Turn the thumbwheel 1 from "LO" (cold) to "HI" (hot) to adjust the temperature to your Switching the system off could result in

requirements. discomfort (humidity, misting). Manual air conditioning Air distribution Windscreen and side windows. Dual-zone automatic air The air conditioning system only operates with the engine running. Central and side air vents. conditioning

Footwells.

The air distribution can be adapted by combining

the corresponding buttons. Temperature. 1. Air conditioning 1. Temperature. 2. Air flow. 2. Air flow. With the engine running, the air conditioning is 3. Air distribution. 3. Air distribution. designed to operate effectively in all seasons, 4. Interior air recirculation. 4. Recirculation of interior air. with the windows closed. 5. Air conditioning on/off. 5. Air conditioning on/off. It enables you to: 6. Automatic comfort mode. – lower the temperature in summer,

53 Ease of use and comfort

7. Visibility programme. Deactivating the system corrects the temperature difference as quickly ► Press the “AUTO” button 6 to return to the as possible. automatic comfort programme. 8. "Mono" function. ► Press button 2 "-" until the fan symbol disappears. Air conditioning Automatic comfort mode This disables all functions of the dual-zone For maximum cooling or heating of the automatic air conditioning system. passenger compartment, it is possible to With the engine running, the air conditioning is ► Press the "AUTO" button 6 to toggle the The temperature is no longer regulated. A slight exceed the minimum value 14 or the designed to operate effectively in all seasons, mode. flow of air can still be felt, due to the forward maximum value 28. with the windows closed. The active mode appears in the display screen, movement of the vehicle. ► Push button 1 down until "LO" is It enables you to: as described below: ► Press button " " to switch the system on displayed or up until "HI" is displayed. – lower the temperature in summer, Ensures soft, quiet operation by limiting 2 + again. – enhance the effectiveness of the demisting air flow. function in winter, above 3°C. Offers the best compromise between a Temperature "Mono" function comfortable temperature and quiet The comfort setting for the passenger side On/Off The driver and front passenger can each set the operation. can be indexed to the driver's comfort setting ► Press button to activate/deactivate the air temperature to suit their preferences. 5 Provides dynamic, effective air flow. (mono-zone). conditioning system. The value shown on the display is a level ► Press the corresponding button 8 to activate/ When the air conditioning is in operation, to of comfort, not a temperature in Celsius or deactivate the function. cool the air more quickly, you can use interior When the engine is cold, the air flow will Fahrenheit. The indicator lamp in the button comes on when air recirculation for a few moments by pressing only increase to its optimum level ► Push button 1 down to decrease the value or the function is activated. button . Then restore the intake of exterior air. gradually, to avoid distributing too much cold up to increase it. 4 The function is deactivated automatically if a air. The air conditioning does not operate A setting of around 21 provides optimum passenger uses the temperature control. In cold weather, it prioritises the distribution of when the air flow adjustment is set to off. warm air to the windscreen, the side windows comfort. Depending on your and the footwells only. requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is Visibility programme normal. ► Press the “visibility” button 7 to demist or Switching the system off could result in In addition, we recommend avoiding left/right defrost the windscreen and side windows as discomfort (humidity, misting). Manual mode setting differences of more than 3. quickly as possible. If you wish, you can make a different choice from The system automatically manages the air Air distribution that suggested by the system, by changing a On entering the vehicle, if the interior conditioning, air flow and air intake, and provides ► Pressing button 3 successively directs the air setting. The other functions will still be controlled temperature is significantly colder or optimum distribution towards the windscreen and flow towards: automatically. warmer than the comfort value setting, there side windows. – windscreen, side windows and footwells, The "AUTO" symbol disappears if you change is no need to alter the value displayed in ► Press the “visibility” button 8 again to stop – footwells, a setting. order to reach the required level of comfort. the programme. – central vents, side vents and footwells, The system compensates automatically and Or

54 Ease of use and comfort

► Press the “AUTO” button 6 to return to the – windscreen, side windows, central vents, side Front demisting automatic comfort programme. vents and footwells, 3 – central and side vents, - defrosting Air conditioning – windscreen and side windows (demisting or These markings on the control panel With the engine running, the air conditioning is defrosting). indicate the positioning of the controls for designed to operate effectively in all seasons, rapid demisting or defrosting of the windscreen with the windows closed. Air flow and side windows. It enables you to: ► Press the buttons 2 to increase/decrease the – lower the temperature in summer, air flow. Heating or manual air – enhance the effectiveness of the demisting The air flow symbol (a fan) appears. It is filled in conditioning

function in winter, above 3°C. or emptied gradually, according to the value set.

On/Off ► Press button 5 to activate/deactivate the air Recirculation of interior air conditioning system. The intake of exterior air helps avoid and When the air conditioning is in operation, to eliminate misting of the windscreen and side cool the air more quickly, you can use interior windows. Recirculating the interior air isolates the air recirculation for a few moments by pressing button 4. Then restore the intake of exterior air. passenger compartment from exterior odours and fumes. The air conditioning does not operate when the air flow adjustment is set to off. When required, this function also allows faster heating or cooling of the air in the Switching the system off could result in passenger compartment. discomfort (humidity, misting). ► Press button 4 to recirculate the interior air or allow the intake of exterior air. ► Set the air flow, temperature and air Air distribution Avoid prolonged use of interior air distribution controls to the appropriately marked ► Pressing button 3 successively directs the air recirculation (due to the risk of misting positions. flow towards: and deteriorating air quality). ► For air conditioning, press this button; – windscreen, side windows and footwells, its indicator lamp comes on. – footwells, – central vents, side vents and footwells,

55 Ease of use and comfort

Dual-zone automatic air Heated windscreen ► With the engine running, press this button to consumption in turn reduces fuel

activate/deactivate the function (confirmed by an consumption.

conditioning indicator lamp).

The period of operation depends on the exterior Rear screen demisting/defrosting can Depending on country of sale. temperature. only operate with the engine is running. This function heats the windscreen in cold weather. Rear screen demisting - defrosting Rear heating and air

conditioning

► Press this button to demist or defrost the windscreen and side windows more quickly. The system automatically manages the air

conditioning, air flow and air intake, and provides optimum distribution towards the windscreen and In area 1, the heating melts ice, enabling you to

side windows. free the wiper blades. ► To turn it off, press this button In area 2, the heating enhances visibility by again or press "AUTO". preventing the build-up of snow while the wipers The system restarts with the values in use before are operating.

it was deactivated. On/Off If your vehicle is so equipped, the temperature of

Heated windscreen and washer jets For more information on the Wiper the air distributed by the system is the same as control stalk and in particular the heated the selection for the front.

windscreen and washer jets, refer to the corresponding section. On/Off Air flow ► Press this button to switch on/off rear ► Press one of the buttons 2 to increase/ screen and door mirror defrosting (if fitted decrease the air flow. With Stop & Start, when demisting to the vehicle). - defrosting has been activated, STOP mode is not available. Switch off the rear screen and door mirror defrosting function as soon as possible, as decreasing electrical

56 Ease of use and comfort

consumption in turn reduces fuel Additional heating/ Programming consumption. 3 ventilation system With Bluetooth® audio system

Rear screen demisting/defrosting can

only operate with the engine is running.

► Press the MENU button to access the

main menu. Rear heating and air ► Select "Pre-heat. / Pre-ventil.". conditioning ► Select "Activation" and, if necessary, for

programming, “Parameters". ► Select "Heating" to heat the engine and passenger compartment or "Ventilation" to Heating ventilate the passenger compartment. This is an additional and separate system which heats the passenger compartment and improves defrosting performance. This indicator lamp is lit while the system

is programmed or set in operation ► Select: remotely via the remote control. • the first clock to set/save the time at which It flashes during the whole duration of the the pre-heating temperature will be reached,

heating and goes off at the end of the heating • the second clock to set/save a second time cycle or when stopped using the remote control. If your vehicle is so equipped, the temperature of at which the pre-heating temperature will be the air distributed by the system is the same as reached, the selection for the front. Ventilation This system allows ventilation of the passenger Using these two clocks and depending Air flow compartment with exterior air to improve the on the season you can, for example, select one or the other start time. ► Press one of the buttons 2 to increase/ temperature experienced on entering the vehicle A message on the screen confirms your decrease the air flow. in summer. choice.

57 Ease of use and comfort

With PEUGEOT Connect Radio You must allow at least 60 minutes The indicator lamp in the remote control Press Connect-App to display the main between programming operations. flashes for about 2 seconds if the vehicle page. has not received the signal, in which case Then press "Programmable heating/ Long range remote control you should move to a different location and ventilation". repeat the command. (Depending on version.) ► Select the "Status" tab to activate/deactivate This enables you to switch the heating in the system. the passenger compartment on or off from a Changing the battery ► Select the "Other settings" tab to choose distance. The indicator lamp in the remote control will the "Heating" mode, to heat the engine and The remote control has a range of about 0.6 change to orange if the battery charge is low. passenger compartment, or "Ventilation" to miles (1 km) in open country. If the indicator lamp is not on, the battery is

ventilate the passenger compartment. discharged.

► Then set/save the time at which the preheating temperature will be reached for each selection. Press this button to save.

With PEUGEOT Connect Nav ► Press the "Applications" menu.

► Press the "Vehicle Apps" tab.

► Press "Temperature programming".

► Press the "Status" tab to activate/deactivate On ► Use a coin to unscrew the cap and replace the system. ► Pressing and holding this button starts the battery. the heating immediately (confirmed by the ► Press the "Parameters" tab to select The maximum heating period is about green indicator lamp coming on briefly). "Heating" mode to heat the engine and 45 minutes depending on the climatic passenger compartment or "Ventilation" mode conditions. to ventilate the passenger compartment. Off ► Then set/save the activation time for each ► Pressing and holding this button stops The ventilation is activated provided that selection. the heating immediately (confirmed by the the battery is sufficiently charged. ► Press "OK" to confirm. red indicator lamp coming on briefly). The heating is activated provided that:

58 Ease of use and comfort

– the battery charge and the fuel level are Glazed surfaces such as the rear screen Type 1 sufficient, or windscreen can become very hot in 3 – the engine has been started since the places. previous heating cycle, Never put objects on these surfaces; never – 60 minutes have elapsed between two touch these surfaces - Risk of burns! heating requests.

Do not throw remote control batteries away, as they contain metals that are harmful to the environment. Take them to an

approved disposal point. The programmable heating is supplied by

the vehicle fuel tank. Before use, make sure that you have sufficient fuel. If the fuel Courtesy lamp Always lit, ignition on. tank is on reserve, you are strongly recommended not to program the heating. Automatic switching on/off Lights up when one of the front or rear The additional heating must always be The front courtesy lamp comes on when the key doors is opened. switched off while refuelling to avoid any risk is removed from the ignition switch. Always off. of fire or explosion. All courtesy lamps come on when the vehicle is unlocked, when one of the corresponding doors To avoid the risks of poisoning or is opened and when locating the vehicle using Type 2

asphyxia, the programmable heating the remote control. must not be used, even for short periods, in a They fade to off after the ignition is switched on closed environment such as a garage or and when the vehicle is locked. workshop which is not equipped with an Take care not to allow objects to come exhaust gas extraction system. into contact with the courtesy lamp. Do not park the vehicle on a flammable surface (dry grass, dead leaves, paper, etc.) - Risk of fire!

59 Ease of use and comfort

Front: comes on when one of the front or rear doors is opened (sliding side door and depending on equipment, left-hand side-hinged door or tailgate). Always lit, ignition on.

Row 2: comes on when one of the rear doors is opened (sliding side door and depending on equipment, left-hand side-hinged door or tailgate). Always off.

Individual reading lamp If fitted to the vehicle, these are switched on and off by means of a manual switch. With the ignition on, operate the corresponding switch.

60 Lighting and visibility

Lighting control stalk Headlamp dipping When the lighting is switched off automatically ("AUTO" position), the foglamps and the dipped 4 Main lighting beam headlamps will remain on. With front and rear foglamps

Pull the stalk to switch between dipped and main They operate with the dipped beam

beam headlamps. headlamps on, in manual or auto mode. Automatic illumination of lamps/daytime In "AUTO" and sidelamps modes, the driver can Turn and release the ring: running lamps switch on the main beam headlamps temporarily ► once forwards to switch on the front foglamps Sidelamps only ("headlamp flash") by maintaining a pull on the and then a second time for the rear foglamps. stalk. ► once backwards to switch off the rear Dipped or main beam headlamps foglamps and then a second time for the front Foglamps selection ring foglamps. If the lighting is switched off automatically Operation of the selected lighting is Rear foglamps ("AUTO" position) or the dipped beam

confirmed by the illumination of the headlamps are switched off manually, the corresponding indicator lamp. foglamps and sidelamps will remain on. ► Turn the ring backwards to switch the In some weather conditions (e.g. low foglamps off; the sidelamps will then switch off. temperature or humidity), the presence of misting on the internal surface of the glass When the lighting is left on An audible signal when a front door is of the headlamps and rear lamps is normal; it They operate with the sidelamps on. disappears after the lamps have been on for a opened warns the driver that the vehicle's few minutes. exterior lighting is on, with the ignition off and ► Rotate the ring forwards to switch them on in manual lighting mode. and backwards to switch them off. In this case, switching off the lighting stops the audible signal.

61 Lighting and visibility

The lighting goes off when you switch off the Direction indicators Daytime running lamps / ignition, but you can always switch it on again using the lighting control stalk. Sidelamps

Travelling abroad

If using your vehicle in a country that drives on the other side of the road, the ► Turn the ring to the "AUTO" position. When headlamps must be adjusted to avoid the function is activated, a message is also dazzling on-coming drivers. displayed. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified ► Turn the ring to another position. An workshop. onscreen message is displayed to confirm that the function has been deactivated.

In good or rainy weather, by both day ► Left or right: lower or raise the lighting control The front lamps light up automatically when the and night, use of the front foglamps and Malfunction stalk, beyond the point of resistance. engine starts. the rear foglamps are prohibited. In these In the event of a malfunction of the They provide the following functions: situations, the power of their beams may sunshine sensor, the lighting comes on Three flashes – Daytime running lamps (lighting control stalk in dazzle other drivers. They should only be and this warning lamp is displayed in the ► Press briefly upwards or downwards, without the "AUTO" position with adequate light level). used in fog or falling snow. instrument panel, accompanied by an audible going beyond the point of resistance; the – Sidelamps (lighting control stalk in the "AUTO" In these weather conditions, it is your signal and/or a message. direction indicators will flash 3 times. position with low light levels or "Sidelamps only” responsibility to switch on the foglamps and Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified or "Dipped/main beam headlamps"). dipped headlamps manually as the sunshine Automatic headlamp workshop. The LEDs are brighter when operating as sensor may detect sufficient light. illumination In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor may Switch off the front and rear foglamps when detect sufficient light. In this case, the daytime running lamps. When a low level of ambient light is detected they are no longer necessary. lighting will not come on automatically. by a sunshine sensor, the number plate Do not cover the sunshine sensor, located on lamps, sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps Parking lamps Never look too closely at the luminous the dashboard or at the top of the windscreen are switched on automatically, without any action Side markers for the vehicle by illumination of beam of LED headlamps: risk of serious behind the rear view mirror (depending on on the part of the driver. They can also come the sidelamps on the traffic side only. eye injury. equipment); the associated functions would on if rain is detected, at the same time as the ► Depending on version, within one minute of no longer be controlled. automatic rain sensitive wipers. switching off the ignition, operate the lighting As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient control stalk up or down depending on the traffic level or after the windscreen wipers are switched side (for example: when parking on the left; off, the lamps are switched off automatically.

62 Lighting and visibility

Daytime running lamps / lighting control stalk upwards; the right-hand The activation, deactivation sidelamps come on). and duration of guide-me- 4 Sidelamps This is confirmed by an audible signal and home lighting are set in the vehicle configuration

illumination of the corresponding direction menu. indicator lamp in the instrument panel. To switch off the parking lamps, return the Automatic exterior welcome lighting control stalk to the central position. lighting Guide-me-home lighting With the "Automatic headlamp illumination" function activated, when the light is poor, the Manual sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps come

on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked. Activation, deactivation and

The front lamps light up automatically when the the duration of the exterior engine starts. welcome lighting are set in the vehicle They provide the following functions: configuration menu. – Daytime running lamps (lighting control stalk in the "AUTO" position with adequate light level). Automatic headlamp – Sidelamps (lighting control stalk in the "AUTO" position with low light levels or "Sidelamps only” dipping

or "Dipped/main beam headlamps"). This system automatically changes between Switching on/off dipped and main beam headlamps according to The LEDs are brighter when operating as ► With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps the brightness and driving conditions, using a daytime running lamps. using the lighting control stalk to switch the function on or off. camera located at the top of the windscreen. Manual guide-me-home lighting goes off This system is a driving aid. Parking lamps automatically at the end of a given period of The driver remains responsible for Side markers for the vehicle by illumination of time. the vehicle's lighting, its correct use for the the sidelamps on the traffic side only. prevailing conditions of light, visibility and ► Depending on version, within one minute of Automatic traffic, and for observation of driving and switching off the ignition, operate the lighting With the ring in the "AUTO" position, when the vehicle regulations. control stalk up or down depending on the traffic light is poor, the dipped beam headlamps come side (for example: when parking on the left; on automatically when the ignition is switched off.

63 Lighting and visibility

The system will be operational as soon If the ambient light level is very low and traffic – if the windscreen in front of the camera is Headlamp beam height as you exceed 16 mph (25 km/h). conditions permit: dirty, misted or obscured (for example, by a If the speed drops below 9 mph (15 km/h), the – The main beam headlamps sticker, etc.), adjustment system no longer operates. come on automatically. These – if the vehicle is facing highly reflective

indicator lamps come on on the instrument signs. panel. When the system detects thick fog, it The function is deactivated if the fog lamps are temporarily deactivates the function. switched on or the system detects dense fog. The system is not able to detect: When the fog lamps are switched off or the – road users that do not have their own vehicle leaves the area of dense fog, the function lighting, such as pedestrians,

is automatically reactivated. – vehicles whose lighting is obscured (for This indicator lamp goes out when the example: vehicles running behind a safety To avoid inconvenience to other road users, function is deactivated. barrier on a motorway), the height of the halogen headlamps should be – vehicles at the top or bottom of a steep adjusted according to the load in the vehicle. Pause slope, on winding roads, on crossroads. 0 Unladen.

If the situation requires a change of headlamp 1 Partial load. beam, the driver can take over at any time. Clean the windscreen regularly, 2 Medium load. Activation/Deactivation ► A "headlamp flash" pauses the particularly the area in front of the 3 Maximum authorised load. Activation and deactivation function and the system changes to camera. 4 5 6 Not used. are done via the vehicle "automatic illumination of headlamps" mode: The internal surface of the windscreen can configuration menu. – if the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam" indicator also become misted around the camera. The initial setting is position 0. When deactivated, the lighting system changes lamps were on, the system changes to main In humid and cold weather, demist the to "automatic illumination of headlamps" mode. beam, windscreen regularly. The state of the system stays in the memory – if the "AUTO" and "Main beam" indicator Do not allow snow to accumulate on the when switching off the ignition. lamps were on, the system changes to dipped bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could Wiper control stalk beam. obstruct the detection camera. Operation To reactivate the system, flash the headlamps Programming If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or the again. Your vehicle may also include some functions traffic conditions do not allow the main beam The system may suffer interference or that can be activated/deactivated: headlamps to be lit: not work correctly: – automatic windscreen wipers, – The dipped beam headlamps – under conditions of poor visibility (snow, – rear wiping on engaging reverse gear. remain lit. These indicator lamps heavy rain, etc.), come on on the instrument panel.

64 Lighting and visibility

In wintry conditions, remove snow, ice or With AUTO wiping

Headlamp beam height frost present on the windscreen, around 4 adjustment the wiper arms and blades and the windscreen seal, before operating the wipers.

Do not operate the wipers on a dry

windscreen. Under extremely hot or cold conditions, ensure that the wiper blades are Windscreen wipers not stuck to the windscreen before operating ► To select the wiping speed: raise or lower the the wipers. stalk to the desired position.

To avoid inconvenience to other road users, Fast wiping (heavy rain) the height of the halogen headlamps should be Manual controls adjusted according to the load in the vehicle. The wipers are controlled directly by the driver. Normal wiping (moderate rain) 0 Unladen. Intermittent wiping (proportional to the 1 Partial load. With manual wiping (intermittent) vehicle’s speed) 2 Medium load. Off 3 Maximum authorised load.

4 5 6 Not used.

or The initial setting is position 0. Automatic wiping (press down, then release). Single wipe (pull the stalk briefly towards you). Wiper control stalk Windscreen wash ► Pull the wiper control stalk towards you and hold. Programming The screenwash and windscreen wipers operate Your vehicle may also include some functions for as long as the control stalk is pulled. that can be activated/deactivated: A final wiping cycle is performed when – automatic windscreen wipers, screenwashing ends. – rear wiping on engaging reverse gear.

65 Lighting and visibility

On vehicles fitted with automatic air Rear wiper Special position of the After refitting a windscreen wiper blade conditioning, any action on the windscreen wipers ► To return the wiper blades to their initial screenwash control temporarily closes the air position, switch on the ignition and operate the This maintenance position is used while cleaning intake, to avoid odours inside the passenger wiper control stalk. compartment. or replacing the wiper blades. It can also be useful, in winter (ice, snow), to release the wiper Changing a wiper blade

blades from the windscreen. The windscreen wash jets are Rear wiper selection ring: incorporated into the tip of each wiper To maintain the effectiveness of the flat Removing/refitting at the front

Off. arm. wiper blades, it is advisable to: Screenwash fluid is sprayed along the length – handle them with care, Intermittent wiping (proportional to the of the wiper blade. This improves visibility and – clean them regularly using soapy water, speed of the vehicle). reduces screenwash fluid consumption. – avoid using them to retain cardboard on the Wash-wipe (set duration). In some cases, depending on the contents windscreen, or colour of the fluid and on the exterior – replace them at the first signs of wear. brightness, the liquid spray may be barely Reverse gear noticeable. Before removing a windscreen wiper blade

When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper will come into operation automatically if the To avoid damaging the wiper blades, do windscreen wipers are operating. not operate the windscreen washer if the

windscreen washer reservoir is empty. Activation/Deactivation ► Carry out these wiper blade replacement Only operate the windscreen washer if Activation or deactivation is operations from the driver's side. there is no risk of the fluid freezing on the set via the vehicle ► Starting with the wiper blade farthest from windscreen and hindering visibility. Always configuration menu. you, hold each arm by the rigid section and raise

use windscreen washer fluid suitable for low it as far as possible. temperatures during the winter period. This system is activated by default. ► Actuating the wiper control stalk within one Never top up with water. minute of switching off the ignition will position Take care not to hold the arms at the jet the wiper blades vertically. locations. ► Proceed with the desired operation or replace Do not touch the wiper blades. Risk of If a significant accumulation of snow or the wiper blades. irreparable deformation. ice is present, or when using a bicycle Do not release them while moving them. Risk carrier on the boot, deactivate the automatic of damaging the windscreen! rear wiper.

66 Lighting and visibility

After refitting a windscreen wiper blade ► Clean the windscreen using screenwash Automatic windscreen fluid. 4 ► To return the wiper blades to their initial wipers position, switch on the ignition and operate the Do not apply "Rain X" type water- wiper control stalk. repellent products. Changing a wiper blade ► Unclip the worn wiper blade closest to you and remove it.

Removing/refitting at the front ► Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the arm. The windscreen wipers operate automatically ► Repeat the procedure for the other wiper once rain is detected (sensor behind the rear blade. view mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity ► Starting with the wiper blade closest to you, of the rain without any action on the part of the once again hold each arm by the rigid section, driver. then guide it carefully onto the windscreen. Switching on Removing/refitting at the rear Briefly push the control stalk downwards. ► Hold the arm by the rigid section and raise it A wiping cycle confirms that the instruction has as far as possible. been accepted. ► Clean the rear screen using screenwash Depending on version, this symbol

fluid. ► Carry out these wiper blade replacement appears in the display screen or ► Unclip the worn wiper blade and remove it. operations from the driver's side. this indicator lamp comes on on the instrument ► Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the ► Starting with the wiper blade farthest from panel and a message is displayed. arm. you, hold each arm by the rigid section and raise ► Once again hold the arm by the rigid section, Off it as far as possible. then guide it carefully onto the rear screen. Give the control stalk another brief push Take care not to hold the arms at the jet downwards or place the control stalk in locations. another position (Int, 1 or 2). Do not touch the wiper blades. Risk of This indicator lamp goes off on the instrument irreparable deformation. panel and a message is displayed. Do not release them while moving them. Risk of damaging the windscreen! If the ignition has been off for more than one minute, the automatic wipers must

67 Lighting and visibility

be reactivated by pushing the control stalk downwards.

Operating fault If a fault occurs with the automatic windscreen wipers, the wipers will operate in intermittent mode. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Do not cover the rain sensor, located at the top of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror (depending on equipment); the associated functions would no longer be controlled. Switch off the automatic windscreen wipers when using an automatic car wash. In winter, it is advisable to wait until the windscreen is completely clear of ice before activating the automatic rain sensitive wipers.

68 Safety

General safety – As a safety measure, access to the Declarations of conformity for radio diagnostic socket, used for the vehicle's equipment 5 recommendations electronic systems, is reserved strictly for The relevant certificates are available on the PEUGEOT dealers or qualified workshops, http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/APddb/ Do not remove the labels attached in equipped with the special tools required (risk website. different places on your vehicle. They of malfunctions of the vehicle's electronic include safety warnings as well as systems that could cause breakdowns or identification information for the vehicle. serious accidents). The Manufacturer cannot Emergency or assistance be held responsible if this advice is not For all work on your vehicle, use a followed. call (type 1) qualified workshop that has the technical – Any modification or adaptation not intended information, skills and equipment required, all or authorised by PEUGEOT or carried out of which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to without meeting the technical requirements

provide. defined by the Manufacturer will result in the suspension of the commercial warranty. Depending on country regulations, certain safety equipment may be Installation of accessory radio mandatory: high visibility safety vests, communication transmitters warning triangles, breathalysers, spare bulbs, Before installing a radio communication spare fuses, fire extinguisher, first aid kit, mud transmitter with an external aerial, you must flaps at the rear of the vehicle, etc. without fail contact a PEUGEOT dealer for Peugeot Connect SOS the specification of transmitters which can ► In an emergency, press button 1 for more than 2 seconds. Installing electrical accessories: be fitted (frequency, maximum power, aerial The lighting of the indicator lamp and a voice – The fitting of electrical equipment or position, specific installation requirements), message confirm that the call has been made to accessories not approved by PEUGEOT may in line with the Vehicle Electromagnetic the “Peugeot Connect SOS” call centre.*. cause excessive current consumption and Compatibility Directive (2004/104/EC). ► Pressing again immediately cancels the faults and failures with the electrical system request. of your vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer The lamp remains lit until the call is ended. for information on the range of approved "Peugeot Connect SOS" immediately geolocates accessories. your vehicle and contacts you in your

* In accordance with the general conditions of use of the service, available from dealers and subject to technological and technical limitations.

69 Safety

language*, and - if necessary - requests that The system fault does not prevent the available to you in your personal space, via The lighting of the indicator lamp and a voice relevant emergency services be dispatched**. vehicle from being driven. the website for your country. message confirm that the call has been made to In countries where the service is not available, For information about the SOS and the emergency services*. or when the geolocation service has been Assistance Pack, please refer to the general ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’ immediately locates expressly declined, the call is routed directly to Peugeot Connect conditions for these services. your vehicle and puts you in contact with the the emergency services (112) without the vehicle Assistance appropriate emergency services**. location information. ► If the vehicle breaks down, press button 2 ► Pressing again immediately cancels the request. If an impact is detected by the airbag for more than 2 seconds to request assistance Emergency or assistance The indicator lamp flashes when the vehicle control unit, an emergency call is made (confirmed by a voice message**). ► Pressing again immediately cancels the call (type 2) data is sent, and then remains lit when

automatically, independently of the communication is established. deployment of any airbags. request. If an impact is detected by the airbag Geolocation control unit, an emergency call is made Operation of the system ► Deactivate/reactivate geolocation by automatically, independently of the – Indicator lamp on (for 3 seconds) upon simultaneously pressing buttons 1 and 2 and deployment of any airbags. switching on the ignition: the system is operating then pressing button 2 to confirm. correctly. If you benefit from the Peugeot Connect ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’ is a service that – Fixed red indicator lamp: system malfunction.

Packs offer with the SOS and Assistance can be accessed free of charge. – Flashing red indicator lamp: replace the Pack included, there are additional services back-up battery. In the last 2 cases, the emergency and Peugeot Connect SOS System operation assistance call services may not work. (PE112) – Upon switching on the ignition, if the indicator Contact a qualified repairer as soon as possible. ► In an emergency, press button 1 for more lamp lights up red, then green, and then goes than 2 seconds. out: the system is operating correctly. – If the indicator lamp is fixed red: system malfunction – If the indicator lamp flashes red: replace the * According to the geographic coverage of ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’, ‘Peugeot Connect Assistance’ and the official national language chosen by the owner emergency battery. of the vehicle. The list of countries covered and PEUGEOT CONNECT services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country. ** According to the geographic coverage of ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’, ‘Peugeot Connect Assistance’ and the official national language chosen by the owner * In accordance with the general conditions of use of the service, available from dealers and subject to technological and technical limitations. of the vehicle. ** In areas covered by ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’ and ‘Peugeot Connect Assistance’. The list of countries covered and telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country. The list of countries covered and telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.

70 Safety

The lighting of the indicator lamp and a voice In the latter two cases, emergency and and a timestamped log file recording the message confirm that the call has been made to assistance call services may not work. automatic activation of the system. 5 the emergency services*. Contact a dealer or a qualified repairer as soon The recipients of the processed data are the ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’ immediately locates as possible. emergency call handling centres designated your vehicle and puts you in contact with the by the relevant national authorities in the The system fault does not prevent the appropriate emergency services**. territory in which they are located, enabling vehicle from being driven. ► Pressing again immediately cancels the priority reception and handling of calls to the request. “112” emergency number. The indicator lamp flashes when the vehicle Data processing All processing of personal information by data is sent, and then remains lit when Data storage the "Peugeot Connect SOS" system (PE112) communication is established. Data contained in the system’s memory complies with the framework for protection is not accessible from outside the system until If an impact is detected by the airbag of personal information established by a call is made. The system is not traceable control unit, an emergency call is made Regulation 2016/679 (GDPR) and Directive and is not continuously monitored in its automatically, independently of the 2002/58/EC of the European Parliament normal operating mode. deployment of any airbags. and the Council, and in particular, seeks to The data in the system's internal memory is protect the vital interests of the data subject, automatically and continuously erased. Only ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’ is a service that in accordance with Article 6.1, paragraph d) of the vehicle’s three most recent locations are can be accessed free of charge. Regulation 2016/679. stored. Personal information processing is strictly When an emergency call is triggered, the data limited to the management of the "Peugeot System operation log is stored for no more than 13 hours. Connect SOS" system used with the “112” – Upon switching on the ignition, if the indicator European single emergency call number. lamp lights up red, then green, and then goes The "Peugeot Connect SOS" system is able Access to data out: the system is operating correctly. to collect and process only the following You have the right to access the data – If the indicator lamp is fixed red: system data relating to the vehicle: chassis number, and, if necessary, submit a request to malfunction type (passenger vehicle or light commercial rectify, erase or restrict the processing of – If the indicator lamp flashes red: replace the vehicle), fuel type or power source, most any personal information not processed in emergency battery. recent three locations and direction of travel, accordance with the provisions of Regulation

* In accordance with the general conditions of use of the service, available from dealers and subject to technological and technical limitations. ** In areas covered by ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’ and ‘Peugeot Connect Assistance’. The list of countries covered and telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.

71 Safety

2016/679 (GDPR). Third parties to which data If you purchased your vehicle outside the Hazard warning lamps Horn

has been communicated shall be notified of PEUGEOT dealer network, we invite you any rectification, erasure or restriction carried to have a dealer check the configuration of out in accordance with the aforementioned these services and, if desired, modify them to

Directive, unless doing so would be suit your wishes. In a multilingual country, impossible or require a disproportionate effort. configuration is possible in the official national You also have the right to lodge a complaint language of your choice. with the relevant data protection authority. For technical reasons, in particular to

Peugeot Connect improve the quality of telematic services for customers, the Manufacturer reserves the ► Pressing the red button causes all the

Assistance right to carry out updates to the vehicle's direction indicators to flash. ► If the vehicle breaks down, press button 2 on-board telematic system at any time. They can operate with the ignition off. ► Press the central part of the steering wheel. for more than 2 seconds to request assistance (confirmed by a voice message*). If you benefit from the Peugeot Connect Automatic operation of Electronic stability control ► Pressing again immediately cancels the Packs offer with the SOS and Assistance hazard warning lamps request. Pack included, there are additional services When braking in an emergency, depending on (ESC) available to you in your personal space, via Privacy mode allows you to manage the the rate of deceleration, the hazard warning The electronic stability control programme the website for your country. level of sharing (data and/or position) lamps come on automatically. They switch off includes the following systems: For information about the SOS and between your vehicle and the PEUGEOT automatically when you next accelerate. – Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and Electronic Assistance Pack, please refer to the general brand. It is also possible to switch them off by pressing brake force distribution (EBFD). conditions for these services. It can be configured in the Settings menu on the button. – Emergency braking assistance (EBA). the touch screen. – Anti-slip regulation (ASR). By default, depending on equipment, – Dynamic stability control (DSC). deactivate/reactivate geolocation by – Trailer stability assist (TSA). simultaneously pressing the 2 buttons, then press the "Peugeot Connect Assistance" Anti-lock braking system button to confirm. (ABS) and Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD) * According to the geographic coverage of ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’, ‘Peugeot Connect Assistance’ and the official national language chosen by the owner These systems enhance the vehicle’s stability of the vehicle. and handling during braking, and enable greater The list of countries covered and telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.

72 Safety

Horn control while cornering, particularly on poor or After an impact, have these systems

slippery road surfaces. checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a 5 ABS prevents wheel locking in the event of qualified workshop. emergency braking. EBFD manages the braking pressure wheel by wheel. Emergency braking This warning lamp comes on fixed in the assistance (EBA) event of an ABS malfunction. In an emergency, this system enables you The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive to reach the optimum braking pressure more carefully at a moderate speed. quickly and therefore reduce the stopping Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified distance. workshop as soon as possible.

It is triggered in relation to the speed at which This warning lamp, when lit together with ► Press the central part of the steering wheel. the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a the STOP and ABS warning lamps, reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an accompanied by a message and an audible increase in braking efficiency. Electronic stability control signal, indicates an EBFD malfunction. You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Anti-slip regulation (ASR) (ESC) Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The electronic stability control programme workshop. / Dynamic stability control includes the following systems: (DSC) The normal operation of the ABS may – Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and Electronic Anti-slip regulation optimises traction using result in slight vibrations in the brake brake force distribution (EBFD). engine braking and by applying the brakes on pedal. – Emergency braking assistance (EBA). the driving wheels to avoid wheel spinning. It – Anti-slip regulation (ASR). also enhances the vehicle's directional stability – Dynamic stability control (DSC). When braking in an emergency, press while accelerating. – Trailer stability assist (TSA). very firmly and maintain this pressure. If there is a difference between the vehicle’s trajectory and the path desired by the driver, the Anti-lock braking system When changing wheels (tyres and rims), dynamic stability control system automatically (ABS) and Electronic brake ensure that these are approved for your uses engine braking and the brakes on one or vehicle. more wheels to return the vehicle to the desired force distribution (EBFD) path, within the limits of the laws of physics. These systems enhance the vehicle’s stability These systems are activated automatically every and handling during braking, and enable greater time the vehicle is started.

73 Safety

They come into operation in the event of a grip Press this button. The use of snow tyres is recommended, to Malfunction or trajectory problem. ensure that these systems remain effective If a fault occurs, this warning lamp comes This warning lamp on the instrument Or in winter conditions. All four wheels must be on in the instrument panel, accompanied panel flashes to indicate that they are Turn the thumbwheel to this position. fitted with tyres approved for the vehicle. by a message and an audible signal. operating. If you wish to continue towing a trailer, reduce The indicator lamp in the button or thumbwheel Trailer stability assist (TSA) your speed and drive carefully! Deactivation / Reactivation goes off. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified When towing, this system reduces the risk of the workshop to have the system checked. Malfunction vehicle or trailer snaking. In the event of a system malfunction, this The trailer stability assist system offers warning lamp comes on, accompanied by Operation enhanced safety in normal driving, an onscreen message and audible signal. The system is activated automatically when the provided that the recommendations on towing Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified ignition is switched on. a trailer are observed. It should not The electronic stability control system (ESC) encourage the driver to take risks, such as workshop to have the systems checked. In exceptional conditions (moving a vehicle that must not have any faults. towing a trailer in adverse operating ASR / DSC is bogged down in mud, stuck in snow, on loose At speeds between 37 and 99 mph (60 and conditions (overloading, failure to observe the These systems enhance safety during soil, etc.), it may prove useful to deactivate the 160 km/h), if the system detects oscillating trailer trailer nose weight, worn or under-inflated normal driving, but should not encourage DSC/ASR systems, so that the wheels can move movements (snaking), it acts on the brakes to tyres, faulty braking system, etc.), or to drive the driver to take extra risks or drive at high freely and regain grip. stabilise the trailer and, if necessary, reduces at excessive speeds. speed. However, it is recommended that the system be engine power to slow the vehicle. In certain cases, the system may not detect It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain, snow, reactivated as soon as possible. This warning lamp flashes on the trailer snaking, particularly with a light trailer. ice) that the risk of loss of grip increases. It These systems are reactivated automatically instrument panel and the brake lamps When driving on slippery or poor surfaces, the is therefore important for your safety to keep every time the ignition is switched off, or from 31 light up to draw attention to this corrective action. system may not be able to prevent sudden these systems activated in all conditions, and mph (50 km/h). For information on weights and towed loads, trailer snaking. particularly in difficult conditions. At speeds below 31 mph (50 km/h), the systems refer to the Engine Technical Data and Towed Correct operation of these systems depends can be reactivated manually. Loads section or your vehicle’s registration on compliance with the manufacturer's Press this button or turn the thumbwheel certificate Advanced Grip Control recommendations relating to the wheels to this position. To ensure safe driving with a Towing device, (tyres and rims), braking and electronic A special, patented traction control system which The indicator lamp in the button or thumbwheel refer to the corresponding section. components, as well as the assembly and improves driveability on snow, mud and sand. comes on: the DSC/ASR systems no longer repair procedures used by PEUGEOT This system, optimised for operation in a range have an effect on engine operation. dealers. of conditions, enables you to manoeuvre in most To reactivate the system: slippery conditions (encountered during normal passenger car use).

74 Safety

Malfunction When combined with suitable tyres, this system Every time the ignition is switched off, the If a fault occurs, this warning lamp comes offers a compromise between safety, grip and system automatically resets to this mode. 5 on in the instrument panel, accompanied driveability. The accelerator pedal should be pressed by a message and an audible signal. Snow If you wish to continue towing a trailer, reduce sufficiently to allow the system to harness the This mode adapts its strategy to the your speed and drive carefully! power of the engine. Operation at high engine conditions of grip encountered for each of Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified speeds is completely normal. the two front wheels on moving off. workshop to have the system checked. A five-position selector knob allows you to choose the setting best suited to the driving (mode active up to 50 mph (80 km/h)) The trailer stability assist system offers conditions encountered. All terrain (mud, damp grass, etc.) enhanced safety in normal driving, An indicator lamp associated with each mode provided that the recommendations on towing comes on, accompanied by the display of a This mode, when moving off, allows a trailer are observed. It should not message to confirm your choice. considerable spin on the wheel with the encourage the driver to take risks, such as least grip to optimise clearing of the mud and to towing a trailer in adverse operating Operating modes regain grip. At the same time, the wheel with the conditions (overloading, failure to observe the most grip is controlled in such a way as to trailer nose weight, worn or under-inflated transmit as much torque as possible. tyres, faulty braking system, etc.), or to drive When moving, the system optimises wheel spin

at excessive speeds. to respond to the driver's requirements as fully

In certain cases, the system may not detect as possible. trailer snaking, particularly with a light trailer. (mode active up to 31 mph (50 km/h)) When driving on slippery or poor surfaces, the system may not be able to prevent sudden Sand trailer snaking. This mode allows little spin on the two driving wheels at the same time to allow the vehicle to move forward and limit the risks of Advanced Grip Control getting stuck in the sand. (mode active up to 75 mph (120 km/h)) A special, patented traction control system which improves driveability on snow, mud and sand. Standard (ESC) Do not use the other modes on sand as This system, optimised for operation in a range This mode is calibrated for a low level of the vehicle may become stuck. of conditions, enables you to manoeuvre in most wheel spin, based on the different levels slippery conditions (encountered during normal of grip normally encountered on the road. passenger car use).

75 Safety

You can deactivate the ASR and DSC Hill Assist Descent Switching on On a descent, with the vehicle stationary, if you systems by turning the knob to the " " release the accelerator and brake pedals, the OFF By default, the system is not selected. position. Control system will release the brakes to set the vehicle The state of the function is not saved when the gradually in motion. The ASR and DSC systems will no System that provides assistance when ignition is switched off. The brake lamps light up automatically when the longer act on the operation of the engine descending on loose or soft surfaces (gravel, The driver can select the system when the system is regulating. or of the brakes in the event of a change of mud, etc.) or a steep gradient. engine is running, when the vehicle is stationary If the speed exceeds 19 mph (30 km/h), trajectory. This system reduces the risk of slip or loss of or when moving at speeds up to approximately regulation is paused automatically, the These systems are reactivated automatically control of the vehicle when descending, whether 31 mph (50 km/h). indicator lamp goes back to grey in the from 31 mph (50 km/h) and whenever the going forward or in reverse. instrument panel, but the green indicator lamp in ignition is switched on. During a descent, it assists the driver in maintaining a constant speed, depending on the the button remains on. Regulation resumes automatically when the gear engaged, while progressively releasing the Recommendations brakes. speed falls below 19 mph (30 km/h) again, if the Your vehicle is designed principally to slope and pedal release conditions are met. drive on tarmac roads but it allows you to For the system to activate, the slope You can depress the accelerator or brake pedal occasionally drive on other less passable must be greater than 5%. again at any time. terrain. The system can be used with the gearbox in

However, it does not permit off-road driving neutral. ► To select the system, at speeds below Off such as: Otherwise engage a gear corresponding to 31 mph (50 km/h), press this button until ► Press the button until its indicator lamp goes – crossing and driving on terrain which the speed to prevent the engine stalling. its indicator lights up; this lamp appears in green off; the indicator lamp on the instrument panel could damage the underbody or strip away With an automatic gearbox, the system can in the instrument panel. also goes off. components (fuel pipe, fuel cooler, etc.) due be used with the selector at N, D or R. The system becomes active at speeds below 19 At speeds above 43 mph (70 km/h), the system to obstacles or stones in particular, mph (30 km/h). is automatically deactivated; the indicator lamp in – driving on terrain with steep gradients and When the system is regulating, the Active ► When the vehicle begins its descent, you can the button goes off. poor grip, Safety Brake system is automatically release the accelerator and brake pedals; the – crossing a stream. deactivated. system regulates the speed: Malfunction – if the gearbox is in first or second gear, In the event of a system malfunction, this The system is not available: the speed decreases and the warning lamp comes on on the instrument – if the speed of the vehicle is above 43 indicator lamp flashes rapidly, panel, accompanied by an onscreen message. mph (70 km/h), – if the gearbox is in neutral or if the clutch pedal Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT – if the speed of the vehicle is being is depressed, the speed decreases and the dealer or a qualified workshop. controlled by the Adaptive Cruise Control, indicator lamp flashes slowly; in this case, the depending on the type of gearbox. maintained descent speed is lower.

76 Safety

On a descent, with the vehicle stationary, if you Fastening

Seat belts release the accelerator and brake pedals, the 5 system will release the brakes to set the vehicle gradually in motion. Front seat belts The brake lamps light up automatically when the The front seat belts are fitted with asingle system is regulating. pyrotechnic pretensioning system (or double on If the speed exceeds 19 mph (30 km/h), the driver’s side, depending on equipment) and a regulation is paused automatically, the force limiter (or progressive force limiter on the indicator lamp goes back to grey in the driver’s side, depending on equipment options). instrument panel, but the green indicator lamp in This system improves safety in the front seats in the button remains on. the event of a front or side impact. Regulation resumes automatically when the Depending on the severity of the impact, the

speed falls below 19 mph (30 km/h) again, if the single pyrotechnic pretensioning system ► Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the slope and pedal release conditions are met. instantly tightens the seat belts against the body buckle. You can depress the accelerator or brake pedal of the occupants. ► Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly again at any time. The double pyrotechnic pretensionsining system operates the same way, except that it uses two by pulling the strap. anchor points rather than one, for enhanced Off Unlocking ► Press the button until its indicator lamp goes effectiveness. ► Press the red button on the buckle. off; the indicator lamp on the instrument panel The pyrotechnic pretensioning seat belts are ► Guide the seat belt as it is reeled in. also goes off. enabled when the ignition is on. At speeds above 43 mph (70 km/h), the system The force limiter reduces the pressure of the seat belt on the chest of the occupant, thus Rear seat belts (row 2) is automatically deactivated; the indicator lamp in the button goes off. improving their protection. The progressive force limiter operates in Malfunction the same way, except that it takes the driver’s stature into consideration, thus optimising the In the event of a system malfunction, this reduction in the pressure exerted by the seat warning lamp comes on on the instrument belt on the occupant’s chest in the event of an panel, accompanied by an onscreen message. impact. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

77 Safety

Outer seats Removal and storage Seat belt(s) warning lamps Rear seat belt(s) warning lamp(s)

Depending on equipment, they may be fitted with ► Press the red button on buckle B, then the The corresponding warning lamp (3 to 5) lights a single pretensioning system and force limiters. button on buckle A. up red in the seat belt and front passenger Be sure to put the correct seat belt in the correct ► Guide the strap as it reels in and take tongue airbag warning lamps display screen if one or buckle. B, then A to the magnet at the anchoring point more rear passengers (row 2) unfasten their seat Do not interchange the belts or buckles for the belt.

on the roof. outer seats with the belt or buckle for the centre seat. Before performing any operations on the rear seats, to avoid damage to the seat

Centre seat belts check that the lateral belts are properly These seat belt warning lamps only apply 1. Front left seat belt warning lamp (or The seat belt does not have a pyrotechnic tensioned. The central seat belt must be to row 2. depending on country, driver’s warning lamp). pretensioning system and force limiters. completely reeled in. 2. Front right seat belt warning lamp (or Installation depending on country, driver’s warning lamp). Advice

Rear seat belts (row 3) 3. Rear right seat belt warning lamp (row 2). 4. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp (row 2). The driver must ensure that passengers 5. Rear left seat belt warning lamp (row 2). use the seat belts correctly and that they are all fastened before setting off.

At speeds above approximately 12 mph Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, (20 km/h), the warning lamp(s) flashes for 2 always fasten your seat belt, even for short minutes, accompanied by an audible signal. journeys. Once these 2 minutes have elapsed, the warning Do not interchange the seat belt buckles, as lamp(s) remains on until the driver or the front they will not fulfil their role fully.

passenger and/or the rear passenger(s) fasten Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt ► Pull the strap and insert the tongue A into the their seat belt. right buckle (located on the passenger’s left side is reeled in correctly. After folding or moving a seat or rear bench when seated in the vehicle). Front seat belt warning lamp(s) seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned ► Insert the tongue B into the left buckle These seat belts are not fitted with a pyrotechnic On switching on the ignition, warning lamp (located on the passenger’s right side when and reeled in correctly. pretensioning system or force limiter. 1 comes on in the instrument panel, and the seated in the vehicle). corresponding warning lamp (1 or 2) comes on Installation ► Check that each buckle is fastened correctly in red in the seat belt and front passenger airbag The lower part of the strap must be by pulling the strap. warning lamp display if the driver's seat belt and/ positioned as low as possible on the pelvis. or the passenger(s) seat belt is/are not fastened or is/are unfastened.

78 Safety

Rear seat belt(s) warning lamp(s) The upper part must be positioned in the Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or hollow of the shoulder. a textile cleaning product, sold by PEUGEOT 5 The corresponding warning lamp (3 to 5) lights up red in the seat belt and front passenger In order to be effective, a seat belt must: dealers. airbag warning lamps display screen if one or – be tightened as close to the body as more rear passengers (row 2) unfasten their seat possible, In the event of an impact belt. – be pulled in front of you with a smooth Depending on the nature and

movement, checking that it does not twist, seriousness of impacts, the pyrotechnic – be used to restrain only one person, pretensioner device may trigger before

– not show any signs of cuts or fraying, and independently of airbag deployment. These seat belt warning lamps only apply – not be converted or modified in order not to Deployment of the pretensioners is to row 2. affect its performance. accompanied by a slight discharge of harmless smoke and a noise, due to the Recommendations for children activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge Advice Use a suitable child seat if the passenger incorporated in the system. The driver must ensure that passengers is less than 12 years old or shorter than one In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes use the seat belts correctly and that they and a half metres. on. are all fastened before setting off. Never use the same seat belt to secure more Following an impact, have the seat belt Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, than one child. system checked, and if necessary replaced, always fasten your seat belt, even for short Never carry a child on your lap. by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified journeys. For more information on Child seats, refer to workshop. Do not interchange the seat belt buckles, as the corresponding section. they will not fulfil their role fully. Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt Maintenance Airbags In accordance with current safety is reeled in correctly. System designed to contribute towards regulations, for all repairs on your vehicle's After folding or moving a seat or rear bench improving the safety of the occupants (with the seat belts, go to a qualified workshop with seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned exception of the centre seat in row 2) in the the skills and equipment needed, which a and reeled in correctly. event of violent collisions. PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide. The airbags supplement the action of the force- Have the seat belts checked regularly by a Installation limiting seat belts. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, The lower part of the strap must be If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors particularly if the straps show signs of positioned as low as possible on the pelvis. record and analyse the front and side impacts damage. sustained in the impact detection zones:

79 Safety

– in the event of a serious impact, the airbags incorporated in the system makes a noise and and directed from the front towards the rear of Lateral airbags are deployed instantly and contribute towards releases a small quantity of smoke. the vehicle. better protection of the occupants (with This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive The front airbag inflates between the chest and the exception of the centre seat in row 2); individuals may experience slight irritation. head of the front occupant of the vehicle and immediately after the impact, the airbags deflate The detonation noise associated with the the steering wheel, on the driver's side, and the rapidly so that they do not hinder visibility or the deployment of one or more airbags may result dashboard, on the passenger side, to cushion exit of the occupants, in a slight loss of hearing for a short time. their forward movement. – in the case of a minor or rear impact or in certain rollover conditions, the airbags may not be deployed; the seat belt alone contributes Front airbags

towards ensuring your protection in these situations.

The airbags do not operate when the If fitted to the vehicle, this system protects the ignition is switched off. driver and front passenger in the event of a This equipment will only deploy once. If a serious side impact, limiting the risk of injury to second impact occurs (during the same or a the chest, between the abdomen and head. subsequent accident), the airbag will not be Each lateral airbag is mounted in the seat deployed again. backrest frame, on the door side. System that protects the driver and front Impact detection zones passenger(s) in the event of a serious front Deployment impact, limiting the risk of head and chest injury. They are deployed on one side in the event The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the of a serious side impact applied to all or part steering wheel; the front passenger airbag is of the side impact zone, perpendicular to the fitted in the roof. longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside When driving, keep the glove box Deployment closed. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury towards the inside of the vehicle. The airbags are deployed (except the front in the event of an accident or sudden braking. The lateral airbag inflates between the front A. Front impact zone passenger airbag if it has been deactivated) in occupant's abdomen and head and the B. Side impact zone the event of a serious front impact to all or part associated door trim panel. of the frontal impact zone A, in the longitudinal When one or more airbags are deployed, centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane the detonation of the pyrotechnic charge

80 Safety

Lateral airbags Curtain airbags Advice 5 If fitted to the vehicle, this system offers For the airbags to be fully effective, enhanced protection for the driver and observe the safety recommendations passengers (except in the central seats) in the below. event of a serious side impact, limiting the risk of Adopt a normal upright sitting position. injury to the side of the head. Fasten the seat belt ensuring it is correctly Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and positioned and adjusted. the upper passenger compartment area. Do not leave anything between the occupants Deployment and the airbags (a child, pet, object, etc.), nor fix or attach anything close to or in the way of They are deployed on one side in the event the airbag release trajectory; this could cause of a serious side impact applied to all or part injuries during their deployment. of the side impact zone, perpendicular to the If fitted to the vehicle, this system protects the Never modify the original definition of your longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a driver and front passenger in the event of a vehicle, particularly in the area directly around horizontal plane and directed from the outside serious side impact, limiting the risk of injury to the airbags. towards the inside of the vehicle. the chest, between the abdomen and head. After an accident or if the vehicle has been The curtain airbag inflates between the outer Each lateral airbag is mounted in the seat stolen, have the airbag systems checked. rear passenger and the windows. backrest frame, on the door side. All work on the airbag systems must only Malfunction be performed by a PEUGEOT dealer or a Deployment qualified workshop. If this warning lamp comes on in the They are deployed on one side in the event Even if all of the precautions mentioned instrument panel, you must contact a of a serious side impact applied to all or part are observed, a risk of injury or of minor PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to of the side impact zone, perpendicular to the burns to the head, chest or arms cannot be have the system checked. longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a ruled out when an airbag is deployed. The The airbags may not be deployed in the event of horizontal plane and directed from the outside airbag inflates almost instantly (within a few a serious impact. towards the inside of the vehicle. milliseconds) then deflates within the same The lateral airbag inflates between the front In the event of a minor impact or bump at time discharging the hot gas via openings occupant's abdomen and head and the the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle provided for this purpose. associated door trim panel. rolls over, the airbags may not be deployed. In the event of a rear or front collision, none of the lateral airbags are deployed.

81 Safety

Front airbags sensors - risk of malfunction of the lateral It is recommended that children travel Do not drive holding the steering wheel airbags! on the rear seats of the vehicle: by its spokes or resting your hands on the Such work must only be done by a PEUGEOT – ‘rear facing’ up to the age of 3, centre part of the wheel. dealer or a qualified workshop. – ‘forward facing’ over the age of 3. Passengers must not place their feet on the dashboard. Curtain airbags Make sure that the seat belt is correctly Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags Do not fix or attach anything to the roof, positioned and tightened. can cause burns or the risk of injury from a as this could cause head injuries when the For child seats with a support leg, ensure that cigarette or pipe. curtain airbag is deployed. the support leg is in firm and steady contact Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or Do not remove the grab handles installed on with the floor. hit it violently. the roof, as they play a part in securing the Do not fix or attach anything to the steering curtain airbags. Remove and stow the head restraint wheel or dashboard, as this could cause before installing a child seat with injuries when the airbags are deployed. backrest on a passenger seat. Refit the head Child seats restraint once the child seat has been Lateral airbags removed. Use only approved covers on the seats, The regulations on carrying children are compatible with the deployment of the lateral specific to each country. Refer to the airbags. For information on the range of seat legislation in force in your country. Advice covers suitable for your vehicle, contact a An incorrectly installed child seat PEUGEOT dealer. For maximum safety, please observe the compromises the child's safety in the Do not fix or attach anything to the seat following recommendations: event of an accident. backrests (clothes, etc.), as this could cause – In accordance with European regulations, all Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat belt injuries to the thorax or arm when the lateral children under the age of 12 or less than 4 buckle under the child seat, as this could airbag is deployed. ft 11” (150 cm) tall must travel in approved destabilise it. Do not sit with the upper part of the body any child seats suited to their weight, on seats Remember to fasten the seat belts or the nearer to the door than necessary. fitted with a seat belt or ISOFIX mountings. harness of child seats, keeping the slack The vehicle's front door panels include side – Statistically, the safest seats in your relative to the child's body to a minimum, impact sensors. vehicle for carrying children are the rear even for short journeys. A damaged door or any unauthorised or seats. When installing a child seat using the seat incorrectly executed work (modification or – Children weighing less than 9 kg must belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened repair) on the front doors or their interior trim travel in the "rear facing" position, whether in correctly on the child seat and that it secures could compromise the operation of these the front or rear of the vehicle.

82 Safety the child seat firmly on the seat of the vehicle. – the keys within reach of children inside the Ensure that the seat belt is correctly If the passenger seat is adjustable, move it vehicle. tensioned. 5 forwards if necessary. For child seats with a support leg, ensure Remove the head restraint before that the support leg is in firm and steady installing a child seat with a backrest on a Child seat at the rear contact with the floor. If necessary, adjust the passenger seat. vehicle's front seat. Ensure that the head restraint is stored or Row 2 attached securely to prevent it from being Forward-facing or rearward-facing Row 3

thrown around the vehicle in the event of

sharp braking. Refit the head restraint once

the child seat has been removed. If a child seat is installed on a passenger seat in the third row, move the seat to its Installing a booster seat The chest part of the seat belt must be rearmost longitudinal position with the backrest positioned on the child's shoulder without straightened, so that the child seat and the touching the neck. child's legs do not touch the seats in the second Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt row. passes correctly over the child's thighs. Never fit a child seat with a support leg in Use a booster seat with backrest, equipped ► Move the vehicle's front seat forward and the third row. with a belt guide at shoulder level. straighten the backrest so that the legs of the child in the forward-facing or rearward-facing Additional protections child seat itself do not touch the vehicle's front Child seat at the front To prevent accidental opening of the seat. doors and rear windows, use the "Child lock". ► Check that the backrest of the forward-facing Take care not to open the rear windows by child seat is as close as possible to the backrest more than one third. of the vehicle's rear seat, and ideally in contact To protect young children from the rays of the with it. sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows. ► Adjust the rear seat (in row 2) to the fully As a safety precaution, do not leave: back longitudinal position, with the backrest ► Adjust the front passenger seat to the – a child alone and unattended in a vehicle, straightened. highest and fully back longitudinal position, – a child or an animal in a vehicle which is with the backrest straightened. exposed to the sun, with the windows closed,

83 Safety

"Forward facing" Otherwise, the child risks being seriously ► To reactivate it, turn the key to the "ON" injured or killed if the airbag is deployed. position. When the ignition is switched on: Vehicles not equipped with a This warning lamp comes on and remains deactivation control lit to signal the deactivation. Installing a “rear facing” child seat on the front Or passenger seat or bench seat is expressly This warning lamp comes on for about 1

prohibited! Doing so would expose the child to minute to signal the activation. Warning label - Front passenger airbag the risk of death or serious injury in the event

You must leave the front passenger of airbag deployment. Recommended child airbag active. seats Deactivating/Reactivating the front "Rearward facing" passenger airbag Range of recommended child seats secured

using a three-point seat belt. The control is located on the side of the glove box. Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg

You must comply with the following instruction, reminded by the warning label on both sides of the passenger sun visor: NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint

on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the The front passenger airbag must be CHILD can occur. deactivated before installing a rearward Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt facing child seat. Otherwise, the child risks Deactivating the front In accordance with European regulations, the table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using a seat belt and universally approved (c) being seriously injured or killed if the according to the weight of the child and the seating position in the vehicle. airbag deploys. passenger airbag

To guarantee the safety of your child, the front passenger airbag must be deactivated when a "rear facing" child seat is installed on the front passenger seat. With the ignition off: ► To deactivate the airbag, turn the key in the switch to the "OFF" position.

84 Safety

► To reactivate it, turn the key to the "ON" position. Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg 5

When the ignition is switched on: L1 This warning lamp comes on and remains "RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus" lit to signal the deactivation. Installed in the "rearward facing" position. Or

This warning lamp comes on for about 1 Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg minute to signal the activation. L6 "GRACO Booster" Recommended child The child is restrained by the seat belt. Only suitable for installation on the front seats passenger seat or on the rear side seats. Range of recommended child seats secured L5 using a three-point seat belt. "RÖMER KIDFIX XP" Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX

mountings. The child is restrained by the seat belt. Only suitable for installation on the side rear seats. The head restraint on the vehicle seat must

be removed.

Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt In accordance with European regulations, the table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using a seat belt and universally approved (c) according to the weight of the child and the seating position in the vehicle.

85 Safety

Child weight and age guide "ISOFIX" mountings Seat Under 13 kg From 9 to 18 kg 15-25 kg 22-36 kg Row 2 (groups 0 (d) (group 1) (group 2) (group 3) and 0+) From about 1 to 3 From about 3 to 6 From about 6 to 10 Up to about 1 year years old years old years old old Row 1 (a) Fixed passenger seat X Passenger seat With passenger U (f) with forwards airbag deactivated and backwards "OFF" adjustment With passenger X UF (f)

airbag activated "ON" * On some versions, the central seat is not Row 2 (b) (e) U equipped with ISOFIX mountings.

Row 3 (b) (e) U (g) (h)

Key (a) Refer to the current legislation in the country in which you are driving before placing a child in this seat position. (b) To install a rearward-facing or forward-facing child seat on a rear seat, adjust the rear seat to the fully back position with the backrest straightened. (c) Universal child seat: child seat suitable for installation in all vehicles using the seat belt. (d) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Carrycots and "car" infant carriers must not be installed on the front passenger seat(s) or the seats in row 3. (e) To install a rearward-facing or forward-facing child seat on a rear seat, move the seats in front of it forward, then straighten their backrests to allow sufficient room for the child seat and the child's legs. (f) With the fixed passenger seat (which cannot be placed in the folded position), adjust the backrest angle to 0°. For more information on the Front seats and, in particular, the folded position for the backrest, refer to the corresponding section. (g) On the Standard version, fold down the backrests in row 2. The vehicle has been approved in accordance (h) Installing child seats with a support leg is prohibited in the third row. with the latest ISOFIX regulation. U Seat position suitable for installing a child seat secured using the seat belt and universally approved for rearward-facing and/or forward-facing use. If fitted on the vehicle, the regulation ISOFIX UF Seat position suitable for installing a child seat secured using a seat belt and universally approved for forward-facing use. mountings are identified by labels. X Seat position not suitable for installing a child seat for the stated weight class.

86 Safety

"ISOFIX" mountings The mountings comprise three rings for each Incorrect installation of a child seat in a seat: vehicle compromises the protection of 5 Row 2 – Two front rings A, located between the vehicle the child in the event of an accident. seat backrest and cushion, indicated by an Strictly follow the fitting instructions provided "ISOFIX" marking, in the installation guide supplied with the child – If fitted to your vehicle, a rear ring B, located seat. behind the vehicle's seat, called Top Tether, for securing the upper strap, indicated by a "Top Tether" marking. Recommended ISOFIX The Top Tether secures the upper strap of child seats that have them. In case of frontal impact, child seats this device limits the tilting of the child seat Also consult the user guide from the child forward. seat’s manufacturer to find out how to This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast, install and remove the seat. reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in the * On some versions, the central seat is not vehicle. equipped with ISOFIX mountings. The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two latches which are secured on the two front rings "RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus and its ISOFIX A. base" Some child seats also have an upper strap which (size category: E) is attached to rear ring B. Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg

To secure the child seat to the Top Tether: – remove and stow the head restraint before installing a child seat on this seat (refit it once the child seat has been removed), – pass the strap of the child seat over the top of the seat backrest, centring it between the

openings for the head restraint rods, The vehicle has been approved in accordance – attach the hook of the upper strap to rear ring with the latest ISOFIX regulation. B, If fitted on the vehicle, the regulation ISOFIX – tighten the upper strap. mountings are identified by labels.

87 Safety

"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus and its ISOFIX "RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX" "RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX" base" (size category: B1) (size category: B1) (size category: E) Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Suitable for forward-facing installation only. Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX Attached to rings A and ring B, referred to as base which is attached to rings A. TOP TETHER, using an upper strap. The base has a support leg, height- Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining,

adjustable, which rests on the vehicle's floor. lying down. This child seat can also be secured with a This child seat can also be used in seat seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used positions not equipped with ISOFIX and attached to the vehicle seat using the mountings. In this case, it must be secured to three-point seat belt. the vehicle's seat by the three-point seat belt. Adjust the front seat of the vehicle so that the child's feet do not touch the backrest.

Locations for ISOFIX child seats In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on vehicle seats fitted with ISOFIX mountings. In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child seat next to the ISOFIX logo.

88 Safety

Child weight and age guide 5 Under 10 kg Under 10 kg From 9 - 18 kg (group 0) (group 0) (group 1) Up to about 6 Under 13 kg From about 1 to 3 years old months old (group 0+) Up to about 1 year old Type of ISOFIX child seat Cot rearward-facing rearward-facing forward-facing ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1 Row 1 (a) Not ISOFIX Row 2 (b) Rear seat behind IL (c) IL IUF/IL the driver's seat Centre rear seat (f) IL (d) and passenger’s side rear seat Row 3 (b) (e) Not ISOFIX

Key (a) Refer to the current legislation in the country in which you are driving before placing a child in this seat position. (b) To install a rearward-facing or forward-facing child seat on a rear seat, adjust the rear seat to the fully back position with the backrest straightened. (c) Installing a carrycot on this seat may prevent the use of one or more of the other seats in this row. (d) Adjust the front passenger seat without height adjuster to the fully back position. (e) Installing child seats with a support leg is prohibited in the third row. (f) On some versions, the central seat is not equipped with ISOFIX mountings. IUF Seat suitable for installing a forward-facing ISOFIX Universal seat secured using the upper strap. IL Seat suitable for an ISOFIX Semi-Universal child seat, which may be either: – rearward-facing, fitted with an upper strap or a support leg. – forward-facing, fitted with a support leg. – a carrycot fitted with an upper strap or a support leg. For more information on ISOFIX child seats and in particular on securing the upper strap, refer to the corresponding section.

89 Safety i-Size child seats i-Size child seats have two latches that engage on the two rings A. These i-Size child seats also have: – either an upper strap that is attached to ring B. – or a support leg that rests on the vehicle floor, compatible with the approved i-Size seat position. Their role is to prevent the child seat from tipping forward in the event of a collision. For more information on the ISOFIX mountings, refer to the corresponding section. Locking/Unlocking Locations for i-Size child seats ► Rotate the control located on the edge of the In accordance with the new European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing i-Size child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with i-Size side door up to lock it, or down to unlock it. approved ISOFIX mountings. Seat position i-Size child restraint system Electric child lock Row 1 (a) Passenger seat Not i-Size Remote control system to prevent opening of the rear doors (sliding side door(s), side-hinged rear Row 2 (b) (c) (d) i-U doors or tailgate) using their interior controls. Row 3 (b) Not i-Size Activation/Deactivation

Key (a) Refer to the current legislation in the country in which you are driving before placing a child in this seat position. (b) To install a rearward-facing or forward-facing child seat on a rear seat, adjust the rear seat to the fully back position with the backrest straightened.

(c) Adjust the front seat to its maximum height. (d) On some versions, the central seat is not equipped with ISOFIX mountings. i-U Suitable for forward-facing and rearward-facing "Universal" i-Size restraint systems.

i-UF Only suitable for forward-facing "Universal" i-Size restraint systems.

Manual child lock Mechanical system to prevent opening of the sliding side door using its interior lever.

► With the ignition on, press this button to activate/deactivate the child lock.

90 Safety

When the indicator lamp is on, the child lock is activated. 5 With the child lock activated, it is still possible to open the doors from outside.

In the event of a serious impact, the electric child lock is deactivated (child Locking/Unlocking lock off) automatically. ► Rotate the control located on the edge of the side door up to lock it, or down to unlock it. Any other state of the indicator lamp indicates a fault with the electric child lock. Electric child lock Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a Remote control system to prevent opening of the qualified workshop. rear doors (sliding side door(s), side-hinged rear doors or tailgate) using their interior controls. This system is independent and in no circumstances does it take the place of Activation/Deactivation the central locking control.

Do not drive with the sliding side door open. Check the status of the child lock each time

you switch on the ignition. Always remove the key from the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time.

► With the ignition on, press this button to activate/deactivate the child lock.

91 Driving

Driving recommendations Do not park the vehicle or leave the ► check that the depth of water does not Before setting off engine running on a flammable exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that Nose weight ► Observe the driving regulations and remain surface (dry grass, dead leaves, etc.). The might be generated by other users, vigilant whatever the traffic conditions. exhaust system of your vehicle is very hot, ► deactivate the Stop & Start function, ► Distribute the load in the trailer so that the ► Monitor your environment and keep your even several minutes after the engine stops. ► drive as slowly as possible without stalling. In heaviest items are as close as possible to the hands on the wheel to be able to react to Risk of fire! all cases, do not exceed 6 mph (10 km/h), axle and the nose weight (at the point where it anything that may happen any time. ► do not stop and do not switch off the engine. joins your vehicle) approaches the maximum ► Drive smoothly, anticipate the need for permitted without exceeding it. Never leave a vehicle unattended with On leaving the flooded road, as soon as safety braking and maintain a longer safety distance, the engine running. If you have to leave conditions allow, make several light brake Tyres especially in bad weather. your vehicle with the engine running, apply applications to dry the brake discs and pads. ► Check the tyre pressures of the towing ► Stop the vehicle to carry out operations that the parking brake and put the gearbox into If in doubt about the state of your vehicle, vehicle and of the trailer, observing the require close attention (such as adjustments). neutral or position N or P (depending on the contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified recommended pressures. ► During long trips, take a break every two type of gearbox). workshop. hours. Lighting ► Check the electrical signalling on the trailer Never leave children inside the vehicle In case of towing Important! and the headlamp beam height of your vehicle. unsupervised. Driving with a trailer places greater Never leave the engine running in a demands on the towing vehicle and If a genuine PEUGEOT towing device is closed space without sufficient requires extra care from the driver. used, the rear parking sensors will be ventilation. Internal combustion engines emit On flooded roads deactivated automatically to avoid the audible toxic exhaust gases such as carbon We strongly advise against driving on flooded signal. Respect the maximum towable weights. monoxide. Danger of poisoning and death! roads, as this could cause serious damage to reduce the maximum load by the engine or gearbox, as well as to the electrical At altitude: 10% per 1,000 metres of altitude; the density systems of your vehicle. When driving In severe wintry conditions (temperature of the air decreases with altitude and the Cooling below -23°C), let the engine run for 4 performance of the engine reduces. minutes before moving off, to ensure the Towing a trailer uphill increases the temperature correct operation and durability of the of the coolant. The maximum towable load New vehicle: do not pull a trailer before mechanical components of your vehicle depends on the gradient and the exterior having driven at least 620 miles (1,000 (engine and gearbox). temperature. The cooling capacity of the fan kilometres). does not increase with engine speed.

Never drive with the parking brake ► Reduce speed and lower the engine speed, If the outside temperature is high, let the applied. Risk of overheating and If you are obliged to drive on a flooded road: so as to limit the heating-up. engine idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the damage to the braking system! vehicle comes to a stop, to help it to cool.

92 Driving

Before setting off In all cases, pay attention to the coolant Starting/switching off the temperature. 6 Nose weight If this warning lamp and the STOP engine ► Distribute the load in the trailer so that the warning lamp come on, stop the vehicle heaviest items are as close as possible to the and switch off the engine as soon as possible. Starting axle and the nose weight (at the point where it Brakes The parking brake must be applied. joins your vehicle) approaches the maximum permitted without exceeding it. Braking distances are increased when towing a trailer. To avoid overheating of the brakes, the ► With a manual gearbox, shift the gear lever Tyres use of engine braking is recommended. into neutral, press the clutch pedal to the floor ► Check the tyre pressures of the towing and keep the pedal down until the engine runs. Side wind vehicle and of the trailer, observing the ► With an automatic gearbox, place the selector recommended pressures. Bear in mind the increased susceptibility to the in position P then depress the brake pedal. wind that the vehicle will have. Lighting With the conventional key / With the ► Check the electrical signalling on the trailer remote control key and the headlamp beam height of your vehicle. Anti-theft protection If a genuine PEUGEOT towing device is used, the rear parking sensors will be Electronic immobiliser deactivated automatically to avoid the audible The remote control contains an electronic chip signal. which has a special code. When the ignition is switched on, this code must be recognised in order for starting to be possible. When driving A few seconds after switching off the ignition, Cooling this system locks the engine control system, therefore preventing the engine from being Towing a trailer uphill increases the temperature started in the event of a break-in. of the coolant. The maximum towable load In the event of a fault, you are informed depends on the gradient and the exterior 1. Stop position. by illumination of this warning lamp, an temperature. The cooling capacity of the fan 2. Ignition on position. audible signal and a message on the screen. does not increase with engine speed. 3. Starting position. The vehicle will not start; contact a PEUGEOT ► Reduce speed and lower the engine speed, dealer as soon as possible. ► Insert the key into the ignition switch. The so as to limit the heating-up. system recognises the starting code.

93 Driving

► Unlock the steering column by simultaneously – In very severe wintry To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: turning the steering wheel and the key. conditions (temperature below -23 °C), to – only use mats which are suited to the ensure correct operation and durability of your fixings already present in the vehicle; these In certain circumstances, you may have vehicle’s mechanical components (engine fixings must be used, to turn the steering wheel firmly to move and gearbox), leave the engine running for – never place one mat on top of another. the wheels (if the wheels are against a kerb, 4 minutes before moving off. The use of mats not approved by PEUGEOT for example). Never leave the engine running in an may interfere with access to the pedals and ► Turn the key to position 2, Ignition On, to enclosed area without adequate ventilation: hinder the operation of the cruise control / activate the engine pre-heating system. internal combustion engines emit toxic speed limiter. ► Wait until this warning lamp goes off in exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide. The mats approved by PEUGEOT have two the instrument panel, then turn the key to Danger of poisoning and death! fixings located below the seat. position 3 without pressing the accelerator pedal, to operate the starter motor until the engine With petrol engines, after a cold start, With the Keyless Entry and Starting

starts. As soon as the engine starts, release the pre-heating the catalytic converter can key. cause clearly-felt engine vibrations when stationary, with the engine running, for The warning lamp does not come on if anything up to 2 minutes (accelerated idle the engine is already warm. In some speed). climatic conditions, the following recommendations should be followed: – In mild conditions, do not leave the engine If the engine does not start straight away, ► Place the remote control inside the vehicle, in at idle to warm up but move off straight away switch off the ignition. the recognition zone. and drive at moderate speed. Wait a few seconds before operating the ► Press the “START/STOP” button. – Depending on version, if the air starter motor again. If the engine does not conditioning is activated and the exterior start after several attempts, do not keep With a manual gearbox, the steering column temperature exceeds 35 °C, the engine’s trying: you risk damaging the starter motor unlocks and the engine starts more or less idle speed may increase, up to 1,300 rpm, and the engine. instantly. depending on the cooling requirements. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified With the EAT8 automatic gearbox, the engine – In wintry conditions, the pre-heater warning workshop. starts more or less instantly. lamp will stay on for a longer period after The warning lamp does not come on if switching on the ignition; wait until it goes off the engine is already warm. In some before starting.

94 Driving climatic conditions, it is advised to follow the For Diesel vehicles, when the ► With a manual gearbox, ideally put the gear recommendations below: temperature is below zero, lever into neutral. 6 – In mild conditions, do not leave the engine starting will only occur once the preheating ► With an automatic gearbox, ideally select at idle to warm up but move off straight away warning lamp is off. position P. and drive at moderate speed. If this warning lamp comes on after pressing the "START/STOP" button, press down on the With the conventional key/With the – Depending on version, if the air brake or clutch pedal until the warning lamp remote control key conditioning is activated and when the goes off, without pressing the "START/STOP" ► Turn the key all the way to position 1 (Stop) exterior temperature exceeds 35°C, the idle button again, until the engine starts and runs. and remove it from the ignition. engine speed can accelerate up to 1,300 ► To lock the steering column, turn the steering rpm depending on the air conditioning The presence of the “Keyless Entry and wheel until it locks. requirements. Starting” system remote control is To facilitate unlocking of the steering – In wintry conditions, when the ignition is imperative in the recognition zone. column, it is recommended that the switched on, the duration of lighting of the Never leave the vehicle with the engine wheels be returned to the straight ahead preheating indicator lamp is extended. Wait running and with the remote control on your position before switching off the engine. until it goes off before starting the engine. person. – In very severe wintry If the remote control leaves the recognition ► Check that the parking brake is correctly conditions (temperature below -23°C), to zone, a message is displayed. applied, particularly on sloping ground. ensure correct operation and durability of Move the remote control into the zone in Never switch off the ignition before the the mechanical components of the vehicle, order to be able to start the engine. engine and gearbox, leave the engine complete immobilisation of the vehicle. before moving off. With the engine off, the braking and steering running for 4 minutes If one of the starting conditions is not Never leave the engine running in an assistance systems are also turned off: risk of met, a message is displayed in the enclosed area without adequate ventilation: loss of control of the vehicle. instrument panel. In some circumstances, it is internal combustion engines emit toxic necessary to turn the steering wheel while exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide. As a safety measure, never leave the pressing the "START/STOP" button to assist Danger of poisoning and death! vehicle without taking the remote control unlocking of the steering column. A message with you, even for a short time. is displayed. With petrol engines, after a cold start, preheating the catalytic converter can Avoid attaching heavy objects to the key cause noticeable engine vibrations for Switching off or the remote control, which would weigh anything up to 2 minutes while stationary with ► Immobilise the vehicle, with the engine at down on its blade in the ignition switch and the engine running (accelerated idle speed). idle. could cause a malfunction.

95 Driving

Key left in the ignition action on the pedals, allows the ignition to be Forced switch-off with the Release on level ground switched on. ► With your foot on the brake pedal, pull the When opening the driver's door, an alert ► Pressing this button switches off the Keyless Entry and Starting again parking brake lever up gently, press the release message is displayed, accompanied by ignition and allows the vehicle to be locked. In case of emergency only, the engine can be button, then lower the lever fully. an audible signal, to remind you that the key switched off without conditions (even when When the vehicle is being driven, this is still in the ignition switch at position 1 driving). Back-up starting with warning lamp coming on, accompanied by (Stop). ► To do this, press the “START/STOP” button an audible signal and a message, indicates that If the key has been left in the ignition switch Keyless Entry and Starting and keep it pressed for about 3 seconds. the parking brake is still applied or has not been at position 2 (Ignition on), the ignition will be Should your vehicle not detect the electronic In this case, the steering column locks as soon fully released. switched off automatically after one hour. key in the recognition zone, because the remote as the vehicle stops. control battery is flat, a back-up reader is To switch the ignition back on, turn the key When parking on a slope or on a steep provided to the left behind the steering wheel, to to position 1 (Stop), then back to position 2 Remote control not slope with a loaded vehicle, turn the (Ignition on). allow starting. recognised with Keyless wheels against the kerb then apply the Entry and Starting parking brake. With Keyless Entry and Starting If the remote control is no longer in the Pressing the brake pedal facilitates the ► With the remote control in the recognition recognition zone, a message appears in the application and release of the manual zone, press the "START/STOP" button. instrument panel when closing a door or trying to With a manual gearbox, the engine switches off parking brake. switch off the engine. and the steering column locks. ► Place and hold the remote control against the ► To confirm switching off the engine, press With a manual gearbox, engage a gear With the EAT8 automatic gearbox, the engine reader, then: and hold the "START/STOP" button for about and then switch off the ignition. switches off. ► With a manual gearbox, shift the gear lever 3 seconds, then contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a If the vehicle is not immobilised, the into neutral, press the clutch pedal to the floor qualified workshop. With an automatic gearbox, place the engine will not stop. and keep the pedal down until the engine runs. ► With an automatic gearbox, place the selector gear selector in position P, then switch in position P then depress the brake pedal. Manual parking brake off the ignition. Switching on the ignition ► Then, press the "START/STOP" button. with Keyless Entry and The engine starts. Application ► With your foot on the brake pedal, pull Electric parking brake Starting the parking brake lever up to immobilise your In automatic mode, this system applies the With the Keyless Entry and Starting vehicle. parking brake when the engine is switched off system’s electronic key inside the vehicle, and releases it when the vehicle moves off. pressing the "START/STOP" button, with no

96 Driving

Release on level ground As a safety measure with an automatic gearbox, if the parking brake is not applied, 6 ► With your foot on the brake pedal, pull the immobilise the vehicle by placing the chocks parking brake lever up gently, press the release supplied against one of the wheels. button, then lower the lever fully. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified When the vehicle is being driven, this workshop. warning lamp coming on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message, indicates that the parking brake is still applied or has not been fully released. At any time, with the engine running: When parking on a slope or on a steep ► to apply the parking brake, briefly pull the slope with a loaded vehicle, turn the control lever; wheels against the kerb then apply the ► to release it, briefly push the control lever parking brake. while pressing the brake pedal. Automatic mode is activated by default. Pressing the brake pedal facilitates the Before leaving the vehicle, check that the application and release of the manual Indicator lamp parking brake is applied: the indicator lamps in the instrument panel and the control parking brake. This indicator lamp comes on in the lever must be on fixed. instrument panel and on the control lever If the parking brake is not applied, there is an With a manual gearbox, engage a gear to confirm the application of the parking brake, audible signal and a message is displayed on and then switch off the ignition. accompanied by display of the message opening the driver's door. "Parking brake applied". With an automatic gearbox, place the It goes off to confirm the release of the parking Never leave a child alone inside the gear selector in position P, then switch brake. vehicle as they could release the parking off the ignition. This indicator lamp flashes on the control lever when manual parking brake application or brake. release is performed. When towing, parking on a steep slope In the event of a battery failure, the Electric parking brake or if the vehicle is heavily laden, turn the electric parking brake does not work. In automatic mode, this system applies the wheels towards the kerb and with a manual As a safety measure with a manual gearbox, parking brake when the engine is switched off gearbox, engage a gear. if the parking brake is not applied, immobilise and releases it when the vehicle moves off. When towing, parking on a steep slope, or if the vehicle by engaging a gear. the vehicle is heavily laden, turn the wheels

97 Driving

towards the kerb and select mode P with an accompanied by the display of the message Automatic application Parking the vehicle with the brake automatic gearbox. "Parking brake applied". With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake released When towing, the vehicle is approved for is applied automatically when the engine is In very cold conditions (ice), applying the parking on slopes of up to 12%. Automatic operation switched off. parking brake is not recommended. When the parking brake is applied, the brake To immobilise the vehicle, engage a gear or Automatic release indicator lamp and the P indicator lamp in the Manual operation place the chocks against one of the wheels. Ensure first that the engine is running and the control lever come on, accompanied by the driver's door is properly closed. Manual release onscreen message "Parking brake applied". The electric parking brake releases With an automatic gearbox, mode P is It is not applied automatically if the With the ignition on or engine running: automatically and progressively when the automatically selected when the ignition engine stalls or enters STOP mode with ► Press the brake pedal. vehicle moves off. is switched off. The wheels are blocked. Stop & Start. ► While maintaining pressure on the brake With a manual gearbox For more information on Free-wheeling, refer pedal, briefly push the control lever. ► Fully depress the clutch pedal, engage first to the corresponding section. The complete release of the parking brake is gear or reverse. With automatic operation, it is also confirmed by the braking indicator lamp and the ► Press the accelerator pedal and release the possible to manually apply or release the With an automatic gearbox, while mode P indicator lamp in the control lever going off, clutch pedal. parking brake using the control lever. N is selected, opening the driver’s door accompanied by the display of the message With an automatic gearbox triggers an audible signal. It stops when the "Parking brake released". ► Press the brake pedal. Special cases driver's door closes again. If you push the control lever without ► Select position D, M or R. pressing the brake pedal, the parking ► Release the brake pedal and press the Immobilisation of the vehicle with the accelerator pedal. Deactivating automatic brake will not be released and a message is engine running displayed. operation With an automatic gearbox, if the brake To immobilise the vehicle with the engine In some situations, for example when it is does not release automatically, check running, briefly pull the control lever. extremely cold or when towing (e.g. caravan, Manual application that the front doors are correctly closed. Application of the parking brake is confirmed breakdown), it may be necessary to deactivate With the vehicle stationary: by illumination of the braking indicator lamp automatic operation of the system. ► Pull briefly on the control lever. When stationary with the engine running, and the P indicator lamp in the control lever, ► Start the engine. Confirmation of the application instruction is do not press the accelerator pedal accompanied by the display of the message ► Apply the parking brake with the control lever, signalled by flashing of the indicator lamp in the unnecessarily - risk of parking brake release. "Parking brake applied". if it is released. control lever. ► Take your foot fully off the brake pedal. The application of the parking brake is confirmed by illumination of the braking indicator lamp and of the P indicator lamp in the control lever,

98 Driving

Parking the vehicle with the brake ► Push and hold the control lever in the release released direction for at least 10 seconds and no more 6 than 15 seconds. If the ABS and DSC systems malfunction, In very cold conditions (ice), applying the ► Release the control lever. signalled by the illumination of one or both parking brake is not recommended. ► Press and hold the brake pedal. warning lamps in the instrument panel, then To immobilise the vehicle, engage a gear or ► Pull the control lever in the application stability of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed. place the chocks against one of the wheels. direction for 2 seconds. In this event, stability must be assured by the Deactivation of the automatic functions is driver by repeating alternate "pull-release" With an automatic gearbox, mode P is confirmed by illumination of this indicator actions on the control lever until the vehicle is automatically selected when the ignition lamp in the instrument panel. immobilised. is switched off. The wheels are blocked. ► Release the control lever and the brake For more information on Free-wheeling, refer pedal. to the corresponding section. From now on, the parking brake can only be Hill start assist applied and released manually using the control This system keeps your vehicle briefly stationary With an automatic gearbox, while mode lever. (for approximately 2 seconds) when making a hill N is selected, opening the driver’s door Repeat this procedure to reactivate automatic start, while you transfer your foot from the brake triggers an audible signal. It stops when the operation (confirmed by the indicator lamp in the pedal to the accelerator pedal. driver's door closes again. instrument panel going off). This system is only active when: – the vehicle is completely stationary, with your Emergency braking foot on the brake pedal, Deactivating automatic In the event of a fault with the brake pedal or – certain slope conditions are met, operation in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver taken ill, – the driver’s door is closed. In some situations, for example when it is driver under instruction), a continuous pull on Do not leave the vehicle while it is being extremely cold or when towing (e.g. caravan, the electric parking brake control lever will brake held temporarily by hill start assist. breakdown), it may be necessary to deactivate the vehicle. Braking takes place while the control If someone needs to get out of the vehicle automatic operation of the system. lever is being pulled; it is interrupted when the with the engine running, apply the parking ► Start the engine. control lever is released. brake manually. After that, ensure that the ► Apply the parking brake with the control lever, The ABS and DSC systems ensure stability of parking brake indicator lamp and the indicator if it is released. the vehicle during emergency braking. lamp P in the electric parking brake control ► Take your foot fully off the brake pedal. If the emergency braking malfunctions, the lever are on fixed. message "Parking brake control faulty" will be displayed in the instrument panel.

99 Driving

The hill start assist function cannot be Facing downhill, with the vehicle stationary Only engage reverse gear when the Engaging reverse gear deactivated. However, use of the parking and reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held vehicle is stationary with the engine at brake to immobilise the vehicle interrupts its for a short time when you release the brake idle. operation. pedal. As a safety precaution and to facilitate Malfunction Operation engine starting:

These warning lamps come on in – always select neutral, the event of a malfunction. – depress the clutch pedal. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked. 6-speed manual gearbox

5-speed manual gearbox Engaging 5th or 6th gear ► Raise the ring under the knob and move the Engaging reverse gear ► Move the gear selector fully to the right to gear lever to the left, then forwards. engage 5th or 6th gear.

Only engage reverse gear when the Facing uphill, with the vehicle stationary, Failure to follow this instruction could vehicle is stationary with the engine at the vehicle is held for a short time when you cause permanent damage to the gearbox idle. release the brake pedal: (inadvertent engagement of 3rd or 4th gear). – provided you are in first gear or neutral with a As a safety precaution and to facilitate manual gearbox. engine starting: – provided you are in mode D or M with an – always select neutral, automatic gearbox. – depress the clutch pedal.

Automatic gearbox ► With the clutch pedal fully depressed, you 8-speed automatic gearbox which offers a choice must place the gear lever in neutral. between the comfort of automatic operation or ► Move the gear lever to the right, then pull it manual gear changing. back. Two driving modes are available: – Automatic operation for electronic

management of the gears by the gearbox:

100 Driving

Engaging reverse gear – Manual operation for sequential changing of Steering mounted controls the gears by the driver. 6 In automatic mode, you can still change gear manually using the steering mounted control paddles (e.g. to overtake). Gear selector To turn the gear selector in complete safety, it is recommended that you keep

your foot on the brake pedal. ► Pull the right-hand "+" or left-hand "-" control paddle towards you to change up or down.

► Raise the ring under the knob and move the The steering mounted controls do not gear lever to the left, then forwards. allow neutral to be selected and reverse gear to be engaged or disengaged. Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle. Information displayed on the instrument panel As a safety precaution and to facilitate engine starting: – always select neutral,

– depress the clutch pedal. P. Park. R. Reverse. N. Neutral. Automatic gearbox D. Drive (automatic operation). M. Manual (manual operation with sequential

8-speed automatic gearbox which offers a choice changing of the gears). between the comfort of automatic operation or When you move the selector or press button M, manual gear changing. Position N can be used in traffic jams or the corresponding gear and indicator lamp are Two driving modes are available: in a car wash tunnel. shown on the instrument panel. – Automatic operation for electronic The "-" symbol is displayed if a value is invalid. management of the gears by the gearbox:

101 Driving

► If the message "Foot on the brake" is is selected, the vehicle moves even without If the accelerator pedal is sharply released, the As a safety precaution, never leave the displayed on the instrument panel, press the accelerator being pressed. gearbox will not shift to a higher gear for safety vehicle with the engine running and the the brake pedal firmly. Never leave children unsupervised inside the reasons. doors closed. vehicle. Never select position N while the vehicle Moving off As a safety measure, never leave the vehicle is moving. ► With your foot on the brake, select without taking your key or remote control with Manual operation Never select positions P or R unless the position . you, even for a short time. ► With the selector in position D, press P vehicle is completely stationary. ► Start the engine. When carrying out maintenance with the button M to enable 6-speed sequential If the conditions are not met, there is an audible engine running, apply the parking brake and gear changing. signal, accompanied by a message on the select position P. Temporary manual control The indicator lamp for the button comes on. instrument panel screen. ► Operate the "+" or "-" steering mounted of gear changes controls. ► Release the parking brake. With an automatic gearbox, never try to You can temporarily assume control of gear appears and the engaged gears are ► Select position R, N or D. start the engine by pushing the vehicle. M changing using the "+" et "-” steering-mounted shown in succession on the instrument When moving off on a steep slope with a controls. The gear change request will be panel. loaded vehicle, press the brake pedal, Automatic operation executed if the engine speed permits. ► You can revert to automatic operation at any select position D, release the parking brake, ► Select position D for automatic This function allows you to anticipate certain time by pressing button M again. then release the brake pedal. changing of the gears. situations, such as overtaking another vehicle or The indicator lamp for the button goes off. approaching a bend in the road. ► Gradually release the brake pedal. The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive In manual mode, there is no need to After a few seconds with no inputs via the control The vehicle moves off immediately. mode, without any intervention on the part of the release the accelerator pedal while paddles, the gearbox reverts to automatic driver. It continuously selects the most suitable changing gear. If P is displayed on the instrument panel gear according to the driving style, the road operation. but the selector is in another position, profile and the load in the vehicle. It is only possible to change from one place the selector in position P to allow the For maximum acceleration without Creeping (moving without gear to another if the vehicle speed and engine to be started. touching the selector, press the using the accelerator) If position is selected inadvertently while engine speed permit. N accelerator fully down (kick-down). The gearbox This function facilitates manoeuvring of the driving, allow the engine to return to idle, then changes down automatically or holds the gear vehicle at low speed (when parking, in traffic select position to accelerate. If the engine speed is too low or too high, D selected until the maximum engine speed is jams, etc.). the selected gear flashes for a few reached. When the engine is at idle, with the parking When the engine is running at idle with When braking, the gearbox changes down brake released and gear position D, M or R the brakes released, if position R, D or M automatically to provide effective engine braking. selected, the vehicle begins to creep forward as soon as you take your foot off the brake pedal (even without pressing the accelerator).

102 Driving

As a safety precaution, never leave the seconds, then the gear actually engaged is Stopping the vehicle vehicle with the engine running and the shown. 6 Before switching off the engine, select position doors closed. When the vehicle is stationary or moving very P then apply the parking brake to immobilise the slowly, the gearbox automatically selects gear vehicle. M1. Manual operation A point of resistance may be noticed ► With the selector in position , press D To preserve the brakes while descending when moving to position P. button to enable 6-speed M sequential a steep incline, use engine braking to If the selector is not in position P when the gear changing. reduce your speed (change down or select a driver's door is opened or approximately The indicator lamp for the button comes on. lower gear). 45 seconds after the ignition is switched off, ► Operate the " " or " " steering mounted + - Keeping the brake pedal pressed an audible signal sounds and a message controls. continuously for long periods can overheat appears. appears and the engaged gears are M the brakes, with the risk of damaging the ► Return the gear selector to position P; shown in succession on the instrument braking system or making it inoperative. the audible signal stops and the message panel. Only use the brakes when necessary, to slow disappears. ► You can revert to automatic operation at any or stop the vehicle. time by pressing button M again. On a steep slope with a loaded vehicle, The indicator lamp for the button goes off. Depending on the road configuration press the brake pedal, select position In manual mode, there is no need to (e.g. mountainous road), manual P, apply the parking brake then release the release the accelerator pedal while operation may be preferable. brake pedal. changing gear. Automatic operation may not always be suitable, and does not enable engine braking. In all circumstances, ensure that the It is only possible to change from one selector is in position P before leaving gear to another if the vehicle speed and your vehicle. engine speed permit. Invalid value during manual operation Operating fault If the engine speed is too low or too high, This symbol is displayed if a gear is not When the ignition is on, a message appears the selected gear flashes for a few engaged correctly (gear selector between in the instrument panel screen to indicate a two positions). gearbox fault. ► Place the selector "correctly" at a position. In this case, the gearbox switches to back-up mode and is locked in 3rd gear. You may feel a substantial knock when changing from P to R

103 Driving

and from N to R. This will not cause any damage Operation phases when the vehicle is stopped (red lights, Deactivation/Activation to the gearbox. queues, etc.). The engine restarts automatically Depending on the driving situation and the Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h), local speed - START mode - as soon as the driver wishes to With button vehicle's equipment, the system may advise to restrictions permitting. move off again. skip one or more gears. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a Primarily designed for urban use, the function Gear shift recommendations should not be qualified workshop. is intended to reduce fuel consumption and

considered compulsory. In fact, the road layout,

exhaust emissions as well as the noise level There is a risk of damage to the gearbox: the traffic density and safety remain the deciding when stationary. – if you press the accelerator and factors when choosing the best gear. The driver The function does not affect the functionalities of brake pedals at the same time (braking or therefore remains responsible for deciding the vehicle, in particular the braking. acceleration must be done only with the right whether or not to follow the indications issued by

foot), the system. Opening the bonnet – if you force the selector from position P to This function cannot be deactivated. Before doing anything under the bonnet, ► To deactivate or reactivate the system, press another position when the battery is flat. deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid this button. With an automatic gearbox, the system is any risk of injury caused by the engine The indicator lamp is lit when the system is only active in manual operation. To reduce fuel consumption when restarting automatically. deactivated. stationary for long periods with the The information appears in the instrument With audio system/touch screen engine running (traffic jam, etc.), position the panel, in the form of an ascending or The system is activated and selector on N and apply the parking brake. descending arrow and the recommended gear. deactivated via the vehicle The system adapts its gear shift configuration menu. If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox, recommendation according to the driving Driving on flooded roads do not try to start the engine by pushing If the system has been deactivated in conditions (slope, load, etc.) and the driver’s Before entering into a flooded area, it is the vehicle. STOP mode, the engine restarts requirements (power, acceleration, braking, strongly recommended that you deactivate immediately. etc.). the Stop & Start system. The system never suggests: For more information on Driving The system reactivates automatically Gear efficiency indicator – engaging first gear; recommendations, particularly on flooded – engaging reverse. whenever the engine is started by the (Depending on engine.) roads, refer to the corresponding section. driver. This system helps reduce fuel consumption by recommending the most appropriate gear. Stop & Start The Stop & Start function puts the engine temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during

104 Driving

Deactivation/Activation Operation Special cases: The engine will not go into standby if all of the 6 With button Main conditions for operation conditions for operation are not met and in the – The driver’s door must be closed. following cases. – The sliding side door must be closed. – Steep slope (ascending or descending). – The driver's seat belt must be fastened. – Vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph (10 km/h)

– The state of charge of the battery must be since the last engine start (with the key or the sufficient. “START/STOP” button). – The temperature of the engine must be within – The electric parking brake is applied or being its nominal operating range. applied. – The outside temperature must be between

– Needed to maintain a comfortable temperature 0°C and 35°C. ► To deactivate or reactivate the system, press in the passenger compartment. – Demisting active. this button. Putting the engine into standby The indicator lamp is lit when the system is In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes (STOP mode) deactivated. for a few seconds, then goes off. The engine automatically goes into standby With audio system/touch screen as soon as the driver indicates the intention of After the engine has restarted, STOP stopping. mode is not available until the vehicle The system is activated and has reached a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h). deactivated via the vehicle – With a manual gearbox: at a speed below configuration menu. 2 mph (3 km/h) or with the vehicle stationary (depending on engine), with the gear lever in During parking manoeuvres, STOP mode If the system has been deactivated in neutral and the clutch pedal released. is not available for a few seconds after STOP mode, the engine restarts – With an automatic gearbox: at a speed below coming out of reverse gear or turning the immediately. 2 mph (3 km/h) or with the vehicle stationary steering wheel. (depending on engine), with the brake pedal The system reactivates automatically depressed or the gear selector in position N. Restarting the engine (START mode) whenever the engine is started by the Time counter The engine automatically restarts as soon as the driver. A time counter adds up the time spent in standby driver indicates the intention of moving off again. during the journey. It is reset to zero every time – With a manual gearbox: with the clutch pedal the ignition is switched on. fully depressed. – With an automatic gearbox:

105 Driving

• With the selector in position D or M: with the the gear selector in position N and depress the Driving with under-inflated tyres, particularly Under-inflation alert brake pedal released. brake pedal. in adverse conditions (heavy load, high This is signalled by the fixed illumination • With the selector in position and the brake ► Switch off the ignition then start the engine speed, long journey): N of this warning lamp, accompanied by an pedal released: with the selector at or . again with the key or the " " button. – worsens road-holding. D M START/STOP audible signal and, depending on equipment, the • With the selector in position P and the brake – lengthens braking distances. The Stop & Start system requires a 12 V display of a message. pedal depressed: with the selector at R, N, – causes premature wear of the tyres. battery of specific technology and ► Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive D or M. – increases fuel consumption. specification. steering movements and avoid sudden braking. Special cases All work concerning the battery must be ► Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do carried out only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a The inflation pressures defined for the so. The engine will restart automatically if all qualified workshop. vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure conditions for operation are met again and in the label. The loss of pressure detected does not following case. For more information on the Identification always cause visible bulging of the tyre. – Speed of the vehicle exceeds 2 mph (3 km/h) markings, refer to the corresponding section. Do not rely on just a visual check. (depending on the engine). Under-inflation detection ► Using a compressor, such as the one in In this case, this indicator lamp flashes for This system automatically checks the pressures Checking tyre pressures the temporary puncture repair kit, check the a few seconds, then goes off. of the tyres while driving. This check should be done when the pressures of the four tyres when cold. It compares the information given by the wheel tyres are "cold" (vehicle stopped for 1 hour or ► If it is not possible to make this check Malfunctions speed sensors with reference values, which after a journey of less than 6 miles (10 km) at immediately, drive carefully at reduced speed. Depending on the vehicle’s equipment: must be reinitialised every time the tyre moderate speeds). ► In the event of a puncture, use the In the event of a system malfunction, this pressures are adjusted or a wheel changed. Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the pressures temporary puncture repair kit or the spare wheel warning lamp flashes on the instrument The system triggers an alert as soon as it shown on the label. (depending on equipment). panel. detects a drop in the inflation pressure of one or The warning lamp in this button flashes more tyres. The alert is kept active until the system is Snow chains and a message appears, accompanied by reinitialised. Under-inflation detection does not The system does not have to be an audible signal. replace the need for vigilance on the part reinitialised after fitting or removing snow Have the vehicle checked by a PEUGEOT of the driver. chains. dealer or a qualified workshop. Reinitialisation This system does not avoid the need to Reinitialise the system after adjusting one or The vehicle stalls in STOP mode regularly check the tyre pressures (including Spare wheel more tyre pressures and after changing one or All of the instrument panel warning lamps come the spare wheel) as well as before a long The steel spare wheel does not have an more wheels. on if there is a fault. journey. under-inflation detection sensor. Depending on version, a warning message Before reinitialising the system, make may also be displayed, prompting you to place sure that the pressures of the four tyres

106 Driving

Under-inflation alert are correct for the conditions of use of the Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT vehicle and conform to the values written on dealer or a qualified workshop. 6 This is signalled by the fixed illumination the tyre pressure label. of this warning lamp, accompanied by an Check the pressures of the four tyres before audible signal and, depending on equipment, the performing the reinitialisation. Driving and manoeuvring display of a message. The system does not advise if a pressure is ► Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive aids - General incorrect at the time of reinitialisation. steering movements and avoid sudden braking. recommendations ► Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Without audio system Driving and manoeuvring aids cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need for The loss of pressure detected does not vigilance on the part of the driver. always cause visible bulging of the tyre. The driver must comply with the Highway

Do not rely on just a visual check.

Code, must remain in control of the vehicle in ► Using a compressor, such as the one in all circumstances and must be able to retake the temporary puncture repair kit, check the control of it at all times. The driver must adapt pressures of the four tyres when cold. the speed to climactic conditions, traffic and the state of the road.

► If it is not possible to make this check It is the driver's responsibility to constantly immediately, drive carefully at reduced speed. ► Press this button for about 3 seconds then check the traffic, to assess the relative ► In the event of a puncture, use the release it. Reinitialisation is confirmed by an distances and speeds of other vehicles and to temporary puncture repair kit or the spare wheel audible signal. (depending on equipment). anticipate their movements before indicating With audio system or touch screen and changing lane. The alert is kept active until the system is The systems cannot exceed the limits of the With the vehicle stationary, reinitialised. laws of physics. the system is reinitialised via the vehicle configuration menu. Reinitialisation Driving aids Reinitialise the system after adjusting one or Malfunction You should hold the steering wheel more tyre pressures and after changing one or These warning lamps come on in with both hands, always use the interior and more wheels. the event of a malfunction. exterior rear view mirrors, always keep the In this case, the tyre under-inflation monitoring feet close to the pedals and take a break Before reinitialising the system, make function is no longer performed. every two hours. sure that the pressures of the four tyres

107 Driving

Manoeuvring aids "Driving aids camera: visibility limited, see by noisy vehicles and machinery (e.g. lorries, ► ensure that the mat is secured correctly, The driver must always check the user guide". pneumatic drills), by the accumulation of ► never fit one mat on top of another. surroundings of the vehicle before and during In humid and cold weather, demist the snow or dead leaves on the road or in the the whole manoeuvre, in particular using the windscreen regularly. event of damaged bumpers and mirrors. Units of speed mirrors. Poor visibility (inadequate street lighting, When reverse gear is engaged, an audible Ensure that the units of speed displayed heavy rain, thick fog, snowfall), dazzle signal (long beep) indicates that the sensors on the instrument panel (mph or km/h) are Radar (headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, low sun, may be dirty. those for the country you are driving in. The operation of the radar as well as the reflections on a damp road, leaving a tunnel, A front or rear impact to the vehicle can If this is not the case, when the vehicle is associated functions may be impaired through alternating shade and light) can also impair upset the sensors’ settings, which is not stationary, set the display to the required the accumulation of dirt (mud, frost, etc.), in detection performance. always detected by the system: distance units of speed so that it complies with what is certain difficult weather conditions (very heavy In the event of a windscreen replacement, measurements may be distorted. authorised locally. rain, snow) or if the bumper is damaged. contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The sensors do not systematically detect In case of doubt, contact a PEUGEOT dealer If the front bumper is to be repainted, contact workshop to recalibrate the camera; obstacles that are too low (pavements, studs) or a qualified workshop. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop; otherwise, the operation of the associated or too thin (trees, posts, wire fences). certain types of paint could interfere with the driving aids may be disrupted. Certain obstacles located in the sensors’ blind operation of the radar. spots may not be detected or may no longer Speed Limit Recognition be detected during the manoeuvre.

Other cameras The images from the camera(s) Certain materials (fabrics) absorb sound and Recommendation displayed on the touch screen or on the waves: pedestrians may not be detected. Refer to the General recommendations on the instrument panel may be distorted by the use of driving and manoeuvring aids. relief. Maintenance In the presence of areas in shade, or in Clean the bumpers and door mirrors and conditions of bright sunlight or inadequate the field of vision of the cameras regularly. lighting, the image may be darkened and with When washing your vehicle at high pressure,

lower contrast. direct the spray from at least 30 cm away Driving aids camera Obstacles may appear further away than they from the sensors and cameras. This camera and its associated functions actually are. may be impaired or not work if the windscreen Mats

area in front of the camera is dirty, misty, Sensors The use of mats not approved by frosty, covered with snow, damaged or This system displays the maximum authorised The operation of the sensors as well as PEUGEOT may interfere with the operation of masked by a sticker. speed in the instrument panel, according to the associated functions may be disturbed the speed limiter or cruise control. On versions with camera alone, this message the speed limits in the country in which you are by sound interference such as that emitted To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: indicates to you that the camera is obstructed: driving, using:

108 Driving

► ensure that the mat is secured correctly, – Speed limit signs detected by the camera. ► never fit one mat on top of another. – Speed limit details from the navigation system Qualifier plate Display of the 6 mapping. detected speed associated with the qualifier Units of speed Navigation mapping should be regularly plate Ensure that the units of speed displayed updated in order to receive accurate Speed limit in rain If the wiper control on the instrument panel (mph or km/h) are speed limit information from the system. those for the country you are driving in. Examples: stalk is in the

If this is not the case, when the vehicle is – Signs indicating an intersection area detected "intermittent wipe" stationary, set the display to the required by the camera. or "automatic wipe" position (in order

units of speed so that it complies with what is Sign detected Suggested speed authorised locally. to activate the rain (calculated) In case of doubt, contact a PEUGEOT dealer sensor): or a qualified workshop. Entry into an Without PEUGEOT 68 mph (110 km/h) intersection area Connect Nav (for example) Example: 10 mph or 20 km/h

Speed limit if If an approved towing (depending on Speed Limit Recognition towing device is fixed to the the units of the vehicle: instrument panel) and Recommendation 56 mph (90 km/h) Refer to the General recommendations on the With PEUGEOT (for example) use of driving and manoeuvring aids. Connect Nav Display of the Speed limit 43 mph (70 km/h) speed in force in the applicable over a (for example) country in which you certain distance are driving. Example:

– Certain qualifier plates are detected by the

camera.

This system displays the maximum authorised speed in the instrument panel, according to the speed limits in the country in which you are driving, using:

109 Driving

For the system to work correctly when Information displayed on Qualifier plate Display of the changing country, the speed unit in the detected speed associated instrument panel must correspond to that of the instrument panel with the qualifier the country you are driving in. plate In the case of suggested maximum speeds, the Speed limit for 56 mph (90 km/h) The automatic reading of road signs is a first time the vehicle exceeds the suggested vehicles whose (for example) driving aid system and does not always speed by more than 3 mph (5 km/h) (e.g. 59 gross vehicle display speed limits correctly. mph (95 km/h)), the speed is displayed flashing weight or gross The speed limit signs present on the road for 10 seconds. train weight is less always take priority over the display by the than 3.5 tonnes system. Operating limits

The system is designed to detect signs that The system does not take account of reduced conform to the Vienna Convention on road speed limits, especially those imposed in the

Speed limit in snow If the exterior signs. following cases: Example: temperature is below 1. Detected speed limit indication – atmospheric pollution,

3°C: Specific speed limits, such as those for or – when towing, 19 mph (30 km/h) heavy goods vehicles, are not displayed. 2. End of speed limit indication – driving with a space-saver type spare wheel or

(for example) The display of the speed limit in the snow chains fitted, with a "snowflake" instrument panel is updated when passing – Tyre repaired using the temporary puncture symbol a speed limit sign intended for cars (light repair kit, vehicles). – young drivers. Speed limit at 19 mph (30 km/h)

It is possible for the system to not display the certain times (for example) speed limit if it does not detect a speed limit Example: with a "clock" symbol The system is active but is not detecting speed Activation / Deactivation limit information. sign within a preset period and in the following By default, the system is automatically activated situations: at every engine start. – road signs that are obstructed, do not comply

It is set via the vehicle with the standard, are damaged or distorted, The units for the speed limit (mph or configuration menu. – obsolete or incorrect maps. km/h) depend on the country you are driving in. On detecting speed limit information, the system displays the value.

This should be taken into account so that you observe the speed limit.

110 Driving

Recommendation Information displayed on the instrument panel 6

In the case of suggested maximum speeds, the first time the vehicle exceeds the suggested

3. Speed limit indication speed by more than 3 mph (5 km/h) (e.g. 59 In addition to Speed Limit Recognition and 4. Speed memorisation prompt mph (95 km/h)), the speed is displayed flashing Recommendation, the driver can select the 5. Current speed setting for 10 seconds. speed displayed as a speed setting for the speed limiter or cruise control using the speed limiter or Operating limits cruise control memorisation button. Memorising the speed The system does not take account of reduced speed limits, especially those imposed in the For more information on the Speed following cases: limiter, Cruise control or Adaptive – atmospheric pollution, cruise control, refer to the corresponding sections.

– when towing, – driving with a space-saver type spare wheel or ► Switch on the speed limiter/cruise control. snow chains fitted, Steering mounted controls The speed limiter/cruise control information is – Tyre repaired using the temporary puncture displayed. repair kit, Upon detecting a sign suggesting a new speed – young drivers. setting, the system displays the value and It is possible for the system to not display the "MEM" flashes for a few seconds, prompting you speed limit if it does not detect a speed limit to save it as the new speed setting. sign within a preset period and in the following If there is a difference of less than 6 mph situations: (9 km/h) between the speed setting and – road signs that are obstructed, do not comply the speed displayed by the Speed Limit with the standard, are damaged or distorted, Recognition and Recommendation, the – obsolete or incorrect maps. "MEM" symbol is not displayed.

1. Speed limiter/cruise control mode selection Depending on the road conditions, several 2. Memorise the speed setting speeds may be displayed.

111 Driving

► Press button 2once to save the suggested Activation / Deactivation 5. Depending on version: 9. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit speed value. It is set via the vehicle Display of speed thresholds recorded using Recognition and Recommendation A message is displayed, confirming the request. configuration menu. Memorising speeds ► Press button 2again to confirm and save the or Switching on/pausing new speed setting. Use the speed suggested by the Speed Limit ► Turn thumbwheel 1 to the "LIMIT" position to After a predetermined period, the screen returns Speed limiter Recognition and Recommendation (MEM to the normal display. select the speed limiter; the function is paused. Refer to the General recommendations on the display) use of driving and manoeuvring aids. 6. Display and adjustment of the programmed Extended Traffic Sign This system prevents the vehicle from inter-vehicle distance exceeding the speed programmed by the

Recognition For more information on driver (speed setting). Memorising speeds Refer to the General recommendations on the or on the Speed Limit Recognition and ► If you are satisfied with the limit speed setting The speed limiter is switched on manually. use of driving and manoeuvring aids. Recommendation, refer to the corresponding (most recent speed setting programmed in the The minimum speed setting is 19 mph (30 km/h). sections. The speed setting remains in the system system), press button 4 to switch the speed limiter on. memory when the ignition is switched off. Information displayed on

Steering mounted control the instrument panel This additional system recognises these road signs and displays them in the instrument panel

if the appropriate display mode is selected. ► Pressing button 4 again temporarily pauses

One-way street: if you start driving the wrong the function. way down a one-way street, an alert message, including the sign's symbol, is displayed in the An audible warning will sound if the instrument panel (request to check the traffic vehicle's speed exceeds the speed direction). setting for an extended period. Other signs: when approaching one of these signs, the sign’s symbol is displayed in the 1. ON (LIMIT position) / OFF (position 0) Adjusting the limit speed instrument panel. 2. Reduce the speed setting setting The actual road signs always take priority 3. Increase the speed setting 6. Speed limiter mode selection indication You do not have to switch the speed limiter on in over the display from the system. 4. Pause / resume speed limiter with the speed 7. Speed limiter on/pause status indication order to set the speed. The signs must comply with the Vienna setting previously stored Convention on road signs. 8. Programmed speed setting value To modify the limit speed setting based on the vehicle’s current speed:

112 Driving

9. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit ► Briefly press button 2 or 3 to change the value in steps of + or - 1 mph (1.6 km/h). 6 Recognition and Recommendation ► Press and hold button 2 or 3 to change the value in steps of + or - 5 mph (8 km/h).

Switching on/pausing To change the limit speed setting using ► Turn thumbwheel 1 to the "LIMIT" position to memorised speeds, via the touch screen: The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily and select the speed limiter; the function is paused. ► press button 5 to display the memorised the displayed speed setting flashes.

speed settings, Release the accelerator pedal to return to below ► press the button for the desired speed the programmed speed. setting. When the limit speed is exceeded but this is not The selection screen closes after a few due to action by the driver (in case of a steep ► If you are satisfied with the limit speed setting moments. slope, for example), an audible signal triggers (most recent speed setting programmed in the This setting becomes the new limit speed. immediately. system), press button 4 to switch the speed To change the limit speed setting based on the On a steep descent or in the event of limiter on. speed suggested by the Speed Limit Recognition sharp acceleration, the speed limiter will and Recommendation: not be able to prevent the vehicle from ► the suggested speed is displayed on the exceeding the speed setting. instrument panel, Brake if necessary to control the speed of ► press button 5 once; a message is displayed,

your vehicle. confirming the memorisation request,

► Pressing button 4 again temporarily pauses ► press button 5 again to save the suggested the function. speed. An audible warning will sound if the The speed is immediately displayed as the new

vehicle's speed exceeds the speed speed setting on the instrument panel. setting for an extended period. Once the speed of the vehicle returns to the Temporarily exceeding the programmed setting, the speed limiter functions speed setting again: the display of the speed setting becomes Adjusting the limit speed fixed again. ► Press the accelerator pedal down fully. setting You do not have to switch the speed limiter on in Switching off order to set the speed. ► Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "0" position: To modify the limit speed setting based on the the display of information on the speed limiter vehicle’s current speed: disappears.

113 Driving

Malfunction Exceeding the programmed speed programmed by the driver (speed setting), 3. Activation of cruise control at the current setting without using the accelerator pedal. speed / increase speed setting You can temporarily exceed the speed The cruise control is switched on manually. 4. Pausing / resumption of cruise control with setting by pressing the accelerator pedal (the It requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph the speed setting previously stored programmed speed flashes). (40 km/h). 5. Depending on version: To return to the speed setting, release the With a manual gearbox, third gear or higher must Display of speed thresholds recorded using accelerator pedal (when the set speed is be engaged. Memorising speeds reached again, the displayed speed stops With an automatic gearbox, mode D or second Dashes are displayed (flashing, initially, then or flashing). gear or higher in mode M must be engaged. fixed) in the event of a speed limiter malfunction. Use the speed suggested by the Speed Limit Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT The cruise control remains active after Recognition and Recommendation (MEM dealer or a qualified workshop. Operating limits changing gear, regardless of the gearbox display) Never use the system in the following type, on engines fitted with Stop & Start. For more information on Memorising speeds situations: or on the Speed Limit Recognition and Cruise control - particular – in an urban area with the risk of Switching off the ignition cancels any Recommendation, refer to the corresponding pedestrians crossing the road, recommendations speed setting. sections. – in heavy traffic, For the safety of everyone, only use the – on winding or steep roads, Information displayed on cruise control where the driving – on slippery or flooded roads, Steering mounted control – in unfavourable climatic conditions, the instrument panel

conditions allow running at a constant speed and keeping an adequate safety distance. – driving on a speed circuit, Remain vigilant when the cruise control is – driving on a rolling road, – use of snow chains, non-slip covers or activated. If you hold one of the speed setting modification buttons, a very rapid change in studded tyres. the speed of your vehicle may occur. When descending a steep hill, the cruise control system cannot prevent the vehicle Programmable cruise from exceeding the set speed. Brake if control necessary to control the speed of your vehicle. Refer to the General recommendations on the 1. ON (CRUISE position) / OFF (position 0) On steep climbs or when towing, the set use of driving and manoeuvring aids and to 2. Activation of cruise control at the current speed may not be reached or maintained. Cruise control - particular recommendations. speed / decrease speed setting This system automatically keeps the 6. Cruise control mode selection indication vehicle’s speed at the cruise value

114 Driving

3. Activation of cruise control at the current 7. Cruise control pause/resume status indication Operation of the cruise control can also be paused temporarily: 6 speed / increase speed setting 8. Programmed speed setting value 4. Pausing / resumption of cruise control with 9. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit – by pressing the brake pedal. the speed setting previously stored Recognition and Recommendation – automatically, if the electronic stability 5. Depending on version: control (ESC) system is triggered. Display of speed thresholds recorded using Switching on/pausing Memorising speeds Changing the cruise speed or Use the speed suggested by the Speed Limit setting Recognition and Recommendation (MEM The cruise control must be active. display) To change the cruise speed setting, based on

the vehicle’s current speed: For more information on Memorising speeds ► Turn thumbwheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position ► In +/- 1 mph (1.6 km/h) steps, briefly press or on the Speed Limit Recognition and to select cruise control mode; the function is button 2 or 3 as often as necessary. Recommendation, refer to the corresponding paused. ► Continuously, in steps of +/- 5 mph (8 km/h), sections. press and hold button 2 or 3. Information displayed on Pressing and holding button 2 or 3 results in a rapid change in the speed the instrument panel ► Press button 2 or 3 to activate cruise control of your vehicle. and save a speed setting when the vehicle has reached the desired speed; the vehicle’s current As a precaution, we recommend setting speed is saved as the speed setting.

a cruise speed similar to the vehicle’s ► Release the accelerator pedal. current speed, to avoid any sudden acceleration or deceleration.

To change the cruise speed setting using memorised speed settings and from the touch

screen: ► Pressing button 4 temporarily pauses the ► Press button 5 to display the memorised

function. speed settings. ► Pressing button 4 again restores operation of ► Press the button for the desired speed Cruise control mode selection indication the cruise control (ON). 6. setting.

115 Driving

The selection screen closes after a few Dashes are displayed (flashing, initially, then If the driver operates a direction indicator moments. fixed) in the event of a cruise control system to overtake a slower vehicle, the cruise

This setting becomes the new cruise speed. malfunction. control allows the vehicle to temporarily To change the cruise speed setting using the Once the vehicle has returned to the Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT approach the vehicle in front to assist the speed suggested by the Speed Limit Recognition programmed speed, cruise control takes over dealer or a qualified workshop. overtaking manoeuvre, without ever and Recommendation: again and the programmed speed setting stops exceeding the speed setting. ► The suggested speed is displayed on the flashing. instrument panel. Adaptive Cruise Control When descending a steep hill, the cruise Some vehicles present on the road may ► Press button 5 once; a message is displayed, Refer to the General recommendations on the control system cannot prevent the not be properly seen or may be poorly confirming the memorisation request. use of driving and manoeuvring aids and to vehicle from exceeding the programmed interpreted by the camera and/or radar (e.g. a ► Press button 5 again to save the suggested Cruise control - particular recommendations. speed. lorry), which may lead to a poor assessment speed. This system automatically maintains the speed You may have to brake to control the speed of of the distances and lead to the vehicle The value is immediately shown as the new of your vehicle at a value which you set (speed your vehicle. In this case, the cruise control is inappropriately accelerating or braking. speed setting on the instrument panel. setting), while keeping a safe distance from the automatically paused. vehicle in front (target vehicle), and which has To activate the system again, with the vehicle Temporarily exceeding the been set beforehand by the driver. The system Steering mounted control speed above 25 mph (40 km/h), press button automatically manages the acceleration and programmed speed . 4 deceleration of the vehicle. If needed (when overtaking, for example) it is With the Stop function, the system manages possible to exceed the programmed speed by the braking until the vehicle comes to a complete pressing the accelerator pedal. Switching off

stop.

► Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "0” position: the cruise control information disappears from the screen.

Malfunction

To do so, it has a camera located at the top of Cruise control is temporarily overridden and the the windscreen and, depending on version, a 1. ON (CRUISE position) / OFF (position0) programmed speed setting flashes. radar located in the front bumper. 2. Activation of cruise control at the current To return to the programmed speed, simply speed / decrease speed setting release the accelerator pedal. Primarily designed for driving on main 3. Activation of cruise control at the current roads and motorways, this system only speed / increase speed setting works with moving vehicles driving in the same direction as your vehicle.

116 Driving

If the driver operates a direction indicator 4. Pausing / resumption of cruise control with Pressing and holding button 2 or to overtake a slower vehicle, the cruise 3 results in a rapid change in the speed 6 the speed setting previously stored control allows the vehicle to temporarily 5. Depending on version: of the vehicle. approach the vehicle in front to assist the Display of speed thresholds recorded using overtaking manoeuvre, without ever Memorising speeds Pausing / resumption of cruise control exceeding the speed setting. or ► Press 4 or press the brake pedal. To pause Use the speed suggested by the Speed Limit cruise control, it is also possible to: Some vehicles present on the road may Recognition and Recommendation ((MEM • shift from mode D to N; not be properly seen or may be poorly display) • press the clutch pedal for more than 10 interpreted by the camera and/or radar (e.g. a 6. Display and adjustment of the distance seconds; lorry), which may lead to a poor assessment setting to the vehicle in front • press the electric parking brake control; of the distances and lead to the vehicle ► Press 4 to restart cruise control. Cruise inappropriately accelerating or braking. Use control may have been paused automatically: • when the speed of the vehicle goes below 19 Activation of the system (pause) Steering mounted control mph (30 km/h) with a manual gearbox; ► With the engine running, turn the knob 1 • when the speed of the engine goes below downwards to the CRUISE position. Cruise 1100 rpm with a manual gearbox; control is ready to operate (grey display). • by triggering of the ESC system. Switching on of cruise control and choice With a manual gearbox, the driver should press of speed setting the accelerator pedal to move off, then above 19 mph (30 km/h), reactivate the system by With a manual gearbox, your speed must be pressing one of the buttons 2, 3 or 4. between 19 and 99 mph (30 and 160 km/h). With an automatic gearbox, following braking With an automatic gearbox, mode D or M must of the vehicle bringing it to a complete stop, the be selected and your speed must be between 19 system holds the vehicle stationary; the cruise and 112 mph (30 and 180 km/h). control is paused. The driver should press 1. ON (CRUISE position) / OFF (position0) ► Press button 2 or 3: the current speed the accelerator pedal to move off, then above 2. Activation of cruise control at the current becomes the speed setting (minimum 19 mph 19 mph (30 km/h), reactivate the system by (30 km/h)) and cruise control is immediately in speed / decrease speed setting pressing one of the buttons 2, 3 or 4. 3. Activation of cruise control at the current operation (green display). If the driver takes no action following this speed / increase speed setting ► Press 3 to increase or 2 to decrease the immobilisation, the electric parking brake is speed setting (steps of 5 mph (km/h) if held applied automatically after about 5 minutes. pressed).

117 Driving

Cruise control remains active after as long as acceleration is maintained. "Cruise Messages and alerts The driver must accelerate to move off again, changing gear regardless of the gearbox control suspended" is displayed. then reactivate cruise control. type. System deactivation The display of these messages or alerts is not sequential. Operating limits ► Turn knob 1 upwards to the OFF position. When the driver attempts to reactivate Cruise control operates by day and night, in fog "Cruise control paused" or "Cruise control cruise control which was paused, the or moderate rainfall. Displays in the instrument suspended" following a brief acceleration message "Activation not possible, unsuitable Certain situations cannot be managed by the by the driver. conditions" is briefly displayed if reactivation panel system and require driver intervention. "Cruise control active", no vehicle is not possible (safety conditions not met). Elements not detected by the system: detected. – Pedestrians, some cyclists, animals. "Cruise control paused", vehicle detected. Modifying the programmed speed setting – Stationary vehicles (traffic jam, breakdown, with the Speed Limit Recognition and etc.). "Cruise control active", vehicle detected. Recommendation function ► Press 5 to accept the speed suggested by "Take back control" (orange). the function in the instrument panel, then press

again to confirm. ► Brake or accelerate, depending on the To prevent any sudden acceleration or 7. Vehicle detected by the system (full symbol) context. 8. Cruise control active (colour not in grey) "Take back control" (red). deceleration of the vehicle, select a – Vehicles crossing your lane. 9. Value of the speed setting speed setting fairly close to the current speed – Vehicles driving in the opposite direction. of the vehicle. 10. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit ► Take back control of the vehicle Recognition and Recommendation immediately: the system cannot manage the Situations in which the driver must pause the cruise control system: Changing the inter-vehicle distance 11. Vehicle held stationary (versions with current driving situation. automatic gearbox) "Activation not possible, conditions ► Press 6 to display the distance setting unsuitable". The system refuses to thresholds (“Distant”, “Normal”, “Close“), then activate cruise control, as the necessary press again to select a threshold. conditions are not fulfilled. After a few seconds, the option is accepted and will be memorised when the ignition is switched Stop function

off. "Cruise control paused" (for a few

Inter-vehicle distance setting 12. seconds). Temporarily exceeding the speed setting Position of the vehicle detected by the 13. The system has brought the vehicle to a – Vehicles in a tight bend. ► Press the accelerator pedal fully. Distance system complete stop and is holding it immobilised: – When approaching a roundabout. monitoring and cruise control are deactivated cruise control is paused.

118 Driving

The driver must accelerate to move off again, If the vehicle has undergone any of the then reactivate cruise control. following modifications, do not use the 6 system: Operating limits – Carrying long objects on roof bars or a roof Cruise control operates by day and night, in fog rack.

or moderate rainfall. – Towing. – When following a narrow vehicle. Certain situations cannot be managed by the – Front end of the vehicle modified (for Reactivate cruise control when conditions permit. system and require driver intervention. example by adding long-range headlamps or Situations in which the driver is prompted to Elements not detected by the system: painting the front bumper). immediately resume control: – Pedestrians, some cyclists, animals. – Excessively sharp deceleration by the vehicle – Stationary vehicles (traffic jam, breakdown, in front of you. etc.). Malfunction In the event of a cruise control malfunction, dashes are displayed instead of the cruise control speed setting. This warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and an

onscreen message, to indicate a system

– When a vehicle cuts in sharply between your malfunction. – Vehicles crossing your lane. vehicle and the one in front. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT – Vehicles driving in the opposite direction. dealer or a qualified workshop. Situations in which the driver must pause the Pay particular attention: cruise control system: – When motorcycles are present and The adaptive cruise control deactivates when there are vehicles staggered across the automatically if the use of a “space- traffic lane. saver” type spare wheel is detected or in the – When entering a tunnel or crossing a event of a malfunction of the lateral brake bridge. lamps or trailer brake lamps (for approved trailers). If any of the following malfunctions occurs, do not use the system: – Following an impact on the windscreen – Vehicles in a tight bend. Memorising speeds close to the camera. – When approaching a roundabout. This function, used only for the speed limiter

– Brake lamps not working. and programmable cruise control, lets you

119 Driving

save speed settings that will subsequently be Active Safety Brake This system does not avoid the need for – Following an impact to the windscreen close to proposed for the purpose of configuring these vigilance on the part of the driver. the detection camera. two systems. with Distance Alert and This system is designed to assist the driver The system is automatically deactivated You can memorise multiple speed settings for and improve road safety. Intelligent emergency after the use of certain "space-saver" each of the two systems. It is the driver's responsibility to continuously type spare wheels is detected (smaller By default, some speed settings are already braking assistance monitor the state of the traffic, observing the diameter). memorised. driving regulations. Refer to the General recommendations on the The system is automatically deactivated use of driving and manoeuvring aids.

As a safety measure, the driver must only after detection of a fault with the brake pedal change speed settings when stationary. As soon as the system detects a switch or with at least two brake lamps. potential obstacle, it prepares the braking circuit in case automatic braking is needed. It is possible that warnings are not given, Changing a speed setting This may cause a slight noise and a slight are given too late or seem unjustified. In the touch screen This system allows: sensation of deceleration. Driving / Vehicle Consequently, always stay in control of your menu, select " " then – the driver to be warned that their vehicle is at Driving functions vehicle and be prepared to react at any time " ". risk of collision with the vehicle in front, Memorised speed settings to avoid an accident. – a collision to be prevented, or its severity to be Operating conditions and "MEM" button limited, by reducing the vehicle’s speed. limits

After an impact, the function This system is comprised of three functions: The ESC system must not be faulty. automatically stops operating. Contact a – Distance Alert, The DSC/ASR systems must not be deactivated. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to – Intelligent emergency braking assistance, All passenger seat belts must be fastened. have the system checked. – Active Safety Brake (automatic emergency Driving at a steady speed on roads with few braking).

bends is required. In the following cases, deactivating the system Distance Alert via the vehicle's configuration menu is advised: It warns the driver that their vehicle is at risk of – towing a trailer, collision with the vehicle in front or a pedestrian

– carrying long objects on roof bars or roof rack, present in their traffic lane. With this button, you can select a memorised – with snow chains fitted, speed setting to use with the speed limiter or the – before using an automatic car wash, with the Operation programmable cruise control.

engine running, For more information on the or Depending on the degree of risk of collision Speed limiter – before placing the vehicle on a rolling road in , refer to the The vehicle has a camera located at the top of detected by the system and the alert threshold Programmable cruise control a workshop, corresponding section. the windscreen. chosen by the driver, several different levels – towed vehicle, engine running,

120 Driving

– Following an impact to the windscreen close to of alert may be triggered and displayed in the The current threshold can the detection camera. instrument panel. be modified via the vehicle 6 They take account of the vehicle dynamics, the configuration menu. The system is automatically deactivated speeds of your vehicle and the one in front, the You can select one of three pre-defined after the use of certain "space-saver" environmental conditions and the operation of thresholds: type spare wheels is detected (smaller the vehicle (cornering, actions on the pedals, – "Distant", diameter). etc.) to trigger the alert at the best moment. – "Normal", The system is automatically deactivated Level 1 (orange): visual alert only, – "Close". after detection of a fault with the brake pedal signalling that the vehicle in front is very The last threshold selected is memorised when switch or with at least two brake lamps. close. the ignition is switched off. The message "Vehicle close" is displayed. It is possible that warnings are not given, Level 2 (red): visual and audible alert, Intelligent emergency are given too late or seem unjustified. signalling that a collision is imminent. braking assistance Consequently, always stay in control of your The message "Brake!" is displayed. If the driver brakes, but not sufficiently to avoid a vehicle and be prepared to react at any time Level 3: finally, in some cases, a haptic alert collision, this system will supplement the braking, to avoid an accident. in the form of micro-braking can be given, within the limits of the laws of physics. confirming the risk of collision. This assistance will only be provided if you press After an impact, the function Where the speed of your vehicle is too the brake pedal. automatically stops operating. Contact a high approaching another vehicle, the PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to first level of alert may not be displayed: the have the system checked. level 2 alert may be displayed directly. Important: the level 1 alert is never displayed Distance Alert for a stationary obstacle or when the "Close" It warns the driver that their vehicle is at risk of trigger threshold has been selected. collision with the vehicle in front or a pedestrian present in their traffic lane. Modifying the alert trigger threshold Operation This threshold determines how you wish to be warned of the presence of a moving or stationary Depending on the degree of risk of collision vehicle in front of you, or a pedestrian present in detected by the system and the alert threshold your traffic lane. chosen by the driver, several different levels

121 Driving

Active Safety Brake – The vehicle's speed is between 6 mph and Deactivation of the system is signalled by 53 mph (10 km/h and 85 km/h) when a moving the illumination of this indicator lamp, vehicle is detected. accompanied by the display of a message. This warning lamp flashes (for about

10 seconds) once the function is acting on Malfunction the vehicle's brakes. In the event of a system malfunction, this Conditions for operation With an automatic gearbox, in the event of warning lamp comes on on the instrument – The speed of the vehicle must be between 40 automatic emergency braking until the vehicle panel, accompanied by an onscreen message and 112 mph (65 and 180 km/h). comes to a complete stop, keep the brake and an audible signal. – The traffic lane must be delimited by a dividing pedal pressed down to prevent the vehicle from Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified line. starting off again. workshop to have the system checked. – The driver must hold the wheel with both With a manual gearbox, in the event of automatic If these warning lamps come on hands. emergency braking until the vehicle comes to a after the engine has been switched – The change of trajectory must not be complete stop, the engine may stall. off and then restarted, contact a PEUGEOT accompanied by operation of the direction dealer or a qualified workshop to have the The driver can maintain control of the indicators. system checked. vehicle at any time by sharply turning the – The ESC system must be activated and not

steering wheel and/or pressing the faulty. This function, also called automatic emergency accelerator pedal. Active Lane Keeping The system helps the driver only when braking, intervenes following the alerts if the there is a risk of the vehicle involuntarily driver does not react quickly enough and does Assistance Operation of the function may be felt by wandering from the lane it is being driven in. It not operate the vehicle's brakes. slight vibration in the brake pedal. Refer to the General recommendations on the It aims to reduce the speed of impact or avoid a If the vehicle comes to a complete stop, the use of driving and manoeuvring aids. collision where the driver fails to react. automatic braking is maintained for 1 to 2 Using a camera located at the top of the seconds. windscreen to identify lane markings on the road Operation and at the edges of the road (depending on The system operates under the following version), the system corrects the trajectory of the Driving situations and related alerts conditions: Deactivation/Activation vehicle while alerting the driver if it detects a risk The table below describes the alerts and messages displayed in different driving situations. – The vehicle's speed does not exceed 37 mph By default, the system is automatically activated of unintentionally crossing a line or hard shoulder These alerts are not displayed sequentially. (60 km/h) when a pedestrian is detected. at every engine start. (depending on version). – The vehicle's speed does not exceed 50 mph This system can be This system is particularly useful on motorways (80 km/h) when a stationary vehicle is detected. deactivated or activated via and main roads. the vehicle settings menu.

122 Driving

does not manage the safe driving distance, the speed of the vehicle or the brakes. 6 The driver must hold the steering wheel with both hands in a way that allows control to

be maintained in circumstances where the Conditions for operation system is not able to intervene (for example, if the dividing line marking disappears). – The speed of the vehicle must be between 40 and 112 mph (65 and 180 km/h).

– The traffic lane must be delimited by a dividing Operation line. Once the system identifies a risk of the vehicle While the direction indicators are on and for – The driver must hold the wheel with both involuntarily crossing one of the lane markings a few seconds after switching them off, the hands. detected or a lane limit (e.g. grass border), it system considers that any change of trajectory – The change of trajectory must not be makes the correction to the trajectory necessary is voluntary and no correction is triggered during accompanied by operation of the direction to return the vehicle to its initial path. this period. indicators. The driver will notice a turning movement of the If the system detects that the driver is not – The ESC system must be activated and not steering wheel. holding the wheel firmly enough during faulty. This warning lamp flashes during an automatic correction of trajectory, it The system helps the driver only when trajectory correction. interrupts the correction. An alert is triggered there is a risk of the vehicle involuntarily The driver can prevent the correction by to encourage the driver to take back control of wandering from the lane it is being driven in. It keeping a firm grip on the wheel (during the vehicle. an avoiding manoeuvre, for example). The correction is interrupted if the direction indicators are operated.

Driving situations and related alerts The table below describes the alerts and messages displayed in different driving situations. These alerts are not displayed sequentially.

123 Driving

Function status Indicator lamp Display and/or associated Comments message

OFF Function deactivated.

(grey)

ON System active, conditions not met: – speed below 40 mph (65 km/h),

– no lane marking recognised, (grey) – ASR/DSC systems deactivated or operation of ESC system triggered, – "sport" driving.

ON Automatic deactivation/standby of the function (for example, due to detection of a trailer or use of the "space-

saver" spare wheel provided with the vehicle). (grey)

ON Lane marking detection. Operating limits Speed above 40 mph (65 km/h). The system goes into standby automatically in

the following cases: (green) – ESC deactivated or operation triggered,

ON The system corrects the trajectory on the side where the – speed below 40 mph (65 km/h) or greater than risk of unintentional crossing is detected (orange line). 112 mph (180 km/h),

– electrical connection of a trailer, (orange)/(green) – use of the "space-saver" spare wheel detected (as detection is not immediate, deactivation of the system is recommended), – dynamic driving style detected, pressure on the brake or accelerator pedal, – driving where there are no lane markings, – activation of the direction indicators,

124 Driving

Function status Indicator lamp Display and/or associated Comments 6 message

ON – If, while correcting the trajectory, the system detects that the driver has not held the steering wheel for a few

seconds, it interrupts the correction and returns control to (orange)/(green) the driver.

"Hold the wheel" – If, while correcting the trajectory, the system determines that the correction will not be enough and that a solid line will be crossed (orange line): the driver is warned that they must provide additional trajectory adjustment. The duration of audible warnings will increase if multiple corrections are performed in quick succession. The warning will become continuous, persisting until the driver responds. This message may also be displayed if you have your hands on the steering wheel.

Operating limits – crossing the inside line on a bend, The following situations may interfere – driving in a tight corner, with the operation of the system or The system goes into standby automatically in – inactivity by the driver detected during prevent it from working: the following cases: correction. – insufficient contrast between the road – ESC deactivated or operation triggered, surface and the shoulders (e.g. shade), – speed below 40 mph (65 km/h) or greater than During a correction, if the driver is – lane markings worn, hidden (snow, mud) or 112 mph (180 km/h), inactive (not holding the steering wheel multiple (roadworks, etc.), – electrical connection of a trailer, for 10 seconds), a warning message appears. – running close to the vehicle in front (the – use of the "space-saver" spare wheel detected If the driver remains inactive (not holding lane markings may not be detected), (as detection is not immediate, deactivation of the steering wheel for 2 more seconds), the – roads that are narrow, winding, etc. the system is recommended), correction is interrupted. – dynamic driving style detected, pressure on the brake or accelerator pedal, Risk of undesirable operation – driving where there are no lane markings, We recommend deactivating the system in the – activation of the direction indicators, following driving situations:

125 Driving

– driving on damaged, unstable or very slippery Blind Spot Monitoring – flashing, after a delay of about one second, – Your vehicle is not pulling a trailer, a caravan, (ice) road surfaces, when overtaking a vehicle slowly, and when the etc. – unfavourable weather conditions, System direction indicator is used. – driving on a speed circuit, Refer to the General recommendations on the Operating limits

– driving on a rolling road. use of driving and manoeuvring aids. Activation / Deactivation Activation or deactivation is Deactivation / Activation set via the vehicle configuration menu.

The system state remains in memory

when the ignition is switched off.

The system is automatically deactivated when towing with a towbar approved by

PEUGEOT.

This system includes sensors, placed on the ► Press this button to deactivate / reactivate the sides of the bumpers, and warns the driver of system at any time. the potentially dangerous presence of another Conditions for operation

Deactivation is signalled by the lighting of vehicle (car, truck, motorcycle) in the blind spot – All vehicles are moving in the same direction the indicator lamp in the button and this areas of their vehicle (areas hidden from the and in adjacent lanes. warning lamp in the instrument panel. driver's field of vision). – The speed of your vehicle must be between 7

The system is automatically reactivated every and 87 mph (12 and 140 km/h). time the ignition is switched on. – When overtaking a vehicle, the speed difference is less than 6 mph (10 km/h). Malfunction – When overtaken by a vehicle, the speed In the event of a system difference is less than 16 mph (25 km/h). malfunction, these warning lamps – Traffic is flowing normally. come on on the instrument panel, accompanied – Overtaking a vehicle over a certain period of time and the vehicle being overtaken remains in by an onscreen message and an audible signal. A warning lamp appears in the door mirror on the the blind spot. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT side in question: – You are driving on a straight or slightly curved dealer or a qualified workshop. – , immediately, when being overtaken; fixed road.

126 Driving

– Your vehicle is not pulling a trailer, a caravan, Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified etc. workshop to have the system checked. 6 Operating limits The system may suffer temporary

interference in certain weather conditions (rain, hail, etc.). In particular, driving on a wet surface or moving from a dry area to a wet area can cause false alerts (for example, the presence of a fog of water droplets in the blind spot angle is interpreted as a vehicle). In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the sensors are not covered by mud, ice or snow. Take care not to cover the warning zone in

the door mirrors or the detection zones on the No alert is triggered in the following conditions: front and rear bumpers with adhesive labels – In the presence of non-moving objects (parked or other objects; they may hamper correct vehicles, barriers, street lamps, road signs, etc.). operation of the system. – Oncoming traffic.

– Driving on a winding road or a sharp corner.

– When overtaking or being overtaken by a very long vehicle (lorry, bus, etc.) that is detected Active Blind Spot in the rear blind spot but is also present in the Monitoring System driver’s front field of vision. In addition to the fixed warning lamp in the door – When overtaking quickly. mirror on the side in question, a correction of – In very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in trajectory will be felt if you attempt to cross a front and behind are confused with a lorry or a lane marking with the direction indicators on, to stationary object. help you avoid a collision. Malfunction This system is the combination of the Active Lane Keeping Assistance and Blind Spot If the event of malfunction, this warning Monitoring System. lamp comes on in the instrument panel, These two functions must be activated and in accompanied by the display of a message. operation.

127 Driving

The speed of the vehicle must be between 40 Activation/Deactivation Driver Attention Alert by The following situations may interfere and 87 mph (65 and 140 km/h) inclusive. with the operation of the system or The function is activated or These functions are especially suitable for camera prevent it from working: deactivated via the vehicle driving on motorways and main roads. Depending on version, the "Driver Attention Alert" – poor visibility (inadequate lighting of the configuration menu. For more information on the may be combined with the "Driver Attention Alert road, falling snow, heavy rain, dense fog, Active Lane The state of the system stays in the memory Keeping Assistance and Blind Spot by camera". etc.); when the ignition is switched off. Monitoring System, refer to the corresponding – dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, sections. Driver Attention Alert low sun, reflections on a damp road, leaving a tunnel, alternating shade and light, etc.); This system is a driving aid which The system triggers an alert as soon as it – windscreen area located in front of the cannot, in any circumstances, replace detects that the driver has not taken a camera: dirty, misted, frost-covered, snow- the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. break after two hours of driving at a speed above covered, damaged or covered by a sticker. 40 mph (65 km/h). – lane markings absent, worn, hidden (snow, This alert is issued via the display of a message mud) or multiple (roadworks, etc.); encouraging you to take a break, accompanied Distraction detection – close to the vehicle ahead (lane markings by an audible signal. Refer to the not detected); General recommendations on the If the driver does not follow this advice, the alert

. – roads that are narrow, winding, etc. use of driving and manoeuvring aids is repeated hourly until the vehicle is stopped. Take a break in case of feeling tired or at least Using a camera placed at the top of the The system resets itself if one of the following every 2 hours. windscreen, the system assesses the conditions is met: In certain driving conditions (poor road Depending on version, the function comprises driver's level of vigilance, fatigue or distraction by – engine running, the vehicle has been surface or strong winds), the system may either the "Driver Attention Alert" system alone identifying variations in trajectory compared to stationary for more than 15 minutes, give alerts independent of the driver's level of or combined with the "Driver Attention Alert by the lane markings. – the ignition has been switched off for a few vigilance. camera" system. This system is particularly suited to fast roads minutes, (speed higher than 40 mph (65 km/h)). These systems are in no way designed – the driver's seat belt is unfastened and their The following situations may interfere At a first-level alert, the driver is warned by the to keep the driver awake or to prevent door is opened. with the operation of the system or “Take care!” message, accompanied by an the driver from falling asleep at the wheel. prevent it from working: As soon as the speed of the vehicle audible signal. It is the driver’s responsibility to stop if feeling – lane markings absent, worn, hidden (snow, drops below 40 mph (65 km/h), the After three first-level alerts, the system triggers tired. mud) or multiple (roadworks), system goes into standby. a further alert with the message "Dangerous – close to the vehicle ahead (lane markings The driving time is counted again once the driving: take a break", accompanied by a more not detected), speed is above 40 mph (65 km/h). pronounced audible signal. – roads that are narrow, winding, etc.

128 Driving

The following situations may interfere Parking sensors The system signals the presence of obstacles with the operation of the system or which are both within the sensors’ detection zone 6 prevent it from working: Refer to the General recommendations on the and in the vehicle path defined by the direction of use of driving and manoeuvring aids.

– poor visibility (inadequate lighting of the the steering wheel. road, falling snow, heavy rain, dense fog, etc.); – dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp road, leaving a tunnel, alternating shade and light, etc.); – windscreen area located in front of the camera: dirty, misted, frost-covered, snow- covered, damaged or covered by a sticker.

Depending on version, in the example shown, – lane markings absent, worn, hidden (snow, Using sensors located in the bumper, this only the obstacles present in the shaded area mud) or multiple (roadworks, etc.); system signals the proximity of obstacles will be signalled by the audible assistance. – close to the vehicle ahead (lane markings (e.g. pedestrian, vehicle, tree, barrier) present in The proximity information is given by an not detected); their field of detection. intermittent audible signal, the frequency of – roads that are narrow, winding, etc. which increases as the vehicle approaches the Rear parking sensors obstacle. In certain driving conditions (poor road The system is switched on by engaging reverse When the distance between the vehicle and surface or strong winds), the system may gear, which is confirmed by an audible signal. the obstacle becomes less than about thirty give alerts independent of the driver's level of The system is switched off when disengaging centimetres, the audible signal becomes vigilance. reverse gear. continuous. The sound emitted by the speaker (right or The following situations may interfere Audible assistance left) indicates the side on which the obstacle is with the operation of the system or located. prevent it from working: – lane markings absent, worn, hidden (snow, Adjusting the audible signal mud) or multiple (roadworks), With PEUGEOT Connect Radio or – close to the vehicle ahead (lane markings PEUGEOT Connect Nav, pressing not detected), this button opens the window for adjusting the – roads that are narrow, winding, etc. volume of the audible signal.

129 Driving

Visual assistance Side parking sensors Deactivation / Activation installed in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations. Without audio system In this case, the outline of a trailer is displayed

at the rear of the image of the vehicle.

The parking sensors are deactivated while the

Park Assist function is measuring a space. For more information on the Park Assist, refer

to the corresponding section.

It supplements the audible assistance, without Using four additional sensors located on the taking account of the vehicle's trajectory, by sides of the front and rear bumpers, the system Operating limits displaying bars on the screen that represent the records the position of fixed obstacles during If the boot is heavily loaded, the vehicle may tilt, distance between the obstacle and the vehicle the manoeuvre and signals them when they are ► To deactivate or activate the system, press affecting distance measurements. (white: more distant obstacles, orange: close located by the sides of the vehicle. this button. obstacles, red: very close obstacles). The indicator lamp is lit when the system is Malfunction Only fixed obstacles are signalled When the obstacle is very close, the "Danger" deactivated. In the event of a malfunction when correctly. Moving obstacles detected at symbol is displayed on the screen. With audio system or touch screen changing into reverse, this warning lamp the beginning of the manoeuvre may be comes on on the instrument panel, accompanied signalled mistakenly, while moving obstacles The setting is done in the Front parking sensors by an onscreen message and an audible signal which appear at the sides of the vehicle and vehicle configuration menu. In addition to the rear parking sensors, the front (short beep). which were not previously recorded will not be The state of the system stays in the memory parking sensors are triggered when an obstacle when the ignition is switched off. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified

signalled. is detected in front and the speed of the vehicle workshop to have the system checked. is still below 6 mph (10 km/h). The front parking sensors are interrupted if the The objects memorised during the vehicle stops for more than three seconds in manoeuvre will no longer be stored after Visiopark 1 forward gear, if an obstacle is no longer detected switching off the ignition. Refer to the General recommendations on the or when the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph use of driving and manoeuvring aids.

(10 km/h).

The sound emitted by the speaker (front or rear) locates the obstacle in relation to The rear parking sensors system will be the vehicle, in the vehicle trajectory, in front or deactivated automatically if a trailer or behind. bicycle carrier is connected to a towing device

130 Driving

installed in accordance with the – 180° view. manufacturer's recommendations. – Zoom view. 6 In this case, the outline of a trailer is displayed AUTO mode is activated by default. at the rear of the image of the vehicle. In this mode, the system chooses to display the best view (standard or zoom). The parking sensors are deactivated while the You can change the type of view at any time Park Assist function is measuring a space.

during a manoeuvre. For more information on the Park Assist, refer As soon as reverse gear is engaged with the The state of the function is not saved when the to the corresponding section. engine running, this system displays views of ignition is switched off. Operating limits your vehicle’s close surroundings on the touch screen using a camera located at the rear of the Principle of operation If the boot is heavily loaded, the vehicle may tilt, vehicle. affecting distance measurements. Malfunction

In the event of a malfunction when changing into reverse, this warning lamp comes on on the instrument panel, accompanied by an onscreen message and an audible signal

(short beep). Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Using the rear camera, the vehicle's close workshop to have the system checked. surroundings are recorded during manoeuvres at low speed. Visiopark 1 An image from above your vehicle in its close surroundings is reconstructed (represented

Refer to the General recommendations on the between the brackets) in real time and as the use of driving and manoeuvring aids. The screen is divided into two parts with a

manoeuvre progresses. contextual view and a view from above the It facilitates the alignment of your vehicle when vehicle in its close surroundings. parking and allows obstacles close to the vehicle The parking sensors supplement the information to be seen. It is automatically deleted if the on the view from above the vehicle. vehicle remains stationary for too long. Various contextual views may be displayed: – Standard view.

131 Driving

Rear vision AUTO mode The blue lines 1 represent the width of your Obstacles may appear further away than vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their direction they actually are in reality. changes depending on the position of the It is important to check the sides of the steering wheel. vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm mirrors. from the rear bumper; the two blue lines 3 and 4 The rear parking sensors also provide represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively. information on the vehicle's surroundings. This view is available with AUTO mode or in the view selection menu. 180° view Zoom view

To activate the camera, located on the tailgate, This mode is activated by default. engage reverse and keep the speed of the Using sensors in the rear bumper, the automatic vehicle below 6 mph (10 km/h). view changes from the rear view (standard) to The system is deactivated: the view from above (zoom) as an obstacle is – Automatically, at speeds above approximately approached at the level of the red line (less than 6 mph (10 km/h), 30 cm) during a manoeuvre. – Automatically, if the tailgate is opened. – Upon changing out of reverse gear (the image Standard view remains displayed for 7 seconds). – By pressing the white arrow in the upper-left corner of the touch screen. The camera records the vehicle's surroundings during the manoeuvre in order to create a view from above the rear of the vehicle in its near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be The 180° view facilitates reversing out of a manoeuvred around obstacles nearby. parking bay, making it possible to see the This view is available with AUTO mode or in the approach of vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists. view selection menu. This view is not recommended for carrying out a complete manoeuvre.

The area behind the vehicle is displayed on the It consists of 3 areas: left A, centre B and right screen. C.

132 Driving

Obstacles may appear further away than This view is available only from the view A. Entering a "parallel" parking space they actually are in reality. selection menu. 6 B. Leaving a "parallel" parking space It is important to check the sides of the C. Entering a "bay" parking space vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the mirrors. Park Assist The rear parking sensors also provide Refer to the General recommendations on the Operation information on the vehicle's surroundings. use of driving and manoeuvring aids. ► When approaching a parking area, reduce This system provides active parking assistance the speed of your vehicle to 19 mph (30 km/h) for vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox: it or less. 180° view detects a parking space and then steers in

the appropriate direction to park in this space Activating the function while the driver controls the driving direction, The function is activated via engagement of gears, acceleration and braking. the vehicle configuration To assist the driver in monitoring the correct menu. manoeuvring operation, the system automatically Activating the function deactivates the triggers the display of Visiopark 1 and the Blind Spot Monitoring System. activation of the parking sensors. The system performs the measurements of You can deactivate the function at any available parking spaces and calculations of time until the parking space entry or exit distances to obstacles using ultrasonic sensors manoeuvre begins, by pressing the arrow built into the front and rear bumpers of the located in the top left-hand corner of the vehicle. display page.

The 180° view facilitates reversing out of a parking bay, making it possible to see the approach of vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists.

This view is not recommended for carrying out a complete manoeuvre. The system assists with the following It consists of 3 areas: left A, centre B and right manoeuvres: C.

133 Driving

Selecting the type of manoeuvre deactivated if the vehicle speed exceeds 31 mph accompanied by the “STOP” sign and an audible (50 km/h). signal. Once the vehicle has stopped, an instructions For "parallel" parking, the space must page is displayed on the screen. measure at least the length of your ► To prepare for the manoeuvre, follow the vehicle plus 0.60 m. instructions. For "bay" parking, the space must be at least The start of the manoeuvre is indicated by the as wide as your vehicle plus 0.70 m. "Manoeuvre under way" onscreen message and an accompanying audible signal. If the parking sensors function has been Reversing is indicated by this message: deactivated in the Driving/Vehicle touch “Release the steering wheel, reverse”. screen menu, it will be automatically The Visiopark 1 and the parking sensors are

reactivated when the system is activated. automatically activated to help you monitor A manoeuvre selection page is displayed on the the area immediately surrounding your vehicle touch screen: by default, the "Entry" page if the during the manoeuvre. vehicle has been running since the ignition was switched on, otherwise, the "Exit" page. During the manoeuvre ► Select the type and side of the manoeuvre to The system controls the vehicle’s steering. It activate the parking space search. gives instructions on the manoeuvring direction The selected manoeuvre can be changed at when starting "parallel" entry and exit parking any time, even while searching for an available manoeuvres, and for all "bay" entry manoeuvres. space. There instructions are displayed as a symbol This indicator lamp comes on to confirm accompanied by a message: the selection. "Reverse".

Parking space search When the system finds an available space, "OK" “Go forwards". ► You should drive at a distance of between is displayed on the parking view, accompanied 0.50 m and 1.50 m from the row of parked by an audible signal. The manoeuvring status is indicated by these vehicles, without ever exceeding 19 mph symbols: (30 km/h), until the system finds an available Preparing for the manoeuvre Manoeuvre in progress (green). space. ► Move very slowly until the request to stop The parking space search is suspended at the vehicle is displayed: "Stop the vehicle“, higher speeds. The function is automatically

134 Driving

Manoeuvre cancelled or finished (red) Interruption by the driver: End of the parking space entry or exit (the arrows indicate that the driver must – taking over control of the steering. manoeuvre 6 resume control of the vehicle). – activating the direction indicator lamps on the The vehicle stops as soon as the manoeuvre is The maximum speeds during manoeuvres are opposite side to that of the manoeuvre. completed. indicated by these symbols: – unfastening the driver's seat belt. The manoeuvre symbol is displayed in red, 5 mph or 7 km/h, for parking space entry. – switching off the ignition. 7 accompanied by the message “Manoeuvre Interruption by the system: completed” on the touch screen. 3 mph or 5 km/h, for parking space exit. – vehicle exceeding the speed limit of 5 When the function is deactivated, this 5 mph (7 km/h) during parking space entry indicator lamp goes off, accompanied by manoeuvres, or 3 mph (5 km/h) during parking During manoeuvring phases, the steering an audible signal. space exit manoeuvres. wheel performs rapid turns: do not hold When entering a parking space, the driver may – activation of anti-slip regulation on a slippery the steering wheel or put your hands between be required to complete the manoeuvre. road. the spokes of the steering wheel. Watch out – opening of a door or the boot. for any objects that could interfere with the Operating limits – engine stall. manoeuvre (loose clothing, scarf, tie, etc.). – The system may suggest an unsuitable – system malfunction. Risk of injury! parking space (No Parking area, work in – after 10 manoeuvres to enter or exit a parallel It is the driver's responsibility to constantly progress with damaged road surface, location parking space and after 7 manoeuvres to enter a monitor the traffic, especially vehicles coming alongside a ditch, etc.). parking bay. towards you. – The system may indicate that a space has Interrupting the manoeuvre automatically The driver should check that no objects or been found but not offer it because of a fixed deactivates the function. people are obstructing the vehicle’s path. obstacle on the opposite side of the manoeuvre, The manoeuvre symbol is displayed in red, which would not allow the vehicle to follow the accompanied by the " " Manoeuvre cancelled necessary trajectory for parking. The images from the camera(s) message on the touch screen. – The system may indicate that a space has displayed on the touch screen may be A message prompts the driver to take back been found but not engage the manoeuvre distorted by the terrain. control of the vehicle. because the road is too narrow. In shady areas, or in inadequate sunlight The function is deactivated after a few – The system is not designed to perform the or lighting conditions, the image may be seconds; this warning lamp goes off and parking manoeuvre on a sharp bend. darkened and with lower contrast the function returns to the initial display. – The system does not detect spaces that are The manoeuvre can be permanently interrupted much larger than the vehicle or are bounded by at any time, either by the driver or automatically obstacles that are very low (pavements, studs, by the system. etc.) or very thin (trees, posts, wire fences, etc.).

135 Driving

– Certain obstacles located in the sensors’ blind If the vehicle has undergone any of the In the event of a power steering spots may not be detected or may no longer be following modifications, do not use the malfunction, this warning lamp is detected during the manoeuvre. function: displayed on the instrument panel, accompanied – Certain materials (fabrics) absorb sound – When carrying an object extending beyond by a warning message. waves: pedestrians may not be detected. the dimensions of the vehicle (ladder on the You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. – A front or rear impact to the vehicle can roof bars, bicycle carrier on the tailgate, etc.). Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified upset the sensors’ settings, which is not always – With a non-approved towball in place. workshop. detected by the system: distance measurements – With snow chains fitted. may be distorted. – When driving on a small-diameter or – If the boot is heavily loaded, the vehicle may "space-saver" type spare wheel. tilt, affecting distance measurements. – When the wheels fitted are a different size The vehicle's sensors and camera(s) may be from the original ones. impaired by: – After modifying one or both bumpers – accumulated snow or fallen leaves on the (added protection). road, – If the sensors have been repainted other – adverse weather conditions (heavy rain, thick than by the PEUGEOT dealer network. fog, falling snow), – With sensors not approved for the vehicle. – noise interference from noisy vehicles and machinery (lorries, pneumatic drills, etc.). Malfunctions Do not use the function under the When the function is not activated, this following exterior conditions: indicator lamp will flash briefly and an – Alongside a soft shoulder (e.g. ditch) or audible signal will be emitted to indicate a quay or on the edge of a drop. system malfunction. – When the road surface is slippery (e.g. ice). If the malfunction occurs while the system is in use, the warning lamp goes off. If any of the following malfunctions If the parking sensor malfunction occurs occurs, do not use the system: during use, indicated by this warning lamp – If a tyre is under-inflated. coming on, it causes the function to deactivate. – If one of the bumpers is damaged. In the event of a malfunction, have the system – If one of the cameras is faulty. checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

136

PEUGEOT & TOTAL PARTNERS IN PERFORMANCE!

For over 20 years, the PEUGEOT TOTAL partnership has set new performance standards in achieving success in the toughest conditions, with victories in the Le Mans 24 Hours, the World Rally Championship and the Dakar Rally. To obtain these exceptional results, the Peugeot Sport teams chose TOTAL QUARTZ, a high-tech lubricant that protects the engine in the most extreme conditions. TOTAL QUARTZ protects your engine against the effects of time. TOTAL QUARTZ INEO FIRST is a very high-performance lubricant developed jointly by the Peugeot and Total R&D teams. Specially formulated for the engines in Peugeot vehicles, its innovative technology significantly reduces

CO2 emissions and keeps your engine clean.

Practical information

Compatibility of fuels fuels could prevent the engine from operating an audible signal. When driving, this message

correctly. In these temperature conditions, use and audible signal are repeated with increasing

winter-type Diesel fuel and keep the fuel tank frequency as the fuel level drops towards 0. more than 50 % full. You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid Petrol fuels conforming to the EN228 standard At temperatures below -15 °C (+5 °F) to avoid running out of fuel. containing up to 5% and 10% ethanol problems starting, it is best to park the vehicle For more information on Running out of fuel respectively. under shelter (heated garage). (Diesel), refer to the corresponding section.

Travelling abroad Stop & Start Never refuel with the engine in STOP Diesel fuels conforming to the EN590, EN16734 Certain fuels could damage your vehicle’s mode; you must switch off the ignition. and EN16709 standards and containing up to engine. 7%, 10%, 20% and 30% fatty acid methyl ester In certain countries, the use of a particular respectively. The use of B20 or B30 fuels, even fuel may be required (specific octane rating, Refuelling occasionally, imposes special maintenance specific trade name, etc.) to ensure correct At least 10 litres of fuel must be added, in order conditions referred to as "Arduous conditions". operation of the engine. to be registered by the fuel gauge. For all additional information, consult a dealer. Opening the filler cap may create a noise caused by an inrush of air. This is entirely normal and Paraffinic Diesel fuel conforming to the EN15940 Refuelling results from the sealing of the fuel system. standard. To refuel in complete safety: Fuel tank capacity: approximately 61 litres ► Always switch off the engine. The use of any other type of (bio) fuel (petrol) or 50 litres (Diesel). ► Unlock the vehicle using the Keyless Entry (vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, Reserve level: approximately 6 litres. and Starting. domestic fuel, etc.) is strictly prohibited (risk ► Open the fuel filler flap. of damage to the engine and fuel system). Low fuel level 1 When the low fuel level is reached, 1 /2 The only fuel additives authorised for use this warning lamp comes on on the are those that meet the B715001 (petrol) instrument panel, accompanied by an onscreen or B715000 (Diesel) standards. message and an audible signal. When it first comes on, about 6 litres of fuel remain in the tank. Diesel at low temperature Until sufficient fuel is added, this warning lamp At temperatures below 0 °C (+32 °F), the appears every time the ignition is switched on, formation of paraffins in summer-type Diesel accompanied by an onscreen message and

138 Practical information

► Put the filler cap back in place and close it by Misfuel prevention (Diesel) turning to the right. 7 (Depending on country of sale.) ► Push the fuel filler flap to close it (your This mechanical device prevents filling the tank vehicle must be unlocked).

of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention device appears when the filler cap is removed.

Operation

► With a conventional key, insert the key into the filler cap, then turn the key to the left.

If the fuel filler flap is open, a device prevents the left-hand side door from opening. The door can be opened half-way, however. Close the fuel filler flap to regain use of the door.

The vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter, which helps to reduce the level of harmful When a petrol filler nozzle is inserted into the emissions in the exhaust gases. fuel filler neck of a Diesel vehicle, it comes into contact with the flap. The system remains closed If you have put in the wrong fuel for

and prevents filling. your vehicle, you must have the fuel Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type ► Unscrew and remove the filler cap, then tank drained and filled with the correct fuel filler nozzle. place it on the holder located on the fuel filler before starting the engine. flap. It remains possible to use a fuel jerrycan ► Insert the nozzle and push it in fully (while to fill the tank. pushing on the metal valve A). Fuel cut-off ► Fill the tank. Do not continue past the Your vehicle is fitted with a safety system that Travelling abroad third cut-off of the nozzle, as this may cause cuts off the supply of fuel in the event of an As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be malfunctions. impact. different in other countries, the presence

139 Practical information

of the misfuel prevention device may make ► Stop your vehicle and check that the snow ► Distribute the load in the trailer so that the refuelling impossible. chains are correctly tightened. heaviest items are as close as possible to Before travelling abroad, it is advisable to the axle and the nose weight approaches the It is strongly recommended that before check with a PEUGEOT dealer if the vehicle maximum permitted without exceeding it. you leave, you practise fitting the snow is suitable for the distribution equipment of the Air density decreases with altitude, thus reducing chains on a level and dry surface. Towing devices countries visited. engine performance. The maximum towed load Depending on equipment, the vehicle can be fitted with one of the following towing devices: must be reduced by 10 % for every 1,000 metres Avoid driving with snow chains on roads of altitude. Approval No.: E1 R55 (reference 1) that have been cleared of snow to avoid Mounting position then towing device reference Snow chains Use towing devices and their unmodified

damaging your vehicle's tyres and the road In wintry conditions, snow chains improve surface. If your vehicle is fitted with alloy harnesses approved by PEUGEOT. It is Type of towing device traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle wheels, check that no part of the chain or its recommended that the installation be when braking. fixings is in contact with the wheel rim. performed by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

The snow chains must be fitted only to Use only the chains designed to be fitted to the If the towing device is not fitted by a the front wheels. They must never be type of wheel fitted to your vehicle: PEUGEOT dealer, it must still be fitted in Towing device fixed at the top Towing device fixed at the bottom

fitted to "space-saver" type spare wheels. Original tyre size Maximum link size accordance with the vehicle manufacturer's Swan neck – Standard swan neck L1 – Cross (worksite) swan neck L1 (mm) instructions. – Standard swan neck L2 – Cross (worksite) swan neck L2 Take account of the legislation specific to Certain driving assistance or manoeuvring each country on the use of snow chains 195/65 R15 9 assistance functions are automatically and the maximum authorised speed. 205/60 R16 disabled if an approved towbar is used.

205/55 R17 Quickly detachable towball – Standard quickly detachable – Cross (worksite) quickly Installation tips Observe the maximum authorised towball L1 detachable towball L1 215/65 R16 towable weight, indicated on your – Standard quickly detachable – Cross (worksite) quickly ► If you have to fit the chains during a journey, vehicle's registration certificate, the towball L2 detachable towball L2 stop the vehicle on a flat surface on the side of 215/60 R17 cannot be fitted with manufacturer's label as well as in the the road. chains Technical data section of this guide. ► Apply the parking brake and position any You can also use snow socks. Complying with the maximum authorised For more information on your towing device, refer to the user guide supplied with it. wheel chocks under the wheels to prevent For more information, contact a PEUGEOT nose weight (towball) also includes the movement of your vehicle. dealer or a qualified workshop. ► Fit the chains following the instructions use of accessories (bicycle carriers, tow provided by the manufacturer. boxes, etc.). ► Move off gently and drive for a few moments, Towing device without exceeding 31 mph (50 km/h). Load distribution

140 Practical information

Observe the legislation in force in the country in which you are driving. 7

Towing devices Depending on equipment, the vehicle can be fitted with one of the following towing devices: Approval No.: E1 R55 (reference 1) Mounting position then towing device reference

Type of towing device

Towing device fixed at the top Towing device fixed at the bottom

Swan neck – Standard swan neck L1 – Cross (worksite) swan neck L1 – Standard swan neck L2 – Cross (worksite) swan neck L2

Quickly detachable towball – Standard quickly detachable – Cross (worksite) quickly towball L1 detachable towball L1 – Standard quickly detachable – Cross (worksite) quickly towball L2 detachable towball L2

For more information on your towing device, refer to the user guide supplied with it.

141 Practical information

Towing device with quickly ► Insert the end of the towball into the carrier, Connect the trailer plug with the engine Switching to the mode located underneath the rear bumper, as far as it . off A message indicating that the vehicle has detachable towball can go. If you connect the trailer plug within a few switched to economy mode is displayed on the ► Secure the towball correctly by moving the minutes of switching off the engine, No tools are required to install or remove this do not instrument panel screen and the active functions lever to position ("locked" position). the exhaust pipe. Risk of burns! genuine towing device. 3 touch are put on standby. ► If necessary, pivot the socket downwards, Trailers with LED lamps are not paying attention to the exhaust pipe. Carrier systems (box or bicycle If a telephone call is in progress at the compatible with the wiring harness of this ► Connect the trailer plug to the 13-pin socket carrier) time, it will be maintained for around 10 device. provided next to the carrier. Always comply with the maximum load minutes using your audio system’s hands-free ► Secure the trailer by connecting its safety authorised on the towing device: if exceeded, system. Fitting cable to the eye on the carrier. the device may detach from the vehicle, potentially causing a serious accident. Removing Exiting the mode These functions will be automatically reactivated ► On the towball, move the lever from position For more information about the Engine the next time the vehicle is used. 3 to position 2. technical data and towed loads and in In order to restore the use of these functions ► Remove the towball by pulling it towards you. particular, the maximum load on the towing immediately, start the engine and let it run: ► Once the towball has been removed, move device, refer to the corresponding section. – for less than 10 minutes, to use the equipment the lever from position 2 to position 1. for approximately 5 minutes, If the towball is not locked, the trailer can Remove the quickly detachable towball – for more than 10 minutes, to use the detach. This may cause an accident. when not towing a trailer. equipment for approximately 30 minutes. Always lock the towball as described in the Let the engine run for the duration specified to instructions. ensure that the battery charge is sufficient. Observe the legislation in force in the country Energy economy mode Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the in which you are driving. engine in order to charge the battery. System which manages the duration of use of Remove the towball when not in use. certain functions to conserve a sufficient level of A flat battery prevents the engine from Before starting the vehicle, check that the charge in the battery. starting. trailer lamps operate correctly.

After switching off the engine and for a maximum For more information on the , Before setting off, check the adjustment of the 12 V battery cumulative period of around 40 minutes, you can refer to the corresponding section. ► On the towball, move the lever from position headlamp beam height. 1 to position 2. continue to use functions such as the audio and ► Before fitting the towball, check that the telematics system, the wipers, the dipped beam contact points (shown by the arrows) are clean. headlamps, the courtesy lamps, etc. Use a soft, clean cloth.

142 Practical information

Switching to the mode Load reduction mode In the event of loading (not exceeding 40 cm in height) on the roof, do not 7 A message indicating that the vehicle has System that manages the use of certain the following loads: switched to economy mode is displayed on the exceed functions according to the level of charge – Transverse bars on longitudinal bars: instrument panel screen and the active functions remaining in the battery. . are put on standby. 80 kg When the vehicle is being driven, the load – Two transverse bars bolted to the roof: If a telephone call is in progress at the reduction function temporarily deactivates certain 100 kg. time, it will be maintained for around 10 functions, such as the air conditioning and the – Three transverse bars bolted to the roof: minutes using your audio system’s hands-free heated rear screen. 150 kg. system. The deactivated functions are reactivated – An aluminium rack: 120 kg. automatically as soon as conditions permit. – A steel rack: 115 kg. Exiting the mode If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the speed Roof bars / Roof rack of the vehicle to the profile of the road to These functions will be automatically reactivated avoid damaging the roof bars or the roof rack the next time the vehicle is used. Recommendations and the fixings on the vehicle. In order to restore the use of these functions Distribute the load uniformly, taking care Refer to national legislation in order to comply immediately, start the engine and let it run: to avoid overloading one of the sides. with the regulations for transporting objects – for less than 10 minutes, to use the equipment Arrange the heaviest part of the load as close that are longer than the vehicle. for approximately 5 minutes,

as possible to the roof. – for more than 10 minutes, to use the Secure the load firmly. equipment for approximately 30 minutes. Drive gently: the vehicle will be more Let the engine run for the duration specified to susceptible to the effects of side winds and its ensure that the battery charge is sufficient. In the event of loading a 7-seat model stability may be affected. Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the (not exceeding 40 cm in height) on the Regularly check the security and tight engine in order to charge the battery. roof, do not exceed the following loads: fastening of the roof bars and racks, at least – Three transverse bars bolted to the roof: A flat battery prevents the engine from before each trip. 100 kg. starting. Remove the roof bars once they are no longer – An aluminium rack: 70 kg. For more information on the 12 V battery, needed. – A steel rack: 65 kg. refer to the corresponding section.

As a safety measure and to avoid damaging the roof, it is essential to use

143 Practical information

the roof bars and racks approved for your risk of injury resulting from an automatic ► Lower the bonnet and release it near the end vehicle. change to START mode. of its travel. Observe the instructions on fitting and use ► Pull on the bonnet to check that it is locked contained in the guide supplied with the roof correctly. bars and racks. Because of the presence of electrical equipment under the bonnet, it is recommended that exposure to water (rain, The location of the interior bonnet washing, etc.) be limited. release lever prevents opening the bonnet when the left-hand front door is closed. ► Pull the release lever, located at the bottom Engine compartment of the door frame, towards you. When the engine is hot, handle the The engine represented is an example given for ► Lift the safety catch and raise the bonnet.

exterior safety catch and the bonnet stay illustration purposes only. with care (risk of burns), using the protected The locations of the following elements may

area. vary: To fit the transverse roof bars or a roof rack, use When the bonnet is open, take care not to – Air filter. the fixing points provided for this purpose: damage the safety catch. – Engine oil dipstick. ► Remove the fixing covers installed on the Do not open the bonnet under very windy – Engine oil filler cap. vehicle. conditions. Petrol engine

► Put each fixing in place and lock them on the roof one by one. Cooling of the engine when stopped ► Ensure that the roof bars or the roof rack are The engine cooling fan may start after correctly fitted (by shaking them). the engine has been switched off. The bars are adaptable for each fixing point. Take care with objects or clothing that could be caught in the blades of the fan! ► Unclip the stay from its housing and place it

Bonnet in the support slot to hold the bonnet open. Stop & Start Opening Before doing anything under the bonnet, ► Open the left-hand front door. Closing

you must switch off the ignition to avoid any ► Take the stay out of the support slot. ► Clip the stay in its housing.

144 Practical information

► Lower the bonnet and release it near the end Diesel engine If a level drops significantly, have the of its travel. corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT 7 ► Pull on the bonnet to check that it is locked dealer or a qualified workshop. correctly. The fluids must comply with the Because of the presence of electrical manufacturer's requirements and with equipment under the bonnet, it is the vehicle's engine. recommended that exposure to water (rain,

washing, etc.) be limited. Take care when working under the bonnet, as certain areas of the engine 1. Screenwash fluid reservoir may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the Engine compartment 2. Engine coolant reservoir cooling fan could start at any time (even with 3. Brake fluid reservoir the ignition off). The engine represented is an example given for 4. Battery / Fuses illustration purposes only. 5. Remote earth point (-) The locations of the following elements may 6. Fusebox Used products vary: 7. Air filter –. Air filter Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or 8. Engine oil filler cap – Engine oil dipstick. fluids with the skin. 9. Engine oil dipstick – Engine oil filler cap. Most of these fluids are harmful to health and very corrosive. Petrol engine The Diesel fuel system operates under very high pressure. All work on this circuit must be carried out Do not discard used oil or fluids into only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified sewers or onto the ground. workshop. Empty used oil into the containers reserved for this purpose at a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Checking levels Check all of the following levels regularly in Engine oil accordance with the manufacturer's service The level is checked, with the engine schedule. Top them up if required, unless having been switched off for at least 30 otherwise indicated. minutes and on level ground, either using the oil level indicator in the instrument panel when the

145 Practical information

ignition is switched on (for vehicles equipped – below mark B: top up the engine oil Brake fluid and unscrew the cap by two turns to allow the with an electric gauge), or using the dipstick. immediately. pressure to drop. The level of this fluid should be close to It is normal to top up the oil level between two Once the pressure has dropped, remove the cap Oil grade the "MAX" mark. If not, check the brake services (or oil changes). It is recommended and top up to the required level. Before topping up or changing the engine pad wear. that you check the level, and top up if necessary, oil, check that the oil is suitable for the engine To know how often the brake fluid should be every 3,000 miles (5,000 km). Screenwash fluid and complies with the recommendations in replaced, refer to the manufacturer's servicing Top up to the required level when In order to maintain the reliability of the the service schedule supplied with the vehicle schedule. necessary. engine and emissions control system, (or available from your PEUGEOT dealer and If topping up, clean the cap before Capacity of the tank: never use additives in the engine oil. qualified workshops). replacing it. Use only DOT4 brake fluid – 5.3 litres for "very cold climate" versions. Use of non-recommended oil may invalidate from a sealed canister. – 2.2 litres for other versions. the contractual warranty in the event of Checking using the dipstick engine failure. For the location of the dipstick, please refer Engine coolant Fluid specification to the illustration of the corresponding engine The fluid must be topped up with a ready-to-use Check the engine coolant level regularly. compartment. Topping up the engine oil level mixture. It is normal to top up this fluid between ► Grasp the dipstick by its coloured grip and The location of the oil filler cap is shown in the In winter (temperatures below zero), a liquid two services. pull it out completely. corresponding underbonnet layout view. containing an agent to prevent freezing must The check and top-up must only be done with ► Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean, ► Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any spills be used which is appropriate for the prevailing the engine cold. lint-free cloth. on engine components (risk of fire). conditions, in order to protect the elements of the

A low level presents a risk of serious damage to ► Wait a few minutes before checking the level system (pump, tank, ducts, jets, etc.). the engine. again using the dipstick. The level of this fluid should be close to the Filling with pure water is prohibited under ► Add more oil if necessary. "MAX" mark but should never exceed it. all circumstances (risk of freezing, ► After checking the level, carefully refit the oil If the level is close to or below the "MIN” mark, it limestone deposits, etc.). filler cap and the dipstick in its tube. is essential to top up. During the 30 minutes after topping up When the engine is hot, the temperature of this Diesel fuel additive (Diesel ► Reinsert the dipstick and push fully down, the oil, the check performed with the oil fluid is regulated by the fan. then pull it out again to visually check the oil level indicator in the instrument panel when In addition, as the cooling system is pressurised, with particle filter) level: the correct level is between marks A (max) the ignition is switched on is not valid. wait at least one hour after switching off the or On reaching the minimum level and B (min). engine before carrying out any work. in the particle filter additive tank, Do not start the engine if the level is: To avoid the risk of scalding if you need to top this warning lamp comes on fixed, accompanied – above mark A: contact a PEUGEOT dealer or up in an emergency, wrap a cloth around the cap by an audible warning and a message warning a qualified workshop. that the additive level is too low.

146 Practical information and unscrew the cap by two turns to allow the Topping up 12 V battery pressure to drop. 7 This additive must be topped up without delay by The battery does not require any Once the pressure has dropped, remove the cap a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. maintenance. and top up to the required level. However, check regularly that the terminals AdBlue (BlueHDi) are correctly tightened (versions without quick Screenwash fluid An alert is triggered when the reserve level is release terminals) and that the connections are Top up to the required level when reached. clean. necessary. For more information on the AdBlue range For more information on the precautions Capacity of the tank: indicators, refer to the corresponding section. to take before any work on the – 5.3 litres for "very cold climate" versions. To avoid the vehicle being immobilised in 12 V , refer to the corresponding section. – 2.2 litres for other versions. accordance with regulations, you must top up the battery AdBlue tank. Fluid specification For more information on the Supply of AdBlue, Versions equipped with Stop & Start are The fluid must be topped up with a ready-to-use refer to the corresponding section. fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of mixture. specific technology and specification. In winter (temperatures below zero), a liquid Its replacement should be carried out only by containing an agent to prevent freezing must Checks a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. be used which is appropriate for the prevailing Unless otherwise indicated, check these conditions, in order to protect the elements of the components in accordance with the system (pump, tank, ducts, jets, etc.). manufacturer's service schedule and according Passenger compartment to your engine. Filling with pure water is prohibited under filter Otherwise, have them checked by a PEUGEOT all circumstances (risk of freezing, Depending on the environment and the dealer or a qualified workshop. limestone deposits, etc.). use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty atmosphere, city driving), Only use products recommended by change it twice as often, if necessary. Diesel fuel additive (Diesel PEUGEOT or products of equivalent quality and specification. A clogged passenger compartment filter with particle filter) In order to optimise the operation of can adversely affect air conditioning or On reaching the minimum level components as important as those in the system performance and generate in the particle filter additive tank, braking system, PEUGEOT selects and offers undesirable odours. this warning lamp comes on fixed, accompanied very specific products. by an audible warning and a message warning that the additive level is too low.

147 Practical information

Air filter New vehicle Brake disc wear 0.3 bar (30 kPa) to the values indicated on the During the first few particle filter label. Depending on the environment and the For information on checking brake disc regeneration operations, you may notice a use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty atmosphere, wear, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a Under-inflation increases fuel "burning" smell. This is perfectly normal. city driving), change it twice as often, if qualified workshop. consumption. Non-compliant tyre necessary. pressure causes premature wear on tyres and Manual gearbox Manual parking brake has an adverse effect on the vehicle's road Oil filter The gearbox does not require any If you notice excessive brake lever travel holding - risk of an accident! Change the oil filter each time the engine maintenance (no oil change). or decreased effectiveness, the parking oil is changed. brake must be adjusted, even between two Driving with worn or damaged tyres reduces the Automatic gearbox services. braking and road holding performance of the Particle filter (Diesel) This system must be checked by a PEUGEOT vehicle. It is recommended to regularly check the The gearbox does not require any condition of the tyres (tread and sidewalls) and When the particle filter is dealer or a qualified workshop. maintenance (no oil change). wheel rims as well as the presence of the valves. approaching saturation, this When the wear indicators no longer appear set warning lamp comes on temporarily, Electric parking brake Brake pads back from the tread, the depth of the grooves is accompanied by a message warning of the risk This system does not require any routine Brake wear depends on the style of less than 1.6 mm; it is imperative to replace the of filter clogging. servicing. However, in the event of a driving, particularly in the case of vehicles tyres. As soon as the traffic conditions permit, problem, do not hesitate to have the system used in town, over short distances. It may be Using different size wheels and tyres from those regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified necessary to have the condition of the brakes specified can affect the lifetime of tyres, wheel least 37 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp workshop. checked, even between vehicle services. rotation, ground clearance, the speedometer goes off. Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the For more information on the Electric reading and have an adverse effect on road If the warning lamp stays on, this brake fluid level indicates that the brake pads parking brake, refer to the holding. indicates a low Diesel additive level. are worn. corresponding section. Fitting different tyres on the front and rear axles For more information on , Checking levels After washing the vehicle, moisture, or in can cause the ESC to mistime. refer to the corresponding section. wintry conditions, ice can form on the Wheels and tyres brake discs and pads: braking efficiency may ® The inflation pressure of all tyres, AdBlue (BlueHDi) Following prolonged operation of the be reduced. Gently dab the brakes to dry and including the spare wheel, must be To respect the environment and ensure vehicle at very low speed or at idle, you defrost them. checked on "cold” tyres. may, in exceptional circumstances, notice the compliance with the Euro 6 standard, without The pressures indicated on the tyre pressure emission of water vapour at the exhaust while adversely affecting the performance or fuel label are valid for "cold" tyres. If you have driven accelerating. This has no impact on the consumption of its Diesel engines, PEUGEOT for more than 10 minutes or more than 6 miles vehicle’s behaviour or the environment. has taken the decision to equip its vehicles (10 kilometres) at over 31 mph (50 km/h), add with a system that associates SCR (Selective

148 Practical information

0.3 bar (30 kPa) to the values indicated on the Catalytic Reduction) with a Diesel particle filter the Euro 6 standard: the vehicle becomes label. (DPF) for the treatment of exhaust gases. polluting. 7 In the event of a confirmed SCR system Under-inflation increases fuel SCR System malfunction, it is essential to visit a consumption. Non-compliant tyre Using a liquid called AdBlue® that contains PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. pressure causes premature wear on tyres and urea, a catalytic converter turns up to 85% of After 680 miles (1,100 km), a device is has an adverse effect on the vehicle's road the nitrogen oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and automatically activated to prevent the engine holding - risk of an accident! water, which are harmless to health and the from starting. Driving with worn or damaged tyres reduces the environment. In both cases, a range indicator indicates braking and road holding performance of the The AdBlue® is contained in a special the distance that can be travelled before the vehicle. It is recommended to regularly check the tank holding about 17 litres. vehicle is stopped. condition of the tyres (tread and sidewalls) and Its capacity allows a driving range of wheel rims as well as the presence of the valves. approximately 3,700 miles (6,000 km), (which Freezing of the AdBlue® When the wear indicators no longer appear set may vary considerably depending on your AdBlue® freezes at temperatures below back from the tread, the depth of the grooves is driving style and the vehicle). An alert system around -11°C. less than 1.6 mm; it is imperative to replace the is automatically triggered when the remaining The SCR system includes a heater for the tyres. range reaches 1,500 miles (2,400 km), i.e. once AdBlue® tank, allowing you to continue driving Using different size wheels and tyres from those the reserve level has been reached. in very cold conditions. specified can affect the lifetime of tyres, wheel Several alerts are triggered successively during rotation, ground clearance, the speedometer the remaining 1,500 miles (2,400 km) before the ® reading and have an adverse effect on road tank is empty and the vehicle blocked. Supply of AdBlue ® holding. It is recommended that the AdBlue be topped For more information on the Warning Fitting different tyres on the front and rear axles up as soon as the first alert is issued indicating and indicator lamps and the associated can cause the ESC to mistime. that the reserve level has been reached. alerts, or the Indicators, please refer to the corresponding sections. In order to ensure that the SCR system AdBlue® (BlueHDi) operates correctly: ® ® – Use only AdBlue fluid that meets the ISO To respect the environment and ensure Once the AdBlue tank is empty, a 22241 standard. compliance with the Euro 6 standard, without system required by legislation prevents – Never transfer AdBlue® to another adversely affecting the performance or fuel starting of the engine. container: it would lose its purity. consumption of its Diesel engines, PEUGEOT If the SCR system is faulty, the level of – Never dilute AdBlue® with water. has taken the decision to equip its vehicles emissions from the vehicle will no longer meet with a system that associates SCR (Selective

149 Practical information

You can obtain AdBlue® from a PEUGEOT medical attention if you feel a persistent burning Important: in the event of a top-up after In order not to overfill the AdBlue® tank: dealer or in a qualified workshop. sensation or irritation. a breakdown because of a lack of – Add between 10 and 13 litres using If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth AdBlue, it is essential to wait around 5 AdBlue® containers. You can also visit a service station with clean water and then drink plenty of water. minutes before switching on the ignition, – Stop after the nozzle’s first automatic cut- equipped with AdBlue® pumps specially In certain conditions (high temperature, for without opening the driver’s door, out, if you are refilling at a service station. designed for private vehicles. example), the risk of release of ammonia cannot unlocking the vehicle, introducing the key be excluded: do not inhale the fluid. Ammonia into the ignition switch, or introducing the If the AdBlue® tank is completely empty Never top up from an AdBlue® dispenser vapours have an irritant effect on mucous key of the “Keyless Entry and Starting​” – which is confirmed by the “Top reserved for heavy goods vehicles. membranes (eyes, nose and throat). system into the passenger compartment. up AdBlue: Starting impossible” message – it Switch on the ignition, then wait for 10 Store AdBlue® out of the reach of is essential to add at least 5 litres. seconds before starting the engine. Storage recommendations children, in its original container. ® AdBlue freezes at about -11°C and deteriorates ► Switch off the ignition and remove the key After refilling above +25°C. Containers should be stored in a Procedure from the switch to switch off the engine. ► Refit the blue cap to the tank filler and turn it cool area and protected from direct sunlight. or Before starting the top-up procedure, ensure that clockwise, as far as it will go. Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept for ► With Keyless Entry and Starting, press the the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface. ► Close the fuel filler flap. at least a year. "START/STOP" button to switch off the engine. If the fluid has frozen, it can be used once it has In wintry conditions, ensure that the temperature Do not dispose of AdBlue® bottles or completely thawed out in the ambient air. of the vehicle is above -11 °C. Otherwise the containers in the household waste. ® AdBlue may be frozen and so cannot be poured Place them in a container reserved for this Never store AdBlue® containers in your into its tank. Park the vehicle in a warmer area purpose or take them back to where you vehicle. for a few hours to allow the top-up to be carried purchased them. out.

Precautions for use ® Never put the AdBlue into the Diesel ► With the vehicle unlocked and the fuel filler ® AdBlue is a urea-based solution. This fluid is fuel tank. flap open, turn the blue cap of the AdBlue® tank Free-wheeling non-flammable, colourless and odourless (when anti-clockwise and remove it. In certain situations, you must allow the vehicle kept in a cool place). ® ® If any AdBlue is splashed, or if there are ► With a container of AdBlue : after checking to free-wheel (while being towed, on a rolling In the event of contact with the skin, wash the any spillages on the bodywork, rinse the expiry date, read carefully the instructions road, in an automatic car wash, or being affected area with soap and running water. In the immediately with cold water or wipe with a on the label before pouring the contents of the transported by rail or sea freight, etc.). event of contact with the eyes, immediately rinse damp cloth. container into the vehicle's AdBlue tank. The procedure varies according to the type of the eyes with large amounts of water or with an ® If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off using a ► With an AdBlue pump: introduce the nozzle gearbox and parking brake. eye wash solution for at least 15 minutes. Seek sponge and hot water. and fill the tank until the automatic cut-off of the nozzle.

150 Practical information

In order not to overfill the AdBlue® tank: With a manual gearbox and ► Release the brake pedal, then switch on the – Add between 10 and 13 litres using ignition again. 7 AdBlue® containers. electric parking brake ► While depressing the brake pedal, press the

– Stop after the nozzle’s first automatic cut- / control lever to release the parking brake. out, if you are refilling at a service station. ► Release the brake pedal, then switch off the Release procedure ignition. ® If the AdBlue tank is completely empty ► With the engine running and while depressing Reverting to normal operation – which is confirmed by the “Top the brake pedal, move the gear selector to the ► While depressing the brake pedal, start the up AdBlue: Starting impossible” message – it neutral position. engine. is essential to add at least 5 litres. ► While depressing the brake pedal, switch off Keyless Entry and Starting the ignition. You must not depress the brake pedal After refilling ► Release the brake pedal, then switch on the while switching the ignition on or off. If you do, ignition again. ► Refit the blue cap to the tank filler and turn it the engine will start, requiring you to restart ► While depressing the brake pedal, press the clockwise, as far as it will go. the procedure. ► Close the fuel filler flap. control lever to release the parking brake. ► Release the brake pedal, then switch off the Do not dispose of AdBlue® bottles or ignition. containers in the household waste. Advice on care and Reverting to normal operation Place them in a container reserved for this maintenance purpose or take them back to where you ► While depressing the brake pedal, start the purchased them. engine. General recommendations With an automatic gearbox Observe the following recommendations to avoid Free-wheeling and electric parking brake damaging your vehicle. Exterior In certain situations, you must allow the vehicle / to free-wheel (while being towed, on a rolling Never use a high-pressure jet wash in road, in an automatic car wash, or being Release procedure the engine compartment, due to the risk transported by rail or sea freight, etc.). ► With the engine running and while depressing of damaging electrical components. The procedure varies according to the type of the brake pedal, set the gear selector to N. Do not wash the vehicle in strong sunshine or gearbox and parking brake. ► While depressing the brake pedal, switch off extremely cold conditions. the ignition.

151 Practical information

When washing the vehicle at an controls in the dashboard and centre console. Use a high-flow hose at a temperature automatic roller-brush car wash, be sure Take care! between 25°C and 40°C. to lock the doors and, depending on version, Sweep the jet of water across the surface to remove the electronic key. be cleaned, perpendicular to it. When using a pressure washer, hold the Bodywork Rinse the vehicle with demineralised water. lance at least 30 cm from the vehicle High-gloss paint (particularly when cleaning areas containing chipped paint, sensors or seals). Do not use abrasive products or Promptly clean up any stains containing solvents, petrol or oil to clean the chemicals liable to damage the vehicle's paint bodywork. (including tree resin, bird droppings, insect Never use an abrasive sponge to clean secretions, pollen and tar). stubborn stains. Risk of scratching the If justified by the environment, clean the paintwork! vehicle more frequently to remove salty Do not apply polish in strong sunshine, or to deposits (in coastal areas), soot (in industrial plastic or rubber parts. estates) and mud (in wet or cold areas). These substances can be highly corrosive. Use a soft sponge and soapy water or a Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified pH neutral product. workshop if you require advice on removing Gently wipe the bodywork with a clean stubborn stains requiring special products microfibre cloth. (such as tar or insect removers). Apply polish with the vehicle clean and dry. Preferably, have paint touch-ups performed Comply with the instructions for use stated on by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified the product. workshop. Decals Interior (Depending on version) When washing the vehicle, never use a Do not use a high pressure washer to water hose or high-pressure washer to clean the vehicle. Risk of damaging or clean the interior. detaching the decals! Liquids carried in cups or other open containers can spill, presenting a risk of damage if they come into contact with the

152 In the event of a breakdown

Running out of fuel Non-BlueHDi engines The jack is located under the right-hand front seat. 8 ► Open the bonnet and then, if necessary, (Diesel) unclip the cover to access the priming pump. The tools are located under the left-hand front On vehicles fitted with Diesel engines, the fuel ► Operate the priming pump repeatedly seat. system must be primed if you run out of fuel. until resistance is felt (resistance may be If the engine does not start first time, do not keep felt at the first press). Description of tools trying, but start the procedure again from the ► Operate the starter motor to start the engine beginning. (if the engine does not start at the first attempt, wait around 15 seconds before trying again). For more information on Misfuel ► If the engine does not start after a few prevention (Diesel), refer to the attempts, operate the priming pump again, then corresponding section. the starter motor. With 1.6 BlueHDi (Euro 6.1) ► Put the cover back in place and clip it in, then close the bonnet. ► Switch on the ignition (without starting the 1. Chock to immobilise the vehicle. engine). 2. Removable towing eye. ► Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the Tool kit 3. Torx key. ignition. ► For easier access, move the seat(s) forward. Allows the removal of the rear lamps in order ► Repeat the operation 10 times. to change a bulb. ► Operate the starter motor to start the engine. Accessing the tools If the engine does not start at the first attempt, With a temporary puncture repair kit do not keep trying, but restart the procedure. With a temporary puncture repair kit

With 1.5 BlueHDi (Euro 6.2/6.3) ► Switch on the ignition (without starting the engine). ► Wait around 1 minute and switch off the The kit is located under the right-hand front seat. ignition. ► Operate the starter motor to start the engine. With spare wheel If the engine does not start at the first attempt, do not keep trying, but restart the procedure.

153 In the event of a breakdown

4. 12 V compressor with a cartridge of sealant 8. Socket for the “security” wheel bolts. Temporary puncture and a speed limit sticker For adapting the wheelbrace to the special For temporary repair of a tyre and to adjust "security" bolts. repair kit the tyre pressure. Scan the QR code on page 3 to view For more information on the Spare For more information about the Temporary explanatory videos. wheel, please refer to the corresponding puncture repair kit, refer to the corresponding section. section. Comprising a compressor and a sealant cartridge, it allows the temporary repair of a With spare wheel All of these tools are specific to your tyre so that you can drive to the nearest garage. vehicle and may vary depending on It is designed to repair most punctures equipment. which could affect the tyre, located on Do not use them for any other purposes. the tyre tread or shoulder.

The jack must only be used to change a The vehicle's electric system allows the wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre. connection of the compressor for long The jack does not require any maintenance. enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture The jack meets European standards, as repair. defined in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/ CE. For more information on the Tool kit, 5. Wheelbrace. refer to the corresponding section. Certain parts of the jack such as the For removing the wheel bolts and raising/ screw thread or the joints could cause lowering the jack. injury: avoid touching them. 6. Jack. Repair procedure Carefully remove all traces of lubrication Used to raise the vehicle. grease. Do not remove any foreign bodies (e.g. Wheel bolt cover/wheel trim removal tool 7. nail, screw) which have penetrated into (depending on equipment). the tyre. If present on the vehicle, used to remove the wheel bolt covers on alloy wheels or the ► Park the vehicle without obstructing traffic wheel trim on steel wheels. and apply the parking brake. ► Follow the safety instructions (hazard warning lamps, warning triangle, high visibility

154 In the event of a breakdown vest, etc.) according to the legislation in force in The speed limit sticker must be secured ► Disconnect the compressor's electric plug the country of driving. to the interior of the vehicle in the area from the vehicle's 12 V socket. 8 ► Switch off the ignition. close to the driver, to remind the driver that a ► Refit the cap on the valve. ► Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be wheel is in temporary use. ► Remove the kit. repaired, and place it in a clean area. ► Remove and store the bottle of sealant.

The tyre inflation pressures are given on The sealant product is harmful if this label. swallowed and causes irritation to the

eyes. Keep this product out of the reach of children. The use-by date of the fluid is marked on the bottle. ► Switch on the ignition.

After use, do not discard the bottle in standard waste, take it to a PEUGEOT dealer or an authorised waste disposal site.

Do not forget to obtain a new bottle of ► Connect the hose from the bottle of sealant sealant, available from a PEUGEOT dealer or to the valve of the tyre to be repaired and tighten a qualified workshop.

firmly. ► Connect the pipe from the compressor to the ► Switch on the compressor by moving switch bottle of sealant. to position "I" until the tyre pressure reaches ► Check that the compressor switch is in 2 bars. The sealant product is injected under position "O". pressure into the tyre; do not disconnect the ► Fully uncoil the electric cable stowed under pipe from the valve during this operation (risk of the compressor. blowback). ► Connect the compressor's electric plug to the If after approximately 7 minutes the vehicle's 12 V socket.

pressure of 2 bars is not reached, this Only the 12 V socket located at the front indicates that the tyre is not repairable; ► Drive immediately for approximately 3 miles of the vehicle can be used to power the contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified (5 kilometres) at reduced speed (between compressor. workshop for assistance. 12 and 37 mph (20 and 60 km/h)) to plug the puncture. ► Affix the speed limit sticker. ► Move the switch to position "O". ► Stop to check the repair and the tyre pressure using the kit.

155 In the event of a breakdown

With a tyre repaired using this type of kit, For more information on the Tool kit, do not exceed a speed of 50 mph refer to the corresponding section.

(80 km/h) and do not drive more than ► Start the compressor by placing the switch at 125 miles (200 km). ► Park the vehicle, taking care to avoid position "I" and adjust the pressure to the value Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified obstructing traffic, and apply the parking brake. shown on the vehicle's tyre pressure label. To workshop to have the tyre changed. ► Follow the safety instructions (hazard deflate: press the black button located on the warning lamps, warning triangle, wearing high compressor pipe, near the valve connection. visibility vest, etc.) according to the legislation in Checking / adjusting tyre If after 7 minutes the pressure of 2 bars force in the country where you are driving. pressures is not reached, this indicates that the tyre ► Switch off the ignition. is damaged; contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a The compressor can be used, without injecting Access to the spare wheel sealant, to check and, if necessary, adjust the qualified workshop for assistance. ► Access to the spare wheel is from the rear.

tyre pressures. ► Once the correct pressure is reached, put the ► Remove the valve cap from the tyre and keep switch in position "O". it in a clean place. ► Remove the kit and stow it. ► Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor. ► Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten Should the pressure of one or more tyres firmly. be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise ► Check that the compressor switch is in the under-inflation detection system. position "O". For more information on Tyre under-inflation ► Fully uncoil the electric cable stowed under detection, refer to the corresponding section. the compressor. ► Connect the compressor's electric plug to the ► If your vehicle is fitted with a towbar, raise vehicle's 12 V socket. Spare wheel the rear of the vehicle using the jack (must be ► Switch on the ignition. at jacking point B) to allow sufficient space to Scan the QR code on page 3 to view remove the spare wheel. Only the 12 V socket located at the front explanatory videos. of the vehicle can be used to power the Removing the spare wheel from the compressor. Procedure for changing a damaged wheel with carrier the spare wheel using the tools provided with the ► Depending on version, open the tailgate or The tyre inflation pressures are given on vehicle. side-hinged doors. this label.

156 In the event of a breakdown

Putting the spare wheel back in the Check for the fixed illumination of the parking carrier brake warning lamps in the instrument panel. 8 The occupants must get out of the vehicle and wait where they are safe. If necessary, place a chock under the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be changed. Never go underneath a vehicle raised using a

► Access the carrier bolt, located on the rear jack; use an axle stand. door sill.

Wheel with wheel trim ► Position the wheel facing the carrier. When removing the wheel, first remove ► Progressively return the wheel to the carrier the wheel trim by pulling at the valve aperture by pushing alternately at left and right until it is using the wheelbrace. clear of the hook fixing area. When refitting the wheel, refit the wheel ► Engage the carrier on the hook, then tighten trim, starting by placing its aperture in line the bolt using the wheelbrace handle until the with the valve and then pushing it into place ► Slacken the bolt using the wheelbrace until bolt is tight. all round its edge with the palm of your hand. the carrier is low enough to allow the carrier hook to be disengaged.

Removing a wheel

Parking the vehicle Immobilise the vehicle where it does not obstruct traffic: the ground must be level, stable and non-slippery. With a manual gearbox, engage first gear to lock the wheels, apply the parking brake, unless it is programmed to be in automatic mode, and switch off the ignition. With an automatic gearbox, select mode P to lock the wheels, apply the parking brake,

► Release the carrier from the hook and unless it is programmed to be in automatic place the spare wheel next to the wheel to be mode, and switch off the ignition.

changed.

157 In the event of a breakdown

► With a steel wheel, remove the wheel trim Ensure that the jack is positioned strictly at Fitting a wheel using tool 7. one of the jacking points A or B under the ► With an alloy wheel, remove the cap from vehicle, making sure that the vehicle's contact each of the bolts using tool 7. surface is correctly centred on the head of the ► If the vehicle is so equipped, fit security bolt jack. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to socket 8 to wheelbrace 5 to slacken the security the vehicle and/or of the jack collapsing.

bolt. ► Slacken (without removing) the other wheel

bolts using just wheelbrace 5.

Wheel with wheel trim When removing the wheel, first remove

the wheel trim by pulling at the valve aperture using the wheelbrace. ► Fit the wheel on the hub.

► Screw in the bolts by hand as far as possible. ► Pre-tighten the security bolt using the wheelbrace 5 equipped with a security socket 8. ► Pre-tighten the other bolts using the

► Remove the bolts and store them in a clean wheelbrace 5 only. ► Lower the vehicle again fully. place. ► Fold jack 6 and remove it.

► Extend jack 6 until its head comes into ► Remove the wheel. contact with jacking point A or B, whichever is used; the contact surface A or B of the vehicle

► Place the foot of the jack on the ground and must be correctly engaged with the central part of the head of the jack. ensure that it is directly below the A or B jacking point provided on the underbody, whichever is ► Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient closest to the wheel to be changed. space between the wheel and the ground to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel easily.

Risk of injury! Ensure that the jack is stable. If the ground is slippery or loose, the jack may slip or collapse.

158 In the event of a breakdown

Fitting a wheel ► If your vehicle is so equipped, tighten the If your vehicle has tyre under-inflation security bolt using the wheelbrace 5 equipped detection, check the tyre pressures and 8 with a security socket 8. reinitialise the system. ► Tighten the other bolts using the For more information on Under-inflation wheelbrace 5 only. detection, refer to the corresponding section. ► Store the tools.

Wheel with wheel trim When refitting the wheel, refit the wheel trim, starting by aligning the cutout with the valve and then pushing the trim into place all round its edge with the palm of your hand.

► Fit the wheel on the hub. Fitting a steel or "space-saver" type ► Screw in the bolts by hand as far as possible. spare wheel

► Pre-tighten the security bolt using the If the vehicle is equipped with alloy wheels, wheelbrace 5 equipped with a security socket 8. the washers do not make contact with the The tyre inflation pressures are given on ► Pre-tighten the other bolts using the steel or "space-saver" type spare wheel. The this label. wheelbrace 5 only. wheel is secured by the conical contact of ► Lower the vehicle again fully. each bolt. ► Fold jack 6 and remove it.

Changing a bulb After changing a wheel Stow the punctured wheel in the carrier. In some weather conditions (e.g. low Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified temperature or humidity), misting on the workshop as soon as possible. internal surface of the glass of the headlamps Have the punctured tyre examined. After and rear lamps is normal, and will disappear inspection, the technician will advise you on after the lamps have been on for a few whether the tyre can be repaired or if it must minutes. be replaced.

Some driving aid functions should be

disabled, e.g. the Active Safety Brake.

159 In the event of a breakdown

The headlamps have polycarbonate Take care with objects or clothing that could Types of bulb Model A lenses with a protective coating: be caught in the blades of the cooling fan - Various types of bulb are fitted on the vehicle. To ► risk of strangulation! do not clean them with a dry or remove them: abrasive cloth, nor with detergent or solvent products, ► use a sponge and soapy water or a pH neutral product, ► when using a high-pressure washer on persistent marks, do not keep the lance Halogen bulbs (Hx) directed towards the lamps or their edges for To ensure good quality lighting, check too long, so as not to damage their protective that the bulb is correctly positioned in its

coating and seals. housing. Type A All-glass bulb: pull gently as it is fitted by pressure. Model B Changing a bulb must only be done with After changing a bulb Type B Bayonet bulb: press on the bulb then the ignition off and after the lamp has To refit, carry out the fitting operations in turn it anti-clockwise. been switched off for several minutes - risk of reverse order. Type C Halogen bulb: release the retaining serious burns! Close the protective cover very carefully to spring from its housing. Do not touch the bulb directly with your guarantee the sealing of the lamps. Type D Halogen bulb: turn the bulb fingers, use a lint-free cloth. anti-clockwise. It is essential only to use anti-ultraviolet (UV) type bulbs, so as not to damage the Light-emitting diode (LED) When each operation has been headlamp. headlamps and lamps completed, check the operation of the Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb Depending on version, the affected types of lighting. of the same type and specification. headlamps / lamps are: – Daytime running lamps / sidelamps. 1. Sidelamps / Daytime running lamps. Opening the bonnet / Accessing the Front lamps Type A, W21/5W or LED (depending on For the replacement of this type of bulb, version) bulbs you must contact a PEUGEOT dealer or For more information on Changing a bulb With the engine warm, proceed with caution - 2. Main beam headlamps. a qualified workshop. and, in particular, the types of bulb, refer to the risk of burns! corresponding section. Type C, H1 3. Dipped beam headlamps. Type C, H7

160 In the event of a breakdown

Model A 4. Direction indicator. Dipped beam headlamps 8 Type B, PY21W Type C, H7

5. Foglamp. Type D, H11

Direction indicator side repeater Type A, WY5W-5W (amber)

Model B

► Remove the protective cover by pulling on the tab. – Push the repeater towards the rear and ► Turn the unit in relation to the support. release it. ► Pull the bulb connector. – When refitting, engage the repeater towards ► Remove the bulb and replace it. the front and then bring it back towards the rear. Take care to reposition the protective Amber-coloured bulbs (direction indicators and 1. Sidelamps / Daytime running lamps. side repeaters) must be replaced with bulbs of cover while keeping the tab accessible. Type A, W21/5W or LED (depending on identical specification and colour. version) 2. Main beam headlamps. Type C, H1 3. Dipped beam headlamps. Type C, H7

161 In the event of a breakdown

Sidelamps / Daytime running lamps Main beam headlamps the bulbs on the corresponding side has failed. (model A) Type C, H1

Type A, W21/5W

► Turn the connector a quarter turn ► Turn the connector a quarter turn clockwise. anti-clockwise. ► Pull the bulb connector. ► Remove the protective cover by pulling on ► Pull the unit in relation to the support. ► Remove the bulb and replace it. the tab. ► Remove the bulb and replace it. ► Unclip the unit in relation to the support. Sidelamps / Daytime running lamps ► Pull the bulb connector. Front foglamps ► Remove the bulb and replace it. (model B) Type D, H11 Take care to reposition the protective Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Model A cover while keeping the tab accessible. For the replacement of this type of bulb, you must contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Direction indicators Type B, PY21W

Rapid flashing of a direction indicator lamp (left or right) indicates that one of Model B

162 In the event of a breakdown

► Press the locking clip and disconnect the 3. Reversing lamps. connector. 8 Type B, P21W ► Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn 4. Foglamps. anti-clockwise. Type B, P21W

► Remove the bulb holder. ► Replace the faulty bulb. ► Insert a flat screwdriver between the lamp and the cover. To replace these bulbs, it is possible to ► Pull and lever to unclip the cover. contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Rear lamps For more information on Changing a bulb and, in particular, the types of bulb, refer to the

corresponding section. ► Remove the two fastening screws of the ► From the inside, disconnect the electrical module. connector at the rear of the lamps.

With side-hinged doors/tailgate ► Remove the module from its housing.

► Remove the two fixing bolts using theTorx key provided in your vehicle. 1. Brake lamps/sidelamps. For more information on the Tool kit, please Type B, P21/5W refer to the corresponding section. 2. Direction indicators. ► From the outside, pull the whole lamp unit Type B, PY21W (amber) towards you (with side-hinged doors) or towards the centre of the vehicle (with tailgate).

163 In the event of a breakdown

► Unclip the interior trim. – Push the rods. The extraction tweezers are located behind the ► Disconnect the connector by moving aside – If necessary, disconnect the connector to fusebox cover. its tab. remove the lamp. ► Unclip the cover by pulling at the top left, then ► Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn – Replace the bulb. right. anti-clockwise. ► Remove the cover completely. ► Change the bulb. ► Take the tweezers from their housing. ► Put the bulb holder back in place and Changing a fuse reconnect the connector. Changing a fuse ► Put the trim back in place. Accessing the tools Before changing a fuse:

► Open the tabs, then pull out the lamp holder. ► Identify the cause of the fault and fix it. ► Remove the faulty bulb by pressing lightly on With tailgate ► Stop all power consumption.

it while turning it a quarter turn anti-clockwise. ► Replace the bulb. ► Immobilise the vehicle and switch the ignition off. Take care to reposition the tabs and the ► Identify the defective fuse using the current

wiring correctly to avoid trapping the allocation tables and diagrams. wire. ► Remove the plastic lens using a screwdriver. To replace a fuse, it is essential to: ► Change the bulb. ► Use the special tweezers to extract the fuse After changing a rear direction indicator ► Refit the plastic lens and press on it. from its housing and check the condition of its bulb, the reinitialisation time is filament. approximately 2 minutes or more. Third brake lamp ► Always replace the failed fuse with a fuse of

Type A, W16W - 16W the same rating (same colour); use of a different

Number plate lamps rating may cause malfunctions - risk of fire! If the fault recurs after replacing a fuse, have

Type A, W5W - 5W the electrical system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. With side-hinged doors

The fuse allocation tables and the corresponding diagrams are available from a PEUGEOT dealer or from a qualified workshop.

The replacement of a fuse not shown in

– Unscrew the two nuts. the allocation tables may cause a serious

164 In the event of a breakdown

The extraction tweezers are located behind the malfunction of your vehicle. Contact a For more information on installing a fusebox cover. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. towbar or TAXI type equipment, contact a 8 ► Unclip the cover by pulling at the top left, then PEUGEOT dealer. right. ► Remove the cover completely. ► Take the tweezers from their housing. Dashboard fuses The fusebox is placed in the lower dashboard

Changing a fuse (left-hand side). Before changing a fuse: Good Failed Access to the fuses

► Identify the cause of the fault and fix it. ► Stop all power consumption. ► Unclip the cover by pulling at the top left, then

► Immobilise the vehicle and switch the ignition right. The fuses described below vary according to the off. Tweezers equipment in your vehicle.

► Identify the defective fuse using the current allocation tables and diagrams. Installing electrical accessories To replace a fuse, it is essential to: Your vehicle's electrical system is ► Use the special tweezers to extract the fuse designed to operate with standard or optional from its housing and check the condition of its equipment. filament. Before installing other electrical equipment ► Always replace the failed fuse with a fuse of or accessories on your vehicle, contact a the same rating (same colour); use of a different PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. rating may cause malfunctions - risk of fire! If the fault recurs after replacing a fuse, have PEUGEOT will not accept responsibility the electrical system checked by a PEUGEOT for the cost incurred in repairing your dealer or a qualified workshop. vehicle or for rectifying malfunctions resulting The fuse allocation tables and the from the installation of accessories not Fuse No. Rating (A) Functions corresponding diagrams are available supplied and not recommended by F1 10 Wireless from a PEUGEOT dealer or from a qualified PEUGEOT and not installed in accordance smartphone workshop. with its instructions, in particular when the charger, interior combined consumption of all of the additional electrochrome equipment connected exceeds 10 The replacement of a fuse not shown in rear view mirror. the allocation tables may cause a serious milliamperes.

165 In the event of a breakdown

Fuse No. Rating (A) Functions Fuse No. Rating (A) Functions Lead-acid starter batteries F4 15 Horn. F34 5 Mirror control. Batteries contain harmful substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. F6 20 Screenwash F36 5 USB port. They must be disposed of in accordance pump. with regulations and must not, in any F7 10 12 V socket Engine compartment fuses circumstances, be discarded with household (rear). The fusebox is placed in the engine waste. F10 30 Electric locks compartment near the battery. Take used remote control batteries and module. vehicle batteries to a special collection point. Access to the fuses F13 10 Telematics and Fuse No. Rating Functions Protect your eyes and face before radio controls. (A) handling the battery. F14 5 Alarm, All operations on the battery must be carried F16 15 Front foglamp. advanced out in a well ventilated area and away from telematic unit. F18 10 Right-hand naked flames and sources of sparks, so as to main beam F19 3 Trailer interface avoid the risk of explosion or fire. headlamp. unit. Wash your hands afterwards. F19 10 Left-hand F23 5 Generic trailer main beam Versions equipped with Stop & Start are interface unit. headlamp. fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery with

F27 5 Additional special technology and specifications. F29 40 Windscreen heating. ► Release the two latches A. wipers. It should only be replaced by a PEUGEOT F29 20 Audio system, ► Remove the cover. dealer or a qualified workshop. touch screen. ► Change the fuse. ► When you have finished, close the cover 12 V battery F31 15 Audio system carefully then engage the two latches A, to Access to the battery (as an ensure correct sealing of the fusebox. Procedure for starting the engine using another The battery is located under the bonnet. accessory). battery or charging a discharged battery. ► Open the bonnet using the interior release F32 15 12 V socket lever, then the exterior safety catch. ► Secure the bonnet stay.

(front).

166 In the event of a breakdown

Lead-acid starter batteries The two vehicles must not be in contact with each other. 8 Batteries contain harmful substances Switch off all the electrical consumers on both such as sulphuric acid and lead. vehicles (audio system, wipers, lighting, etc.). They must be disposed of in accordance Make sure that the jump leads are not close with regulations and must not, in any to the moving parts of the engine (fan, belt, circumstances, be discarded with household etc.). waste. Do not disconnect the (+) terminal while the Take used remote control batteries and engine is running. vehicle batteries to a special collection point.

The battery (-) terminal is not accessible. Protect your eyes and face before There is a remote earth point near the battery. handling the battery. All operations on the battery must be carried For more information on the Bonnet and out in a well ventilated area and away from the Engine, refer to the corresponding naked flames and sources of sparks, so as to sections. avoid the risk of explosion or fire. Wash your hands afterwards. Starting using another Versions equipped with Stop & Start are battery fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery with When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the special technology and specifications. engine can be started using a backup battery ► Connect the red cable to the (+) terminal of It should only be replaced by a PEUGEOT (external or from another vehicle) and jump flat battery A (at the metal elbow), then to the (+) dealer or a qualified workshop. leads or using a battery booster. terminal of backup battery B or the booster. ► Connect one end of the green or black cable Never start the engine by connecting a to the (-) terminal of backup battery B or the Access to the battery battery charger. booster (or to an earth point on the assisting The battery is located under the bonnet. Never use a 24 V or higher battery booster. vehicle). ► Open the bonnet using the interior release Check beforehand that the backup battery ► Connect the other end of the green or black lever, then the exterior safety catch. has a nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity cable to earth point C on the broken down ► Secure the bonnet stay. at least equal to that of the discharged vehicle. battery. ► Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and leave it running for a few minutes.

167 In the event of a breakdown

► Operate the starter on the broken down To charge the vehicle's battery yourself, ► Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if the Disconnecting the battery vehicle and let the engine run. use only a charger compatible with vehicle has one. In order to maintain an adequate state of If the engine does not start straight away, switch lead-acid batteries with a nominal voltage of ► Connect the cables of charger as follows: B charge for starting the engine, we recommend off the ignition and wait a few moments before 12 V. • the positive (+) red cable to the (+) terminal disconnecting the battery if the vehicle is to be trying again. of battery , A unused for an extended period. ► Wait for it to return to idle. • the negative (-) black cable to earth point Follow the instructions provided by the C Before disconnecting the battery: ► Disconnect the jump leads . on the vehicle. in reverse order manufacturer of the charger. ► close all doors, windows and the tailgate and ► Allow the engine to run for at least ► At the end of the charging operation, switch Never reverse polarities. sunroof, 30 minutes, by driving or with the vehicle off charger before disconnecting the cables B ► switch off all electricity consuming devices stationary, so that the battery reaches an from battery A.

It is not necessary to disconnect the (audio system, wipers, headlamps, etc.), adequate state of charge. battery. ► switch off the ignition and wait for four To disconnect, proceed in reverse order. minutes. ► Switch off the ignition. At the battery, it is only necessary to disconnect ► Switch off all electrical consumers (audio 24v 12v the (+) terminal. system, lighting, wipers, etc.).

Some functions, including Stop & Start, Quick-release terminal clamp are not available if the battery is not If this label is present, use only a 12 V Disconnecting the (+) terminal sufficiently charged. charger to avoid causing irreversible damage to the electrical components related Charging the battery using a to the Stop & Start system.

battery charger Never try to charge a frozen battery - risk For optimum service life of the battery, it is of explosion! essential to maintain an adequate state of If the battery has frozen, have it checked by a charge. PEUGEOT dealer or by a qualified workshop In some circumstances, it may be necessary to who will verify that the internal components

charge the battery: ► Switch off charger B before connecting have not been damaged and that the case – using the vehicle mainly for short journeys; the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any has not cracked, which would mean a risk of – if the vehicle is to be taken off the road for dangerous sparks. toxic and corrosive acid leaking. several weeks. ► Raise the lever A fully to release the clamp ► Ensure that the charger cables are in good Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified B. condition. workshop. ► Remove the clamp B by lifting it off. Reconnecting the (+) terminal

168 In the event of a breakdown

Disconnecting the battery – the remote control key or the electronic key (depending on version), 8 In order to maintain an adequate state of – the electric windows, charge for starting the engine, we recommend – the electric doors, disconnecting the battery if the vehicle is to be – the date and time, unused for an extended period. – the radio preset stations. Before disconnecting the battery: ► close all doors, windows and the tailgate and The Stop & Start system may not be sunroof, operational during the trip following the ► switch off all electricity consuming devices first engine start.

(audio system, wipers, headlamps, etc.), In this case, the system will only be ► switch off the ignition and wait for four ► Raise the lever A fully. available again after a continuous period of minutes. ► Replace the open clamp B on the (+) immobilisation of the vehicle, a period which At the battery, it is only necessary to disconnect terminal. depends on the exterior temperature and the the (+) terminal. ► Push the clamp B fully down. state of charge of the battery (up to about 8 ► Lower the lever A to lock the clamp B. hours). Quick-release terminal clamp Disconnecting the (+) terminal Do not force the lever as it will not be possible to lock the clamp if it is not positioned correctly; start the procedure again.

Following reconnection After reconnecting the battery, turn on the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting the engine, to enable the electronic systems to initialise. However, if minor problems persist following

this operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a ► Raise the lever A fully to release the clamp qualified workshop. B. Referring to the corresponding section, you must ► Remove the clamp B by lifting it off. reset certain systems yourself, such as: Reconnecting the (+) terminal

169 In the event of a breakdown

Towing Access to the eye Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for towing another vehicle using the towing eye. For more information on the Tool kit, General recommendations refer to the corresponding section. Observe the legislation in force in the country where you are driving. Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is higher than that of the towed vehicle. With a manual gearbox, move the gear The driver must remain at the wheel of the towed vehicle and must have a valid driving licence. lever into neutral. When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, always use an approved towbar; ropes and straps are prohibited. With an automatic gearbox, place the gear The towing vehicle must move off gently. selector into position N. When the vehicle is towed with its engine off, there is no longer braking and steering assistance. Failure to adhere to this instruction may lead to damage to braking system components A professional recovery service must be called if: and the lack of braking assistance on – broken down on a motorway or main road; restarting the engine. – not possible to put the gearbox into neutral, unlock the steering, or release the parking brake; – not possible to tow a vehicle with an automatic gearbox, with the engine running; Towing your vehicle

– towing with only two wheels on the ground; – four-wheel drive vehicle; – no approved towbar available.

Towing constraints Type of vehicle Font wheels on the Rear wheels on the Flatbed 4 wheels on the ground (engine / gearbox)gearbox ground ground with towbar

Internal combustion / Manual

Internal combustion / ► In the front bumper, slide a finger from the Automatic centre of the cover plate to the upper corner (as shown above) to unclip it. ► Screw the towing eye in fully. In case of battery or electric parking brake failure, it is essential to call a professional using flatbed recovery vehicles (excluding manual gearbox). ► Install the towbar.

170 In the event of a breakdown

Access to the eye ► Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the towed vehicle. 8 For more information on the Tool kit, ► Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short refer to the corresponding section. distance.

With a manual gearbox, move the gear Towing another vehicle lever into neutral. With an automatic gearbox, place the gear selector into position N. Failure to adhere to this instruction may lead to damage to braking system components and the lack of braking assistance on restarting the engine.

Towing your vehicle

► In the rear bumper, place the key in the notch located under the flap. ► Turn the key and then open the flap. ► Screw the towing eye in fully. ► Install the towbar. ► Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the towed vehicle. ► Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short distance.

► In the front bumper, slide a finger from the centre of the cover plate to the upper corner (as shown above) to unclip it. ► Screw the towing eye in fully. ► Install the towbar.

171 Technical data Dimensions (mm) These dimensions have been measured on an unladen vehicle. The vehicle is available in two lengths (Standard and Long). The height may vary, depending on wheel diameters.

Engine technical data and towed loads Engines The engine characteristics are given in the vehicle's registration document, as well as in sales brochures.

The maximum power corresponds to the value type-approved on a test bed, under Vehicle length conditions defined in European legislation (Directive 1999/99/EC). Standard (L1) Long (L2) A Overall length 4,403 4,753 For more information, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. B Overall height Without roof bars 1,833 to 1,837 1,836 to 1,840 With roof bars 1,874 to 1,878 1,879 to 1,882 C Wheelbase 2,785 2,975 D Front overhang 892 Engines and towed loads - PETROL E Rear overhang 726 886 Vehicles fitted with the VTi 110 BVM5 engine are not suitable for towing. F Width inc. mirrors Folded 1,921 Unfolded 2,107 G Front track width 1,553

172 Technical data

Vehicle length 9 Standard (L1) Long (L2) H Rear track width 1,567

Weights and towed loads When exterior temperatures are high, the Engine technical data and vehicle performance may be limited in The weights and towed loads relating to towed loads order to protect the engine. When the exterior your vehicle are indicated on the registration temperature is higher than 37°C, limit the document, as well as in sales brochures. towed weight. Engines These values are also indicated on the The engine characteristics are given in the manufacturer's plate or label. Towing even with a lightly loaded vehicle vehicle's registration document, as well as in For more information, contact a PEUGEOT can adversely affect its road holding. sales brochures. dealer or a qualified workshop. Braking distances are increased when towing The GTW (Gross Train Weight) and towed load The maximum power corresponds to the a trailer. values indicated are valid up to a maximum value type-approved on a test bed, under When using a vehicle to tow, never exceed altitude of 1,000 metres. The towed load value conditions defined in European legislation a speed of 62 mph (100 km/h) (observe the must be reduced by 10% for each additional (Directive 1999/99/EC). local legislation in force). 1,000 metres of altitude. For more information, contact a PEUGEOT The maximum authorised nose weight dealer or a qualified workshop. corresponds to the weight permitted on the If the exterior temperature is high, it is towball. recommended that the engine is allowed to idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the vehicle comes to a stop, to facilitate its cooling.

Engines and towed loads - PETROL Vehicles fitted with the VTi 110 BVM5 engine are not suitable for towing.

173 Technical data

Engines and towed loads - PETROL EURO 6.3 Engines and towed loads - DIESEL

Engine PureTech 110 S&S BVM6 PureTech 130 S&S EAT8 Engine HDi 75 BVM5 HDi 92 S&S BVM5 Gearbox Manual 6-speed Automatic 8-speed Gearbox Manual Manual 5-speed 5-speed Code EB2ADT MB6 STTD EB2ADTS ATN8 STTD Code DV6E BE DV6D BE Length Standard (L1) Long (L2) Standard (L1) Long (L2)

Length Standard (L1) Standard (L1) Long (L2) Model Code 5 seats ERHNSR-A ERHNSR-C

Model Code 5 seats EC9HNA-A EC9HPA-A EC9HPA-C

7 seats ERHNSR-B ERHNSR-D

7 seats / EC9HPA-B EC9HPA-D

Cubic capacity (cc) 1,199 1,199 Cubic capacity (cc) 1,560 1,560 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 81 96 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 55 68 Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Fuel Diesel Diesel Braked trailer (within 5 seats 1,150 1,100 1,200 1,150 the GTW limit) on a 12% Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) on a 12% 5 seats 1,000 1,100 1,050 7 seats 1,000 900 / 950 1,050 1 000 / 950 slope (kg) slope (kg) 7 seats / 950 900 Unbraked trailer (kg) 5 seats 720 / 730 750 740 / 750 750 Unbraked trailer (kg) 5 seats 720 720 750 7 seats 750 750 7 seats / 750 Maximum authorised 5 seats 74 74 74 74 Maximum authorised nose/towball weight (kg) 5 seats 74 74 74 nose/towball weight (kg) 7 seats 50 / 70 50 70 / 50 50 7 seats / 50 50

174 Technical data Engines and towed loads - DIESEL 9 Engine HDi 75 BVM5 HDi 92 S&S BVM5 Gearbox Manual Manual 5-speed 5-speed Code DV6E BE DV6D BE Length Standard (L1) Standard (L1) Long (L2)

Model Code 5 seats EC9HNA-A EC9HPA-A EC9HPA-C

7 seats / EC9HPA-B EC9HPA-D

Cubic capacity (cc) 1,560 1,560 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 55 68 Fuel Diesel Diesel Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) on a 12% 5 seats 1,000 1,100 1,050 slope (kg) 7 seats / 950 900 Unbraked trailer (kg) 5 seats 720 720 750 7 seats / 750 Maximum authorised nose/towball weight (kg) 5 seats 74 74 74 7 seats / 50 50

175 Technical data

Engines and towed loads - DIESEL EURO 6.1 Engines and towed loads - DIESEL EURO 6.2 and 6.3

Engine BlueHDi 75 BlueHDi 100 S&S BVM5 Engine BlueHDi 100 S&S BVM5 BlueHDi 130 S&S BVM6 BlueHDi 130 S&S EAT8 BVM5 Gearbox Manual 5-speed Manual 6-speed Automatic 8-speed Gearbox Manual Manual 5-speed Code DV5RD BE STTD - TBC DV5RC ML6 STTD DV5RC ATN8 STTD 5-speed Length Standard Long (L2) Standard Long (L2) Standard Long (L2) DV6FE BE DV6FD BE STTD Code (L1) (L1) (L1)

Length Standard (L1) Standard (L1) Long (L2) Model Code 5 seats ECYHYC-A ECYHYC-C ECYHZJ-A ECYHZJ-C ECYHZR-A ECYHZR-C

Model Code 5 seats ECBHWB-A ECBHYB-A ECBHYB-C

7 seats ECYHYC-B ECYHYC-D ECYHZJ-B ECYHZJ-D ECYHZR-B ECYHZR-D

7 seats / ECBHYB-B ECBHYB-D

Cubic capacity (cc) 1,499 1,499 1,499 Cubic capacity (cc) 1,560 1,560 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 75 96 96 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 55 73 Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Fuel Diesel Diesel Braked trailer (within 5 seats 1,300 1,250 1,500 1,450 1,300 1 225 / Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) on a 12% 5 seats 1,000 1,100 1,050 the GTW limit) on a 12% 1 250 slope (kg) slope (kg) 7 seats / 950 900 7 seats 1,150 1,050 / 1,350 1,250 1,100 / 1,050 / 1,100 1,150 1,100 Unbraked trailer (kg) 5 seats 730 730 750 Unbraked trailer (kg) 5 seats 740 / 750 750 750 750 750 750 7 seats / 750 7 seats 750 Maximum authorised nose/towball weight (kg) 5 seats 74 74 74 Maximum authorised 5 seats 74 74 74 74 52 74 7 seats / 50 50 nose/towball weight (kg) 7 seats 50 / 60 50 55 / 60 50 50 50

176 Technical data Engines and towed loads - DIESEL EURO 6.2 and 6.3 9 Engine BlueHDi 100 S&S BVM5 BlueHDi 130 S&S BVM6 BlueHDi 130 S&S EAT8 Gearbox Manual 5-speed Manual 6-speed Automatic 8-speed Code DV5RD BE STTD - TBC DV5RC ML6 STTD DV5RC ATN8 STTD Length Standard Long (L2) Standard Long (L2) Standard Long (L2) (L1) (L1) (L1)

Model Code 5 seats ECYHYC-A ECYHYC-C ECYHZJ-A ECYHZJ-C ECYHZR-A ECYHZR-C

7 seats ECYHYC-B ECYHYC-D ECYHZJ-B ECYHZJ-D ECYHZR-B ECYHZR-D

Cubic capacity (cc) 1,499 1,499 1,499 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 75 96 96 Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Braked trailer (within 5 seats 1,300 1,250 1,500 1,450 1,300 1 225 / the GTW limit) on a 12% 1 250 slope (kg) 7 seats 1,150 1,050 / 1,350 1,250 1,100 / 1,050 / 1,100 1,150 1,100 Unbraked trailer (kg) 5 seats 740 / 750 750 750 750 750 750 7 seats 750 Maximum authorised 5 seats 74 74 74 74 52 74 nose/towball weight (kg) 7 seats 50 / 60 50 55 / 60 50 50 50

177 Technical data

Identification markings – Gross vehicle weight (GVW). – Gross train weight (GTW). Various visible markings for the identification and – Maximum weight on the front axle. research of your vehicle.

– Maximum weight on the rear axle. D. Tyres / paint code label.

Fixed at the driver-side door. Bears the following information about the tyres: – tyre pressures, unladen and laden. – tyre specification, made up of the dimensions

and type as well as the load and speed indices. A. Vehicle identification number (VIN), under – spare tyre inflation pressure. the bonnet. Also indicates the paint colour code. Stamped on the chassis, near the right-hand The vehicle may be originally equipped front wheel arch. with tyres with higher load and speed B. Vehicle identification number (VIN), on the indices than those indicated on the label, dashboard. without affecting tyre pressure (on cold tyres). On a label, visible through the windscreen. C. Manufacturer's label. Fixed on the centre pillar, left-hand side or right- hand side. Bears the following information: – Manufacturer’s name. – European whole vehicle type approval number. – Vehicle identification number (VIN).

178 Bluetooth® audio system

Bluetooth® audio system To avoid discharging the battery, the Short press: select the preset radio station.

audio system may switch off after a few Long press: preset a radio station. 10 minutes if the engine is not running. Radio: Automatic step by step search up/down for radio stations. First steps Media: Select previous/next CD, USB, streaming track. Press: On/Off. Scroll in a list. Rotate: adjust volume. Radio: Short press: change audio source (radio; Manual step by step search up/down for USB; AUX (if equipment connected); CD;

radio stations. streaming). Select previous/next MP3 folder. The different functions and settings Long press: display the Telephone menu (if a Media: described vary according to the version telephone is connected). Select previous/next folder/genre/artist/playlist and configuration of your vehicle. Adjust audio settings: on the USB device. Front/rear fader; left/right balance; bass/ Scroll in a list. treble; loudness; audio ambience. As a safety measure and because it Cancel the current operation. Activate/Deactivate automatic volume requires sustained attention by the driver, Go up one level (menu or folder). adjustment (based on the vehicle’s speed). the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile telephone Access the main menu. with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your Radio : Short press: display the list of radio audio system must be done with the vehicle Activate/Deactivate TA function (traffic stations. stationary and the ignition on. announcements). Long press: update the list. Long press: select type of announcement. Media : Your audio system is coded in such a Selection of FM/DAB/AM wavebands. Short press: display the list of folders. way that it will only operate in your Long press: display the available sorting options. vehicle. Select the screen display mode, between: All work on the system must be carried out Date; Audio functions; Trip computer; exclusively by a dealer or qualified workshop, Steering mounted controls Telephone. to avoid any risk of electrocution, fire or Confirm or display contextual menu. mechanical faults. Steering mounted controls -

Buttons 1 to 6. Type 1

179 Bluetooth® audio system

Increase volume. Long press: end the call. "Connections": Manage connections, Radio: Start voice recognition on your search for devices. Select the previous / next preset radio Decrease volume. smartphone via the system. "Personalisation-configuration": Define station. Radio: the vehicle parameters, Choice of Select the previous / next item in a menu or a Mute / Restore sound by simultaneously Short press: display the list of radio language, Display configuration, Choice of units, list. pressing the increase and decrease stations. Date and time adjustment. Media: volume buttons. Long press: update the list. Press the "MENU" button. Select the previous / next track. Media: Select the previous / next item in a menu or a Steering mounted controls - Short press: display the list of folders. Move from one menu to another. list. Type 2 Long press: display the available sorting options. Radio: Radio: Enter a menu. Short press: display the list of radio Select the previous / next preset radio stations. station. Long press: update the list. Access to the main menu. Select the previous / next item in a menu or a Media: list. Radio Short press: display the list of folders. Increase volume. Media: Long press: display the available sorting options. Select the previous / next track. Selecting a station Other than telephone call: Mute / Restore the sound. Select the previous / next item in a menu or a Press the SOURCE button repeatedly Short press: changing audio source list. and select the radio. (radio; USB; AUX (if equipment connected); CD; Decrease volume. Press the thumbwheel: confirm. Press this button to select a waveband streaming), confirmation if the "Telephone" (FM / AM / DAB). menu is open. Other than telephone call: Press one of the buttons for an automatic Long press: open the "Telephone" menu. Short press: changing audio source Menus search for radio stations. In the event of a telephone call: (radio; USB; AUX (if equipment connected); CD; Depending on version. Press one of the buttons to carry out a Short press: accept the call. streaming), confirmation if the "Telephone" "Multimedia": Media settings, Radio manual search up / down for radio Long press: reject the call. menu is open. settings. frequencies. During a telephone call: Long press: open the "Telephone" menu. "Telephone": Call, Directory Press this button to display the list of Short press: open the contextual telephone In the event of a telephone call: management, Telephone management, stations received locally. menu. Short press: accept the call. Hang up. To update this list, press for more than two Long press: end the call. Long press: reject the call. "Trip computer". seconds. The sound is cut while updating. Confirm a selection. During a telephone call: Short press: open the contextual telephone "Maintenance": Diagnosis, Warning log, menu. etc.

180 Bluetooth® audio system

"Connections": Manage connections, RDS Press OK. search for devices. 10 "Personalisation-configuration": Define The external environment (hills, Select the "FM waveband preferences" the vehicle parameters, Choice of buildings, tunnels, basement car parks, function. language, Display configuration, Choice of units, etc.) may block reception, including in RDS Press OK. Date and time adjustment. mode. This is a normal effect of the way in Press the "MENU" button. which radio waves are transmitted and does Select "Frequency tracking (RDS)". not indicate any failure of the audio Move from one menu to another. equipment. Press OK, RDS is displayed on the screen. Enter a menu. If RDS is not available, the RDS symbol appears struck out in the screen. Play TA messages The TA (Traffic Announcement) function Radio The RDS, if activated, enables you to gives priority to TA alert messages. To continue listening to the same station by operate, this function needs good reception of Selecting a station automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. a radio station that carries this type of However, in certain conditions, coverage of message. When a traffic report is transmitted, Press the SOURCE button repeatedly an RDS station may not be assured the current audio source (Radio, CD, etc.) is and select the radio. throughout the entire country as radio stations interrupted automatically to play the TA Press this button to select a waveband do not cover 100% of the territory. This message. Normal play of the media (FM / AM / DAB). explains the loss of reception of the station previously playing is resumed at the end of Press one of the buttons for an automatic during a journey. the message. search for radio stations. Press one of the buttons to carry out a manual search up / down for radio Short procedure Take care when increasing the volume frequencies. In "Radio" mode, press the OK button to activate while listening to TA messages. The Press this button to display the list of or deactivate RDS directly. volume may prove too high on return to the stations received locally. original audio source. To update this list, press for more than two Long procedure Press the TA button to activate or seconds. The sound is cut while updating. Press the MENU button. deactivate traffic messages.

Select "Audio functions".

181 Bluetooth® audio system

Receiving INFO messages DAB (Digital Audio When changing region, updating the list When the radio station is displayed in the of preset radio stations is recommended. screen , press "OK" to display the The INFO function gives priority to TA

Broadcasting) radio contextual menu. alert messages. To be active, this (Frequency search (RDS), DAB / FM auto Terrestrial Digital Radio function needs good reception of a radio tracking, RadioText (TXT) display, Information station that transmits this type of message. Depending on version on the station, etc.) When a message is transmitted, the current If the current DAB radio station is not

audio source (Radio, CD, USB, etc.) is available on FM, "DAB FM" is struck out. interrupted automatically to receive the INFO Full list of radio stations and "multiplexes". DAB / FM station tracking message. Normal play of the media "DAB" does not have 100% coverage of previously playing is resumed at the end of the country. the message. Terrestrial digital radio When the digital signal is weak, "DAB / FM Make a long press on this button to Digital radio provides a superior audio auto tracking" allows you to continue display the list of categories. quality and also additional categories of listening to the same station, by automatically Select or deselect categories. traffic announcements (TA INFO). switching to the corresponding analogue FM The different "multiplex / ensemble” services station (if it exists). Activate or deactivate the reception of the offer a choice of radio stations in alphabetical When the "DAB / FM auto tracking" is active,

corresponding messages. order. the DAB station will be selected automatically. 1 Options display: if active but not available, the display will be struck out. Change of band (FM1, FM2, DAB, etc.) Press the MENU button. Display TEXT INFOS 2 Display showing the name of the current Radio text is information transmitted by station. Change of station within the same Select "Multimedia" and confirm. the radio station related to the station's 3 Preset stations, buttons 1 to 6. "multiplex / ensemble". current programme or song. Short press: select the preset radio station. Starting of a search for the previous / next Select "DAB / FM auto tracking" and Long press: memorise a radio station. "multiplex / ensemble". confirm. When the radio station is displayed in the 4 Display showing the name of the “multiplex” Long press: selection of the categories of If "DAB / FM auto tracking" tracking is screen, press OK to display the service being used. news desired among Transport, News, enabled, there is a lag of a few seconds contextual menu. 5 RadioText (TXT) display for the current radio Entertainment and Special Flash (available when the system switches to the analogue Select "RadioText (TXT) display" and station. depending on the station). FM station sometimes with a change in confirmOK to save. 6 Represents the signal strength for the band volume. being listened to.

182 Bluetooth® audio system

When the radio station is displayed in the If the "DAB" station you are listening to is When the USB port is used, the portable screen , press "OK" to display the not available on FM ("DAB/FM" option device charges automatically. 10 contextual menu. struck out), or if "DAB / FM auto tracking" is (Frequency search (RDS), DAB / FM auto not on, the sound will be cut when the digital Play mode tracking, RadioText (TXT) display, Information signal is too weak. on the station, etc.) The play modes available are: – Normal: the tracks are played in order, depending on the classification of the selected DAB / FM station tracking Media files. – Random: the tracks in an album or folder are "DAB" does not have 100% coverage of USB port played in a random order. the country. Insert the USB memory stick into the USB – Random on all media: all of the tracks saved When the digital signal is weak, "DAB / FM port or connect the USB device to the in the media are played in random order. auto tracking" allows you to continue USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). – Repeat: the tracks played are only those from listening to the same station, by automatically The system changes automatically to "USB" the current album or folder. switching to the corresponding analogue FM source. Press this button to display the contextual station (if it exists). menu for the Media function. When the "DAB / FM auto tracking" is active, To protect the system, do not use a USB Press this button to select the chosen the DAB station will be selected automatically. hub. play mode. Press the button. Press this button to confirm. MENU Any additional devices connected to the system must comply with the standard Select "Multimedia" and confirm. The choice made is displayed at the top of the applicable to the product and/or the standard screen. IEC 60950-1. Select "DAB / FM auto tracking" and Choosing a track to play confirm. The system builds playlists (in temporary Press one of these buttons to go to the memory); this operation can take from a If "DAB / FM auto tracking" tracking is previous / next track. few seconds to several minutes at the first enabled, there is a lag of a few seconds Press one of these buttons to go to the connection. when the system switches to the analogue previous / next folder. Reduce the number of non-music files and the FM station sometimes with a change in number of folders to reduce the waiting time. volume. File classification Playlists are updated every time a new USB Make a long press on this button to memory stick is connected. display the different classifications.

183 Bluetooth® audio system

Select by "Folder" / "Artist" / "Genre" / applicable to the product and/or the standard Press the LIST button to display the list of Press and hold one of these buttons for "Playlist". IEC 60950-1. tracks on the CD. fast forward or rewind. Depending on availability and type of device Press and hold one of these buttons for ® used. Press the SOURCE button several times fast forward or rewind. Bluetooth audio streaming in succession and select " ". Press OK to select the desired AUX Streaming allows music files on the telephone to First adjust the volume on your portable device classification, then press OK again to Playing an MP3 compilation be played via the vehicle's loudspeakers. (to a high level). Then adjust the volume on your confirm. Insert an MP3 compilation in the CD player. Connect the telephone. audio system. Controls are managed via the The audio equipment searches for all of the (Refer to the "Pairing a Bluetooth® telephone" portable device. Playing files music tracks, which may take anything between section). Make a short press on this button to Do not connect the same device to both a few seconds and several tens of seconds, Activate the streaming source by pressing display the chosen classification. the auxiliary jack socket and the USB before play begins. SOURCE. Navigate in the list using the left / right port at the same time. In certain cases, play of the audio files must be On a single disc, the CD player can read and up / down buttons. initiated from the keypad. up to 255 MP3 files spread over 8 Confirm the selection by pressing OK. Audio files can be selected using the buttons on directory levels. CD player the audio system control panel and the steering However, it is advisable to keep to a limit of Press one of these buttons to go to the Insert circular compact discs only. mounted controls. The contextual information two levels to reduce the access time before previous / next track in the list. Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs can be displayed in the screen. the CD is played. Press and hold one of these buttons for fast or CDs copied using a personal recorder, may If the telephone supports the function. The audio The folder structure is not observed during forward or rewind. cause faults which are no reflection on the quality depends on the quality of transmission by playback. Press one of these buttons to go to the quality of the original player. the telephone. All of the files are displayed on a single level. previous / next "Folder" / "Artist" / Insert a CD in the player, play begins ® "Genre" / "Playlist"* in the list. automatically. To play a disc which has already been Connecting Apple players Connect the Apple® player to the USB port using Input AUX socket (AUX) External CD players connected via the inserted, press the SOURCE button USB port are not recognised by the several times in succession and select "CD". a suitable cable (not supplied). Depending on equipment system. Press one of the buttons to select a folder Play starts automatically. Connect a portable device (MP3 player, on the CD. Control is via the audio system. etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an To play a disc which has already been Press one of the buttons to select a track The classifications available are those of the audio cable (not supplied). inserted, press the SOURCE button on the CD. portable device connected (artists / albums / several times in succession and select " ". genres / playlists). Any additional devices connected to the CD Press the LIST button to display the list of Press one of the buttons to select a track The version of software in the audio system may system must comply with the standard directories of the MP3 compilation. on the CD. not be compatible with the generation of your Apple® player. * Depending on availability and the type of device used.

184 Bluetooth® audio system

Press and hold one of these buttons for Information and advice In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the fast forward or rewind. Joliet standard is recommended. 10 The CD player can play files with “.mp3”, “.wma”, To protect the system, do not use a USB hub. Bluetooth® audio streaming “.wav” and “.aac” file extensions, with a bit rate of 32 to 320 Kbps. Use only USB memory sticks formatted Streaming allows music files on the telephone to It also supports TAG mode (ID3 tag, WMA TAG). FAT 32 (File Allocation Table). be played via the vehicle's loudspeakers. No other file types (“.mp”4, etc.) can be read. Connect the telephone. Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma 9 It is recommended that you use genuine (Refer to the "Pairing a Bluetooth® telephone" standard. Apple® USB cables for correct operation. section). The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, 44 and Activate the streaming source by pressing 48 kHz. SOURCE. Via the USB port, the system can play audio files In certain cases, play of the audio files must be with the extension ".mp3”, “.wma”, “.wav”, “.cbr”, Telephone initiated from the keypad. “.vbr" with a bit rate of 32 to 320 Kbps. ® Audio files can be selected using the buttons on No other file types (“.mp4”, etc.) can be read. Pairing a Bluetooth the audio system control panel and the steering Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma 9 telephone mounted controls. The contextual information standard. can be displayed in the screen. The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, 44 and As a safety measure and because they If the telephone supports the function. The audio 48 kHz. require prolonged attention on the part of quality depends on the quality of transmission by File names should have fewer than 20 the driver, the operations for pairing of the the telephone. characters, avoiding special characters (e.g. Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth ® « ? ; ù) so as to avoid any reading or display hands-free system of your audio system must Connecting Apple players problems. be carried out with the vehicle stationary ® Connect the Apple player to the USB port using In order to be able to play a burned CDR or and the ignition on. a suitable cable (not supplied). CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2, or Play starts automatically. Joliet, if possible, when burning the CD. Activate the telephone's Bluetooth Control is via the audio system. If the disc is burned in another format, it may not function and ensure that it is "visible to The classifications available are those of the be played correctly. all" (telephone configuration). portable device connected (artists / albums / It is recommended that the same burning genres / playlists). standard be always used on an individual disc, The version of software in the audio system may with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum) for not be compatible with the generation of your the best acoustic quality. Apple® player.

185 Bluetooth® audio system

The services available depend on the from the system), ensure that the code is the Press OK to confirm. connect / disconnect the telephone (hands-free network, the SIM card and the same in the system and in the telephone. kit and streaming). compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Select "Bluetooth Connections – "Delete connection": to delete the pairing. Check the instructions for your telephone and If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not management" and confirm. The list of When you delete a pairing in the system, with your service provider for the services to restricted. paired telephones is displayed. remember to delete it from your which you have access. A message appears in the screen confirming the Press OK to confirm. pairing. telephone as well. Indicates that a device is connected. Procedure from the telephone Information and advice Press OK to confirm. Select the name of the system in the list The "Telephone" menu gives access to the of devices detected. following functions in particular: "Directory", if A number indicates the profile of the Receiving a call your telephone equipment is fully compatible, connection with the system: An incoming call is announced by a ring and a Procedure from the system "Call log", "View paired devices". – 1 for media or 1 for telephone. superimposed display in the screen. Press the MENU button. Depending on the type of telephone, you may be – 2 for media and telephone. Select the " " tab in the screen using asked to accept or confirm access by the system YES Indicates connection of the audio the buttons. Select "Connections". to each of these functions. steaming profile. Confirm with OK. Go to the Brand's website for more Indicates connection of the hands-free Confirm with OK. information (compatibility, more help, telephone profile. Press this button at the steering mounted etc.). Select a telephone. controls to accept the call. Select "Search for a device". Press OK to confirm. Making a call Confirm with OK. Managing connections In the "Telephone" menu. Then select and confirm: A window is displayed with a search in progress The telephone connection automatically Select "Call". message. includes hands free operation and audio Select "Dial". – "Connect telephone" / "Disconnect In the list of devices detected, select a telephone streaming. Or telephone" : to connect / disconnect the to pair. Only one telephone can be paired at a The ability of the system to connect to just Select "Directory". telephone or the hands-free kit only. time. one profile depends on the telephone. Both Or profiles may connect by default. – "Connect media player" / "Disconnect Select "Calls list". Completing the pairing media player" : to connect / disconnect Confirm with OK. Press the MENU button. streaming only. To complete the pairing, whichever – "Connect telephone + media player" / procedure is used (from the telephone or Select "Connections". "Disconnect telephone + media player" : to

186 Bluetooth® audio system connect / disconnect the telephone (hands-free Press this button for more than two Confirm with OK. kit and streaming). seconds for access to your directory, then 10 – "Delete connection": to delete the pairing. navigate using the thumb wheel. Microphone off When you delete a pairing in the system, Ending a call (so that the caller cannot hear) remember to delete it from your In the " " menu. In the contextual menu: telephone as well. Telephone Select "End call". Press OK to confirm. Confirm withOK to end the call. – select "Micro OFF" to switch off the During a call, press one of these buttons microphone. for more than two seconds. – deselect "Micro OFF" to switch the microphone on. Receiving a call The system accesses the telephone's Confirm with OK. An incoming call is announced by a ring and a contacts directory, depending on its superimposed display in the screen. compatibility, and while it is connected via Select the "YES" tab in the screen using Bluetooth. Telephone mode the buttons. Confirm with OK. In the contextual menu: With certain telephones connected by Bluetooth you can send a contact to the Press this button at the steering mounted – select "Telephone mode" to transfer the directory of the audio system. controls to accept the call. call to the telephone (for example, to leave the Contacts imported in this way are saved in a vehicle while continuing a conversation). Making a call permanent directory visible to all, whatever – deselect "Telephone mode" to transfer the the telephone connected. call to the vehicle. In the "Telephone" menu. The menu for the directory is not accessible if Confirm with Select " ". OK. Call it is empty. Select "Dial". If the contact has been cut off, when you Or reconnect on returning to the vehicle, Select "Directory". Managing calls the Bluetooth connection will be restored Or During a call, press to display the OK automatically and sound returned to the Select "Calls list". contextual menu. system (depending on the compatibility of the Confirm with OK. End call telephone). In some cases, the Telephone mode must be In the contextual menu, select " " Hang up activated from the telephone. to end the call.

187 Bluetooth® audio system

Interactive voice response compatibility, and while it is connected via With the engine off, the audio system From the contextual menu, select "DTMF Bluetooth. switches off after a few minutes of use. tones" and confirm to use the digital With certain telephones connected by When the engine is switched off, the audio keypad to navigate in the interactive voice Bluetooth you can send a contact to the system operating time depends on the state of response menu. directory of the audio system. charge of the battery. Confirm with OK. Contacts imported in this way are saved in a The switch-off is normal: the audio system permanent directory visible to all, whatever the switches to economy mode and switches off to telephone connected. avoid discharging the vehicle's battery. Consultation call The menu for the directory is not accessible if it ► Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the From the contextual menu, select is empty. charge of the battery. "Switch" and validate to return to a call The message "the audio system is left on hold. Voice recognition overheated" is displayed onscreen. Confirm with OK. This function allows you to use your To protect the installation if the ambient smartphone's voice recognition via the system. temperature is too high, the audio system To start voice recognition, depending on the type switches to an automatic thermal protection Directory of steering mounted controls: mode, in which the volume may be decreased or To access the directory, press and hold Make a long press on the end of the lighting the CD player stopped. SRC/TEL. control stalk. ► Switch the audio system off for a few minutes Select "Directory" to see the list of OR to allow the system to cool. contacts. Press this button. Confirm with OK. Radio There is a difference in sound quality Voice recognition requires the use of a between the different audio sources (radio, To modify the contacts saved in the compatible smartphone first connected to CD, etc.). system, press MENU then select the vehicle by Bluetooth. "Telephone" and confirm. For optimal listening quality, the audio settings Select "Directory management" and confirm. (Volume, Bass, Treble, Ambience and Loudness) You can: can be adjusted to different audio sources, – "Consult an entry", Frequently asked resulting in audible differences when switching – "Delete an entry", questions between sources (radio, CD, etc.). – " ". ► Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Delete all entries The following information groups together the The system accesses the telephone's Treble, Ambience and Loudness) are appropriate answers to the most frequently asked questions contacts directory, depending on its to the sources being listened to. We recommend concerning your audio system. setting the audio functions (Bass, Treble, Fr-Re

188 Bluetooth® audio system balance and Le-Ri balance) to the middle The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for ► Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot position, setting the musical ambience to "None", example when going through an automatic car be played if it is too badly damaged. 10 setting loudness correction to "Active" in CD wash or in an underground car park). ► Check the content in the case of a burned mode and "Inactive" in Radio mode. ► Have the aerial checked by a dealer. CD: read the recommendations in the "Audio" The preset stations do not function (no The sound intermittently cuts out for 1 or 2 section. sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed, etc.). seconds in radio mode. Due to poor quality, certain burned CDs will not The wrong waveband is selected. During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS be played by the audio system. ► Press the BAND button to return to the searches for another frequency giving better The CD audio quality is is poor. waveband (FM, FM2, DAB, AM) on which the reception of the station. The CD is scratched or of poor quality. stations are preset. ► Switch off the RDS function if the ► Insert good quality CDs and store them in Traffic announcement (TA) is shown but I phenomenon occurs too frequently and always suitable conditions. receive no traffic information. on the same route. The audio settings (bass, treble, ambience) are The radio station is not part of the regional traffic unsuitable. information network. Media ► Return bass and treble settings to 0, without ► Tune to a radio station that broadcasts traffic The Bluetooth connection is cut. selecting an ambience. information. The battery in the peripheral device may not be I am unable to play the music files on my The reception quality of the tuned radio sufficiently charged. smartphone via the USB port. station gradually deteriorates or the station ► Charge the battery in the peripheral device. Depending on the smartphone, access by the presets are inoperative (no sound, 87.5 MHz The message "USB device error" is displayed audio system to music on the smartphone may is displayed, etc.). in the screen. have to be approved on the latter. The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s The USB stick has not been recognised, or may ► Manually activate the MTP profile on the transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the be corrupted. smartphone (USB settings menu). geographical area. ► Reformat the USB memory stick. ► Activate the RDS function to allow the system The CD is systematically ejected or is not Telephone to check for a more powerful transmitter in the played. I am unable to access my voicemail. area. The CD is upside down, cannot be read, does Few telephones or service providers allow the The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, not contain audio files or contains audio files of a use of this function. basement car parks, etc.) may block reception, format not recognised by the audio system. ► Call your voicemail, via the telephone menu, including in RDS mode. The CD is protected by an anti-pirating system using the number provided by your operator. This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is not recognised by the audio system. I am unable to access my directory of not indicative of an audio system malfunction. ► Check that the CD is inserted in the player contacts. the right way up. ► Check the compatibility of your telephone.

189 Bluetooth® audio system

You did not grant access to your contacts when pairing the telephone. ► Accept or confirm access by the system to the contacts on your telephone. I am unable to continue a conversation when getting into my vehicle. Handset mode is activated. ► Deselect handset mode to transfer the call to the vehicle. I am unable to pair my telephone by Bluetooth. Telephones (models, versions of operating systems) have their own specificities in the pairing procedure and some telephones are not compatible. ► Before starting the pairing procedure, delete the telephone pairing from the system and the system pairing from the telephone, in order to view the compatibility of the telephones.

190 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

PEUGEOT Connect applications interrupt their display while the At all times it is possible to display the rolling vehicle is moving). menus by pressing the screen briefly with three 11 Radio – Changing the system settings and fingers. configuration. All of the touch areas of the screen are white. For pages with multiple tabs at the bottom of the The system is protected in such a way screen, it is possible to switch between pages that it will only operate in the vehicle. either by tapping the tab for the desired page, or The Energy Economy Mode message is by using a finger, sliding the pages to the left or displayed when the system is about to enter to the right. the corresponding mode. Press in the grey zone to go back up a level or to confirm. Press the back arrow to go back a level or The system’s Open Source Software confirm. (OSS) source codes are available at the following addresses: The touch screen is of the "capacitive" Multimedia audio system - https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/ type. Applications - Bluetooth® https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/ To clean the screen, use a soft, non-abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with no additional telephone product. The functions and settings described First steps Do not use sharp objects on the screen. Do not touch the screen with wet hands. vary according to the vehicle version and With the engine running, a press mutes configuration. the sound. Certain information is displayed permanently in With the ignition off, a press turns the system on. the upper bar of the touch screen: For safety reasons and because they Increase or decrease the volume using – Air conditioning status information (depending require sustained attention by the driver, the wheel or the "plus" or "minus" buttons on version), and direct access to the the following operations must be carried out (depending on the equipment). corresponding menu. with the vehicle stationary and the ignition Use the buttons on either side of or below the – Radio Media and Telephone menu status on: touch screen for access to the menus, then information. – Pairing the smartphone with the system in press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. – Privacy status information. Bluetooth mode. Depending on the model, use the "Source" or – Access to the touch screen and digital – Using the smartphone. "Menu" buttons on the left of the touch screen instrument panel settings. – Connection to the CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM for access to the menus, then press the virtual Audio source selection (depending on or Android Auto applications (certain buttons in the touch screen. equipment):

191 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

– FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on Steering mounted controls Steering mounted controls - Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing equipment). selected, access to presets. – Telephone connected via Bluetooth and Type 2 Radio: display the list of stations.

Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming). Steering mounted controls - Media: display the list of tracks. – USB Memory stick. Type 1 Radio (press and hold): update the list of – Media player connected via the auxiliary Voice commands: stations received.

socket (depending on equipment). This control is located on the steering

wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk Radio: (depending on equipment). Menus Select the previous/next preset radio Short press, smartphone voice commands via station. the system. Applications

Select the previous/next item in a menu or a list. Increase volume. Media: Select the previous/next track. Decrease volume. Select the previous/next item in a menu or a list. Mute by pressing the volume increase Radio: and decrease buttons simultaneously Short press: display the list of radio (depending on equipment).

stations. Restore the sound by pressing one of the two Long press: update the list. In the "Settings" menu, it is possible to volume buttons. Media: create a profile for an individual or for a (short press): change the Short press: display the list of folders. Media group of people with shared interests, and multimedia source.

Long press: display the available sorting options. configure a wide range of settings (radio Telephone (short press): start telephone Change audio source (radio; USB; AUX if Access configurable equipment. presets, audio settings, ambiences, etc.). call. equipment connected; CD; streaming). Settings are applied automatically. (short press): access Confirm a selection. Call in progress telephone menu. (long press): reject an incoming call, In very hot conditions, the volume may Increase volume. Telephone be limited to protect the system. It may end call; when no call is in progress, access telephone menu. enter standby mode (with the screen and Decrease volume. sound off) for 5 minutes or more. Radio (rotate): automatic search for the previous/next station. The system will resume normal operation Mute/restore sound by simultaneously (rotate): previous/next track, move in a when the temperature in the passenger pressing the increase and decrease Media list. compartment has dropped. volume buttons.

192 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing Radio Media Settings selected, access to presets. 11 Radio: display the list of stations. Media: display the list of tracks. Radio (press and hold): update the list of stations received. Menus Applications

Select an audio source or radio station. Configure a personal profile and/or configure the sound (balance, ambience, etc.) and the display (language, units, date, time, Telephone etc.).

Driving

Access configurable equipment.

Connect a mobile phone via Bluetooth®.

Run certain applications on a smartphone connected via MirrorLinkTM, CarPlay® or Android Activate, deactivate or configure certain Auto. vehicle functions.

193 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Navigation Applications Press this button to search and select a Enter the FM and AM waveband values recipient. using the virtual keypad. Viewing photos Select the "Quick messages” tab. Press "OK" to confirm. Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port. Press this button to select the display Radio reception may be affected by the settings for messages. To protect the system, do not use a USB use of electrical equipment not approved Press this button to write a new message. hub. by the Brand, such as a USB charger connected to the 12 V socket. The system can read folders and image files in Press the bin alongside the selected The exterior environment (hills, buildings, the formats: .tiff; .gif; .jpg/jpeg; .bmp and .png. message to delete it. tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may Press Applications to display the main Press this button alongside the selected

block reception, including in RDS mode. page. message to display the secondary page. This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the Configure the navigation and select your Press "Photos". Press this button to edit and modify the TM ® context of radio wave transmission, and destination via MirrorLink , CarPlay or existing text. in no way indicative of an audio system Android Auto. Select a folder. Press this button to write a new message. malfunction.

Air conditioning Select an image to view. Press the bin to delete the message.

Changing the waveband Press this button to display the details of Press Radio Media to display the main the photo. Radio page. Press the back arrow to go back a level. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the 18,5 21,5 secondary page. Selecting a station Press "Band" to change waveband. Managing messages Press Radio Media to display the main Press Applications to display the main page. Press in the shaded area to confirm. page. Press one of the buttons to perform an automatic search for radio stations. Press "SMS". Manage various temperature and air flow Or Presetting a station Move the slider to manually search for settings. Select the "SMS” tab. Select a radio station or frequency. frequencies up or down. Make a short press on the star outline. If Or Press this button to select the display the star is solid, the radio station is Press the frequency. settings for messages. already preset.

194 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Enter the FM and AM waveband values Or Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the using the virtual keypad. Select a radio station or frequency. secondary page. 11 Press "OK" to confirm. Press "Preset". Activate/deactivate "News". Make a long press on one of the buttons to preset the station. Press in the shaded area to confirm. Radio reception may be affected by the use of electrical equipment not approved Activating/Deactivating RDS by the Brand, such as a USB charger RDS, if activated, allows you to continue Playing TA messages connected to the 12 V socket. listening to the same station by automatically The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives The exterior environment (hills, buildings, retuning to alternative frequencies. priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may Press to display the main function needs good reception of a radio station block reception, including in RDS mode. Radio Media page. that transmits this type of message. While traffic This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the Press the " " button to access the information is being broadcast, the current context of radio wave transmission, and OPTIONS secondary page. media is automatically interrupted so that the in no way indicative of an audio system Activate/deactivate " ". TA message can be heard. Normal play of the malfunction. RDS previously playing media resumes at the end of Press in the shaded area to confirm. the message. Changing the waveband Press Radio Media to display the main page. Press Radio Media to display the main RDS station tracking may not be Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the page. available nationwide, as many radio secondary page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the stations do not cover 100 % of the country. Activate/deactivate "TA". secondary page. This explains the loss of reception of the Press "Band" to change waveband. station during a journey. Press in the shaded area to confirm. Press in the shaded area to confirm. Displaying text information The "Radio Text" function displays information Audio settings Presetting a station transmitted by the radio station relating to the Press Radio Media to display the main Select a radio station or frequency. station or the currently playing song. page. Make a short press on the star outline. If Press Radio Media to display the main Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the the star is solid, the radio station is page. secondary page. already preset. Press "Audio settings".

195 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Select the "Tone", "Balance", "Sound", DAB (Digital Audio Press in the shaded area to confirm. Playlists are updated whenever the ignition "Voice" or "Ringtones" tab to configure is switched off or a USB memory stick is the sound settings. Broadcasting) radio connected. The audio system memorises these If "FM-DAB Follow-up" is activated, there Press the back arrow to confirm. lists, which will subsequently load faster if they may be a time offset of a few seconds have not been changed. Terrestrial Digital Radio when the system switches to "FM" analogue In the "Tone" tab, the Ambience, Bass, Digital radio provides higher quality sound. radio, and in some cases a change in volume. Auxiliary (AUX) jack socket Medium and Treble sound settings are The various "multiplexes/ensembles" offer a When the digital signal quality is restored, the Depending on equipment different and independent for each audio choice of radio stations organised in alphabetical system automatically changes back to "DAB". Connect a portable device (MP3 player, source. order. Press to display the main etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an In the "Balance” tab, the All passengers, Radio Media If the "DAB" station being listened to is page. audio cable (not supplied). Driver and Front only settings are common not available on "FM", or if "FM-DAB Press the " " button to access the This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" to all sources. OPTIONS Follow-up" is not activated, the sound will cut secondary page. has been selected in the audio settings. In the "Sound” tab, activate or deactivate out while the digital signal is too weak. First adjust the volume on the portable device "Volume linked to speed", "Auxiliary input" Press "Band" to select "DAB band". (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the and "Touch tones". Press in the shaded area to confirm. audio system. Media Controls are managed via the portable device. The balance/distribution (or spatialisation with the Arkamys© system) uses audio Selecting the source processing to adjust the sound quality FM-DAB Follow-up USB port Press Radio Media to display the main according to the number of passengers in the "DAB" does not cover 100 % of the country. Insert the USB memory stick into the USB page. vehicle. When the digital radio signal is poor, the port or connect the USB device to the "FM-DAB Follow-up" enables you to continue USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). Press the "SOURCES" button. listening to the same station by automatically Select the source. Onboard audio: Arkamys Sound Staging© To protect the system, do not use a USB switching to the corresponding "FM" analogue optimises the sound distribution inside hub. ® station (if there is one). BluetoothStreaming the passenger compartment. Press Radio Media to display the main The system builds playlists (in temporary Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed page. memory); this operation can take from a from your smartphone. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the few seconds to several minutes at the first The Bluetooth profile must be activated. secondary page. connection. First adjust the volume on the portable device Activate/deactivate "FM-DAB Follow-up". Reduce the number of non-music files and the (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the number of folders to reduce the waiting time. system.

196 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Playlists are updated whenever the ignition If play does not start automatically, it may be Information and advice is switched off or a USB memory stick is necessary to start the audio playback from the 11 The system supports USB mass storage connected. The audio system memorises these smartphone. devices, BlackBerry® devices or Apple® players lists, which will subsequently load faster if they Control is from the portable device or by using via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not have not been changed. the system's touch buttons. supplied. Auxiliary (AUX) jack socket Once connected in Streaming mode, the Devices are managed using the audio system smartphone is considered to be a media controls. Depending on equipment source. Other devices, not recognised on connection, Connect a portable device (MP3 player, must be connected to the auxiliary socket using etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an ® a jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth audio cable (not supplied). Connecting Apple players streaming, if compatible. This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" Connect the Apple® player to the USB socket To protect the system, do not use a USB has been selected in the audio settings. using a suitable cable (not supplied). hub. First adjust the volume on the portable device Play starts automatically. (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the Control is via the audio system. The audio system will only play audio files with audio system. ".wav", ".wma", ".aac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" file Controls are managed via the portable device. The classifications available are those of the portable device connected (artists/ extensions, at bit rates between 32 Kbps and Selecting the source albums/genres/playlists/audio books/ 320 Kbps. podcasts). It is also possible to use a It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. Press Radio Media to display the main classification structured in the form of a No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read. page. library. All ".wma" files must be standard WMA 9 files. Press the "SOURCES" button. The default classification used is by artist. To The supported sampling rates are 11, 22, 44 and Select the source. modify the classification used, return to the 48 KHz. BluetoothStreaming® first level of the menu then select the desired To avoid reading and display problems, we classification (playlists for example) and recommend choosing file names less than 20 Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed confirm to go down through the menu to the characters long that do not contain any special from your smartphone. desired track. characters (e.g. “ ? . ; ù). The Bluetooth profile must be activated. Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format First adjust the volume on the portable device The version of software in the audio system may (File Allocation Table). (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the not be compatible with the generation of the We recommend using the original USB system. Apple® player. cable for the portable device.

197 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Telephone MirrorLinkTM smartphone Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® application in the system. interface. USB sockets connection Once the connection is established, a page is On connecting the USB cable, the TM displayed, showing the applications already Depending on equipment, for more information The "MirrorLink " function requires a CarPlay® function deactivates the downloaded to the smartphone that are on the USB sockets compatible with the compatible smartphone and applications. ® TM system's Bluetooth mode. CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto compatible with MirrorLink technology. applications, refer to the "Ease of use and Access to the different audio sources remains TM When the USB cable is disconnected comfort" section. Telephone not connected by available in the margin of the MirrorLink Bluetooth® display, using the touch buttons located in the and the ignition is switched off then back on, the system will not automatically switch to The synchronisation of a smartphone When connecting a smartphone to the upper bar. Radio Media mode; the source must be allows users to display applications system, we recommend enabling Access to the menus for the system is possible ® TM changed manually. adapted to the CarPlay , MirrorLink or Bluetooth® on the smartphone. at any time using the dedicated buttons. Android Auto technology of the smartphone Connect a USB cable. The smartphone ® ® There may be a pause before The CarPlay navigation can be accessed on the vehicle screen. For the CarPlay charges when connected by a USB cable. ® applications become available, at any time by pressing the system's technology, the CarPlay function must be From the system, press " " to Telephone depending on the quality of the network. Navigation button. activated on the smartphone beforehand. display the main page. For the communication process between TM Press "MirrorLink " to start the Android Auto smartphone the smartphone and the system to work, it is application in the system. CarPlay® smartphone essential in all cases that the smartphone is Depending on the smartphone, it may be connection unlocked. TM connection necessary to activate the "MirrorLink " On the smartphone, download the Connect a USB cable. The smartphone As the principles and standards are function. Android Auto application. charges when connected by a USB cable. constantly changing, it is recommended During the procedure, several screen From the system, press to The "Android Auto" function requires the that you keep the smartphone's operating pages relating to certain features are Telephone display the CarPlay® interface. use of a compatible smartphone and system up-to-date, as well as the date and displayed. Or applications. time of the smartphone and of the system. Accept to start and complete the connection. For the list of eligible smartphones, go to the If the smartphone has already connected Brand's national website. Telephone connected by Bluetooth® by Bluetooth®. Telephone not connected by Connect a USB cable. The smartphone ® Connect a USB cable. The smartphone Bluetooth charges when connected by a USB cable. charges when connected by a USB cable. Connect a USB cable. The smartphone From the system, press "Telephone" to From the system, press "Telephone" to charges when connected by a USB cable. display the main page. display the main page. From the system, press "Telephone" to Press the "PHONE" button to access the Press the "PHONE" button to display the display the main page. secondary page. secondary page.

198 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® Press "Android Auto" to start the Pairing a Bluetooth® interface. application in the system. 11 Depending on the smartphone, it may be telephone On connecting the USB cable, the necessary to activate the "Android Auto" CarPlay® function deactivates the The services available depend on the function. system's Bluetooth® mode. network, the SIM card and the During the procedure, several screen compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. pages relating to certain features are Consult the telephone user guide and the When the USB cable is disconnected displayed. service provider to check which services are and the ignition is switched off then back Accept to start and complete the connection. available. on, the system will not automatically switch to When connecting a smartphone to the Radio Media mode; the source must be system, we recommend enabling The Bluetooth function must be activated changed manually. Bluetooth® on the smartphone. and the telephone configured as "Visible ® The CarPlay navigation can be accessed Telephone connected by Bluetooth® to all” (in the telphone settings). at any time by pressing the system's From the system, press "Telephone" to Navigation button. To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is display the main page. used (from the telephone or from the system), Android Auto smartphone Press the "PHONE" button to display the ensure that the code is the same in the system secondary page. and in the telephone. connection Press "Android Auto" to start the On the smartphone, download the application in the system. If the pairing procedure fails, we Android Auto application. Access to the different audio sources remains recommend deactivating and then available in the margin of the Android Auto reactivating the Bluetooth function on the The "Android Auto" function requires the display, using the touch buttons located in the telephone. use of a compatible smartphone and upper bar. applications. Access to the menus for the system is possible Procedure from the telephone at any time using the dedicated buttons. Select the name of the system in the list Telephone not connected by There may be a pause before of detected devices. Bluetooth® applications become available, In the system, accept the connection request Connect a USB cable. The smartphone depending on the quality of the network. from the telephone. charges when connected by a USB cable. From the system, press "Telephone" to display the main page.

199 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Procedure from the system Visit the Brand's website for more information Press on the name of the telephone Calling a new number Press Telephone to display the main (compatibility, additional help, etc.). selected in the list to disconnect it. Press Telephone to display the main page. Press again to connect it. page. Press "Bluetooth search". Automatic reconnection Enter the phone number using the digital The list of detected telephones is On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone Deleting a telephone keypad. displayed. connected is present again, it is automatically Press the basket at the top right of the Press "Call" to start the call. Select the name of the chosen telephone recognised and within about 30 seconds screen to display a basket alongside the in the list. after switching on the ignition, the pairing is telephone chosen. established automatically (Bluetooth activated). Press the basket alongside the telephone Calling a contact Connection sharing To modify the connection profile: chosen to delete it. Press Telephone to display the main The system offers to connect the telephone with Press Telephone to display the main page. 3 profiles: page. Receiving a call Or press and hold – "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), Press the "PHONE" button to access the An incoming call is announced by a ring and a – “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of secondary page. superimposed display in the screen. the steering mounted PHONE button. audio files on the telephone), Press "Bluetooth connection" to Make a short press on the steering – "Mobile internet data". display the list of paired devices. mounted PHONE button to accept an Press "Contacts". Select one or more profiles. Press the "Details" button for a paired incoming call. Select the desired contact from the displayed list. device. And Press "Call". Press "OK" to confirm. Select one or more profiles. Make a long press

Depending on the type of telephone, you may by Press "OK" to confirm. on the steering mounted PHONE button Calling a recently used prompted to accept the transfer of contacts and to reject the call. number messages. Or Managing paired telephones Press "End call". Press Telephone to display the main The ability of the system to connect just This function lets you connect or disconnect a page. one profile depends on the telephone. device or delete a pairing. Or All three profiles may connect by default. Press Telephone to display the main Making a call Press and hold page. The profiles compatible with the system Press the "PHONE" button to access the Using the telephone is not recommended the steering mounted button. are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, secondary page. while driving. MAP and PAN. Press "Bluetooth connection" to Parking the vehicle. Press "Recent calls". display the list of paired devices. Make the call using the steering mounted Select the desired contact from the displayed list. controls.

200 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Calling a new number It is always possible to make a call Press the back arrow again to confirm. directly from the telephone; as a safety 11 Press Telephone to display the main page. measure, first park the vehicle. Press this button to reset the selected Enter the phone number using the digital profile. keypad. Setting the ringtone Press "Call" to start the call. Adjusting the brightness Press Telephone to display the main Press Settings to display the main page. page. Calling a contact Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Press Brightness. secondary page. Press Telephone to display the main Press "Ring volume" to display the page. Move the slider to adjust the brightness of volume bar. Or press and hold the screen and/or the instrument panel Press the arrows or move the slider to set (depending on version). the ring volume. the steering mounted PHONE button. Press in the shaded area to confirm.

Press "Contacts". Settings Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Modifying system settings Press "Call". Configuring profiles Press Settings to display the main page. Press Settings to display the main page. Press "Configuration" to access the Calling a recently used secondary page. Press "Profiles". number Press "System configuration". Press Telephone to display the main Select "Profile 1", "Profile ",2 "Profile 3” or Press the "Units" tab to change the units of page. " ". Common profile distance, fuel consumption and temperature. Or Press this button to enter a name for the Press the "Factory settings" tab to restore the Press and hold profile using the virtual keypad. initial settings. Press "OK" to save. the steering mounted button. Returning the system to factory settings Press the back arrow to confirm. activates the English language by default Press "Recent calls". (depending on version). Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Press this button to activate the profile.

201 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Press the "System info" tab to display the Press the back arrow to confirm. Press the back arrow to save the settings. Frequently asked versions of the various modules installed in the system. questions The system may not automatically Press the "Privacy" tab, Selecting the language manage the change between winter and The following information groups together the or Press to display the main page. Settings summer time (depending on the country of answers to the most frequently asked questions Press Settings to display the main page. sale). concerning the system. Press "Configuration" to access the Press "Privacy" to activate or deactivate secondary page. Radio the private data mode. Select "Language" to change the Setting the date The reception quality of the tuned radio Activate or deactivate: language. Press Settings to display the main page. station gradually deteriorates or the station Press the back arrow to confirm. presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz – "No sharing (data, vehicle position)". Press "Configuration" to access the is displayed, etc.). – "Only data sharing” secondary page. The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s – "Data and vehicle position sharing" Setting the time Press "Date and time". transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the Press the back arrow to confirm. Press Settings to display the main page. geographical area. Select "Date". ► Activate the "RDS" function in the upper bar Press Settings to display the main page. Press "Configuration" to access the Press this button to set the date. to enable the system to check whether there is secondary page. a more powerful transmitter in the geographical Press "Configuration" to access the Press "Date and time". Press the back arrow to save the date. area. secondary page. The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, Press "Screen configuration". Select "Time". Select the display format for the date. basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception, Press this button to set the time using the including in RDS mode. Press "Brightness". virtual keypad. Press the back arrow again to confirm. This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is Move the slider to adjust the brightness of Press "OK" to save the time. not indicative of an audio system malfunction. the screen and/or the instrument panel The aerial is missing or has been damaged Time and date setting is only available if (depending on version). Press this button to set the time zone. (for example while entering a car wash or "GPS Synchronisation:" is deactivated. Press the back arrow to confirm. underground car park). Select the display format for the time ► Have the aerial checked by a dealer. Press "Animation". (12h/24h). I cannot find some radio stations in the list of Activate or deactivate: “Automatic Activate or deactivate summer time (+1 received stations. scrolling”. hour). The name of the radio station changes. Select "Animated transitions". Activate or deactivate GPS The station is no longer received or its name has synchronisation (UTC). changed in the list.

202 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Frequently asked ► Press the round arrow on the "List" tab on the The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer "Radio" page. of this information. 11 questions Some radio stations send other information The following information groups together the in place of their name (the title of the song for Telephone answers to the most frequently asked questions example). I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. concerning the system. The system interprets these details as the station The telephone's Bluetooth function may be name. switched off or the telephone may not be visible. Radio ► Press the round arrow on the "List" tab on the ► Check that the telephone has Bluetooth The reception quality of the tuned radio "Radio" page. switched on. station gradually deteriorates or the station ► Check in the telephone settings that it is presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz Media "visible to all". is displayed, etc.). Playback of my USB memory stick starts only The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). the system. transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the Some files supplied with the memory stick may ► Check the compatibility of the telephone on geographical area. greatly slow down access to reading the memory the Brand's website (services). ► Activate the "RDS" function in the upper bar stick (multiplication by 10 of the cataloguing Android Auto and CarPlay do not work. to enable the system to check whether there is time). Android Auto and CarPlay may not activate if the a more powerful transmitter in the geographical ► Delete the files supplied with the memory USB cables are of poor quality. area. stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the ► Use genuine USB cables to ensure The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, file structure on the memory stick. compatibility. basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception, Some characters in information about the The volume of the telephone connected in including in RDS mode. currently playing media are not displayed Bluetooth mode is inaudible. This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is correctly. The volume depends on both the system and the not indicative of an audio system malfunction. The audio system is unable to process certain telephone. The aerial is missing or has been damaged types of character. ► Increase the volume of the audio system, to (for example while entering a car wash or ► Use standard characters to name tracks and maximum if required, and increase the volume of underground car park). folders. the telephone if necessary. ► Have the aerial checked by a dealer. Playback of streaming files does not start. Ambient noise affects the quality of the I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The connected device does not automatically telephone call. received stations. launch playback. ► Reduce ambient noise (close windows, The name of the radio station changes. ► Start playback from the device. reduce ventilation, slow down, etc.). The station is no longer received or its name has Track names and playing times are not The contacts are not listed in alphabetical changed in the list. displayed on the audio streaming screen. order.

203 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Some telephones offer display options. When the engine is off, the system switches Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can off after several minutes of use. be transferred in a specific order. When the engine is switched off, the system's ► Modify the telephone directory display operating time depends on the state of charge of settings. the battery. The switch-off is normal: the system Settings automatically goes into energy economy mode When the treble and bass settings are and switches off to maintain an adequate charge changed, the ambience is deselected. in the battery. When the ambience is changed, the treble ► Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the and bass settings are reset. charge of the battery. Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and bass settings, and vice versa. ► Modify the treble and bass or ambience settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. When the balance settings are changed, the distribution is deselected. When the distribution setting is changed, the balance settings are deselected. Selecting a distribution setting imposes the balance settings, and vice versa. ► Modify the balance setting or the distribution setting to obtain the desired sound quality. There is a difference in sound quality between audio sources. To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound settings can be tailored to different audio sources, which can generate audible differences when changing source. ► Check that the sound settings are appropriate to the sources listened to. Adjust the sound functions to the middle position.

204 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

PEUGEOT Connect Nav applications interrupt their display while the Use the menu buttons on either side of or below

vehicle is moving). the touch screen for access to the menus, then 12 – Watching a video (the video stops when the press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. vehicle starts to move again). Depending on the model, use the "Source" or – Changing the system settings and "Menu" buttons to access the rolling menus, then configuration. press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. Display the rolling menus at any time by pressing The system is protected in such a way the screen briefly with three fingers. that it will only operate in the vehicle. All of the touch areas of the screen are white. The Energy Economy Mode message is Press the back arrow to go back a level. displayed when the system is about to enter Press "OK" to confirm.

the corresponding mode. The touch screen is of the "capacitive" GPS navigation - type. System and map updates can be To clean the screen, use a soft, non-abrasive Applications - Multimedia downloaded from the Brand’s website. cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with no additional audio system - Bluetooth® The update procedure is also available on the product. website. Do not use sharp objects on the screen. telephone Do not touch the screen with wet hands. The functions and settings described The system’s Open Source Software Certain information is displayed permanently vary according to the vehicle version and (OSS) source codes are available at the in the side bars or in the upper bar of the touch configuration. following addresses: screen (depending on equipment): https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/ – Air conditioning status information (depending https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/ For safety reasons and because they on version), and direct access to the require sustained attention by the driver, corresponding menu. the following operations must be carried out – Go directly to the audio source selection with the vehicle stationary and the ignition First steps option, to view the list of radio stations (or list of on: With the engine running, a press mutes titles depending on the source). – Pairing the smartphone with the system in the sound. – Go to the "Notifications" of messages, emails, Bluetooth mode. With the ignition off, a press turns the system on. map updates and, depending on the services, – Using the smartphone. Increase or decrease the volume using the navigation notifications. ® TM – Connection to the CarPlay , MirrorLink the wheel or the "plus" or "minus" buttons – Go to the settings for the touch screen and the or Android Auto applications (certain (depending on the equipment). digital instrument panel.

205 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Audio source selection (depending on enter standby mode (with the screen and Telephone (long press): reject an incoming call, Applications equipment): sound off) for 5 minutes or more. end call; when no call is in progress, access – FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on The system will resume normal operation telephone menu. equipment). when the temperature in the passenger Radio (rotate): automatic search for the – Telephone connected via Bluetooth and compartment has dropped. previous / next station. Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming). Media (rotate): previous / next track, move in a – USB memory stick. list. – Media player connected via the auxiliary Steering mounted controls Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing socket (depending on equipment). selected, access to presets. Voice control: – Video (depending on equipment). Radio: display the list of stations. This control is located on the steering Media: display the list of tracks.

wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk Radio (press and hold): update the list of (depending on equipment). stations received. Run certain applications on a smartphone Short press, system voice control. connected via CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM Long press, voice control for smartphone or (available in some countries) or Android Auto. CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM (availability depending on Menus Check the status of Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi country), Android Auto via the system. connections. Increase volume. Connected navigation Radio Media Decrease volume. Mute by pressing the volume increase In the "Settings" menu, it is possible to and decrease buttons simultaneously FM 87.5 MHz create a profile for an individual or for a (depending on equipment). group of people with shared interests, and Restore the sound by pressing one of the two configure a wide range of settings (radio volume buttons. presets, audio settings, navigation history, Media (short press): change the favourite contacts, etc.). Settings are applied multimedia source. automatically. Telephone (short press): start telephone call.

Call in progress (short press): access Enter navigation settings and choose a In very hot conditions, the volume may Select an audio source or radio station, or telephone menu. destination. be limited to protect the system. It may Use real-time services, depending on equipment. display photographs.

206 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Applications Telephone Vehicle 12

Run certain applications on a smartphone Connect a telephone via Bluetooth®, read Activate, deactivate or configure certain connected via CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM messages and emails and send quick vehicle functions. (available in some countries) or Android Auto. messages. Check the status of Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi Air conditioning connections. Settings

Radio Media

18,5 21,5 FM 87.5 MHz

Manage various temperature and air flow Configure a personal profile and/or settings.

configure the sound (balance, ambience, Select an audio source or radio station, or etc.) and the display (language, units, date, time, display photographs. etc.).

207 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Voice commands Example of a "voice command" for the radio and step. There's more information available in media: "novice" mode. You can set the dialogue mode to "Play artist Madonna" "expert" when you feel comfortable. Steering wheel-mounted Example of a "voice command" for the controls telephone: Global voice commands Voice commands: "Call David Miller" Voice commands Voice commands can be issued from any The voice commands, with a choice of 17 screen page after a short press on the "Voice languages (Arabic, Brazilian, Czech, Set dialogue mode as novice - expert commands" button located on the steering Select user 1 / Select profile John Danish, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, Increase temperature wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk German, Italian, Norwegian, Polish, A number of commands are available when a Decrease temperature (depending on equipment), as long as there is no Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, menu is selected.

telephone call in progress. Turkish), are made using the language Help messages To ensure that voice commands are previously chosen and set in the system. There are lots of topics I can help you with. always recognised by the system, please For some voice commands, there are You can say: "help with phone", "help with follow these recommendations: alternative synonyms. navigation", "help with media" or "help with – Example: Guide to / Navigate to / Go to / ... use natural language in a normal tone radio". For an overview on how to use voice The voice commands in Arabic for: "Navigate without breaking up words or raising your controls, you can say "help with voice controls". to address" and "Display POI in the city", are voice. Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no" – always wait for the "beep" (audible signal) not available. and we'll start that again. before speaking.

– for best results, closing the windows and Information - Using the "Navigation" voice sunroof is recommended, to avoid extraneous Press the Push To Talk button and tell me interference (depending on version). system what you'd like after the tone. Remember commands – before issuing a voice command, ask any When voice commands are activated, by you can interrupt me at any time by pressing this Voice commands other passengers to refrain from speaking. briefly pressing the button, help is button. If you press it again while I'm waiting for displayed on the touch screen, offering various you to speak, it'll end the conversation. If you Navigate home menus and enabling voice-based interaction with need to start over, say "cancel". If you want to Navigate to work First steps the system. undo something, say "undo". And to get Navigate to preferred address, Tennis club

Example of a "voice command" for information and tips at any time, just say "help". Navigate to contact, John Miller navigation: If you ask to me do something and there's some Navigate to address 11 regent street, London "Navigate to address 11 regent street, information missing that I need, I'll give you Help messages London" some examples or take you through it step by

208 PEUGEOT Connect Nav step. There's more information available in To plan a route, say "navigate to" followed by the distance" or "arrival time". To learn more "novice" mode. You can set the dialogue mode to address, the contact name or an intersection. For commands, try saying "help with navigation". 12 "expert" when you feel comfortable. example, "navigate to address 11 Regent Street, Voice commands London", "navigate to contact, John Miller", Global voice commands or "navigate to intersection of Regent Street, Show POI ''hotel'' at the destination Voice commands London". You can specify if it's a preferred Show nearby POI petrol station address, or a Point of Interest. For example, say Navigate to POI Heathrow Airport in London Set dialogue mode as novice - expert "navigate to preferred address, Tennis club", or Navigate to POI petrol station along the route Select user 1 / Select profile John "navigate to POI Heathrow Airport in London". Help messages Increase temperature Or, you can just say, "navigate home". To see Decrease temperature Points of Interest on a map, you can say things To see points of interest on a map, you can Help messages like "show POI hotels in Banbury". For more say things like "show hotels in Banbury", "show information say "help with points of interest" or nearby parking", "show hotel at the destination" There are lots of topics I can help you with. "help with route guidance". or "show petrol station along the route". If you You can say: "help with phone", "help with To choose a destination, say something like prefer to navigate directly to a point of interest, navigation", "help with media" or "help with "navigate to line three" or "select line two". If you you can say "navigate to nearby petrol station". radio". For an overview on how to use voice can't find the destination but the street's right, If you feel you are not being well understood, controls, you can say "help with voice controls". say for example "select the street in line three". try to say the word "POI" in front of the point Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no" To move around a displayed list, you can say of interest. For example say "navigate to POI and we'll start that again. "next page" or "previous page". You can undo restaurant at the destination". your last action and start over by saying "undo", To choose a POI, say something like "select "Navigation" voice or say "cancel" to cancel the current action. line 2". If you've searched for a Point of Interest commands Voice commands and don't see the one you're after, you can filter further by saying something like "select POI in Voice commands Tell me the remaining distance line 2", or "select the city in line 3". You can also Tell me the remaining time scroll through the list by saying "next page" or Navigate home Tell me the arrival time "previous page". Navigate to work Stop route guidance Navigate to preferred address, Tennis club Depending on the country, give Help messages Navigate to contact, John Miller destination (address) instructions in the language configured for the system. Navigate to address 11 regent street, London You can say "stop" or "resume route guidance".

Help messages To get information about your current route, you can say "tell me the remaining time", "remaining

209 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

"Radio Media" voice Voice commands Media voice commands are available David Miller, I'll be late". To display the list of only with a USB connection. calls, say "display calls". For more information on commands What's playing? SMS, you can say "help with texting". Voice commands Help messages To choose a contact, say something like "select "Telephone" voice line three". To move around the list say "next Turn on source radio - Streaming Bluetooth To choose what you'd like to play, start by saying commands page" or "previous page". You can undo your last - … "play" and then the item. For example, say "play action and start over by saying "undo", or say Help messages song Hey Jude", "play line 3" or "select line 2". If there is no telephone connected by "cancel" to cancel the current action. You can undo your last action and start over Bluetooth, a voice message announces: You can select an audio source by saying "turn by saying "undo", or say "cancel" to cancel the "Please first connect a telephone", and the "Text message" voice on source" followed by the device name. For current action. voice session is closed. commands example, "turn on source, Streaming Bluetooth", Voice commands Voice commands or "turn on source, radio". Use the command If there is no telephone connected by "play" to specify the type of music you'd like to Play song Hey Jude Bluetooth, a voice message announces: Call David Miller* hear. You can choose between "song", "artist", Play artist Madonna "Please first connect a telephone", and the Call voicemail* or "album". Just say something like "play artist, Play album Thriller voice session is closed. Display calls* Madonna", "play song, Hey Jude", or "play Help messages album, Thriller". Help messages The "Text messages" voice commands Voice commands I'm not sure what you'd like to play. Please say To make a phone call, say "call" followed by function allows you to dictate and send "play" and then a song title, an album title, or the contact name, for example: "Call David an SMS. Tune to channel BBC Radio 2 an artist name. For example, say "play song Miller". You can also include the phone type, for Dictate the text, taking care to pause briefly Tune to 98.5 FM Hey Jude", "play artist Madonna" or "play example: "Call David Miller at home". To make between each word. Tune to preset number five album Thriller". To select a line number from the a call by number, say "dial" followed by the When you have finished, the voice recognition Help messages display, say "select line two". To move around phone number, for example, "Dial 107776 835 system will automatically generate an SMS. a displayed list, you can say "next page" or 417". You can check your voicemail by saying You can pick a radio station by saying "tune to" "previous page". You can undo your last action Voice commands "call voicemail". To send a text, say "send quick and the station name or frequency. For example and start over by saying "undo", or say "cancel" message to", followed by the contact, and then "tune to channel Talksport" or "tune to 98.5 to cancel the current action. Send quick message to Bill Carter, I'll be late the name of the quick message you'd like to FM". To listen to a preset radio station, say for Help messages send. For example, "send quick message to example "tune to preset number five".

* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding * This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding download has been performed. download has been performed.

210 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

David Miller, I'll be late". To display the list of From the list of quick messages, say the name of Bill Carter, I'll be late". Check the phone menu calls, say "display calls". For more information on the one you'd like to send. To move around the for the names of the supported messages. 12 SMS, you can say "help with texting". list you can say "go to start", "go to end", "next The system only sends pre-recorded To choose a contact, say something like "select page" or "previous page". You can undo your last "Quick messages". line three". To move around the list say "next action and start over by saying "undo", or say page" or "previous page". You can undo your last "cancel" to cancel the current action. action and start over by saying "undo", or say Voice commands "cancel" to cancel the current action. Navigation Send SMS to John Miller, I'm just arriving "Text message" voice Send SMS to David Miller at the office, don't Choice of a destination commands wait for me Help messages To a new destination If there is no telephone connected by Intuitive method: Bluetooth, a voice message announces: Please say "call" or "send quick message to", Press Navigation to display the main "Please first connect a telephone", and the and then select a line from the list. To move page. voice session is closed. around a list shown on the display, you can Press "Search…". say "go to start", "go to end", "next page" or The "Text messages" voice commands "previous page". You can undo your last action Enter an address or key words for your function allows you to dictate and send and start over by saying "undo", or say "cancel" destination. an SMS. to cancel the current action. Press "OK" to select the "Guidance Dictate the text, taking care to pause briefly Voice commands criteria". between each word. Or When you have finished, the voice recognition Listen to most recent message* Guided method: system will automatically generate an SMS. Help messages Before you can use the navigation Voice commands To hear your last message, you can say "listen to feature, you must enter the "City", the most recent message". When you want to send "Street" (suggestions are displayed Send quick message to Bill Carter, I'll be late a text, there's a set of quick messages ready for automatically when you begin typing), and the Help messages you to use. Just use the quick message name "Number" on the virtual keypad, or select an and say something like "send quick message to

* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding download has been performed.

211 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

address from the "Contact" list or the address To a recent destination To a contact "History". Press Navigation to display the main Press Navigation to display the main page. page. If you do not confirm the house number, Press the "MENU" button to access the Press the "MENU" button to access the the navigation system will show one end secondary page. secondary page. of the street. Select "My destinations". Select "My destinations". Press the "MENU" button to access the Select the "Recent” tab. Select the "Contact” tab. secondary page. Select the address chosen in the list to display Select a contact in the list to start guided Select "Enter address". the "Guidance criteria”. navigation. Press "OK" to start guided navigation. Then To points of interest (POI) Select the Country Guided method: Select "Position" to see the point of Points of interest (POI) are listed in different Select the keyboard “language”. arrival on the map. categories. Press to display the main Change the keyboard "type" according to Navigation page. the selected "language": ABCDE; To "Home" or "My work" Press the " " button to access the AZERTY; QWERTY or QWERTZ. Press Navigation to display the main MENU secondary page. Enter the "City", the "Street" and the page. Select "Points of interest". "Number", and confirm by pressing on Press the "MENU" button to access the the displayed suggestions. secondary page. Select the "Travel", "leisure", Press "OK" to select the "Guidance Select "My destinations". "Commercial", "Public" or "Geographic” criteria". tab. And/or Select the "Preferred” tab. Or Select "See on map" to choose the Select "Home". Select "Search" to enter the name and "Guidance criteria". address of a POI. Press "OK" to start guided navigation. Or Select "My work". Press "OK" to calculate the route.

Zoom in/out using the touch buttons or Or Or with two fingers on the screen. Select a preset favourite destination. Intuitive method:

212 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

You can only select this method in order To a point on the map A marker is displayed in the middle of the to use the service if a network connection screen, with the "Latitude" and 12 Press Navigation to display the main is active; this may be either a "network " " coordinates. page. Longitude connection provided by the vehicle", if you Choose the type of coordinates: Explore the map by sliding a finger on the use the Peugeot Connect Packs solution, or DMS for: Degrees, Minutes, Seconds. screen. else a "network connection provided by the DD for: Degrees, Decimals. Select the destination by pressing on the map. user" via a smartphone, Press this button to start guided Tap the screen to place a marker and In both cases, the system is automatically navigation. display the sub-menu. connected to the Internet, if network coverage Or Press this button to start guided permits. Press this button to save the displayed navigation. address. Or Press Navigation to display the main OR Press this button to save the displayed page. Press this button to enter the " " address. Latitude Press the "MENU" button to access the value using the virtual keypad. secondary page. A long press on a point opens a list of And Select "Search". nearby POIs. Press this button to enter the "Longitude" value using the virtual keypad. Press on the mode shown in the bottom right of the screen (On-Board or Connected) to change To GPS coordinates TMC (Traffic Message "Database". Press Navigation to display the main Select the "Database" in "On-Board" page. Channel) mode (integrated into the map), or in Explore the map by sliding a finger on the Available in some countries. "Connected" mode (connected to the Internet). screen. TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages Press the back arrow to confirm. Touch the screen with a finger to go to the next are based on a European standard for traffic image. information broadcasting via the RDS system on Enter an address or key words for your Press this button to display the world FM radio, sending traffic information in real time. destination (POI). map. The TMC information is then displayed on a GPS Press "OK" to start the search. Using the grid, select the desired country or Navigation system map and taken into account region by zooming. straight away when routes are calculated, to Select the "On the route", "Around the Press this button to display or enter the avoid accidents, traffic jams and closed roads. vehicle" or "At destination" tab to refine GPS coordinates. Danger zone alerts may or may not be your search. displayed, depending on the applicable Select the desired address to calculate the route.

213 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

legislation and subscription to the update the smartphone operating system Select the "Secured", "Not secured" or Press "Private mode". corresponding service. as well as the date and time on the "Stored” tab. smartphone and system, to ensure that the Select a network. THEN communication process between the Activate or deactivate: Connected navigation smartphone and the system functions Using the virtual keypad, enter the Wi-Fi correctly. network "Key” and "Password". – "No sharing (data, vehicle position)". Press "OK" to establish a connection – “Only data sharing" Connected navigation USB connection between the smartphone and the – "Sharing data and vehicle position" connection Connect the USB cable. vehicle’s system. The smartphone charges when connected Depending on version, vehicle trim level and Settings specific to by the USB cable. Usage restrictions: subscription to online services and options. ® Bluetooth connection – With CarPlay , connection sharing is connected navigation Network connection provided by the Activate the Bluetooth function on the only available with a Wi-Fi connection. Press Navigation to display the main – With MirrorLinkTM, connection sharing is page. vehicle telephone and ensure that it is visible to all (see the "Connect-App" section). only available with a USB connection. Press the "MENU" button to access the If you use the Peugeot Connect Packs Wi-Fi connection The quality of services depends on the quality secondary page. solution, the system is automatically Select a Wi-Fi network detected by the of the network connection. Select "Settings". connected to the Internet and connected system and connect to it. services, and does not require the user to Select the "Map” tab. provide a connection via their smartphone. This function is only available if it has Authorize sending OR been activated either via the information Activate or deactivate: "Notifications" or via the "Applications" menu. – "Allow declaration of danger zones". Network connection provided by the Press Settings to display the main page. – "Guidance to final destination on foot". Press "Notifications". user These settings must be configured for each Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the

profile. Select Wi-Fi to activate it. secondary page. Select "System configuration". Press “OK” to confirm your selection. For the list of suitable smartphones, visit OR Select the "Alerts” tab. the Brand's national website. Press Connect-App to display the main Select the "Private mode” tab. page. Activate or deactivate: Activate and enter settings for sharing the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the OR smartphone connection. secondary page. Press "Notifications". – "Advise of car park nearby". Select "Wi-Fi network connection". As processes and standards are – "Filling station alert". constantly changing, we recommend you

214 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Press "Private mode". – “Risk areas alert" then press the warning icon Declaration: "Risk areas (triangle) to configure alerts. 12 THEN – "Give an audible warning". alert" Activate or deactivate: – "Advise proximity of POI 1". To send information about danger zones, – "Advise proximity of POI 2". select the option:Allow declaration of – "No sharing (data, vehicle position)". Press “OK” to confirm your selection. danger zones – “Only data sharing" – "Sharing data and vehicle position" Press Navigation to display the main The "Notifications", in the upper bar, can page. be accessed at any time. Settings specific to Press the "Declare a new danger zone" connected navigation button located in the side bars or the Danger zone alerts may or may not be upper bar of the touch screen (depending on Press Navigation to display the main displayed, depending on the applicable equipment). page. legislation and subscription to the Select the "Type” option to select the type Press the "MENU" button to access the corresponding service. of "Danger area". secondary page. Select the ""Speed" option and enter it Select "Settings". When "TOMTOM TRAFFIC” appears, the using the virtual keypad. services are available. Press "OK" to save and send the Select the "Map” tab. The services offered with connected information. navigation are as follows. Activate or deactivate: A Connected Services pack: Displaying fuel information – "Allow declaration of danger zones". – Weather, Press Navigation to display the main – "Guidance to final destination on foot". – Filling stations, page. These settings must be configured for each – Car park, Press this button to display the list of profile. – Traffic, services. Press “OK” to confirm your selection. – POI local search. Press "POI on map" to display the list A Danger area pack (optional). of points of interest. Select the "Alerts” tab. Press one of the buttons to search for " ". Activate or deactivate: Stations Activate/deactivate "Stations". – "Advise of car park nearby". Press this button to display a secondary – "Filling station alert". page.

215 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Select the "Settings” tab. Press this button to display the list of CarPlay® function must first be activated on Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® services. the smartphone. interface. Select the desired fuel. Select "View map". In all cases, the smartphone must be On connecting the USB cable, the unlocked, to enable the communication CarPlay® function deactivates the Press "OK" to save. Select "Weather". process between the smartphone and the system's Bluetooth® mode. system to function. Press this button to display basic As principles and standards are constantly Displaying charging station information. changing, we recommend keeping the When the USB cable is disconnected details Press this button to display detailed smartphone's operating system up-to- and the ignition is switched off then back weather information. date, together with the date and time on on, the system will not automatically switch to Press Navigation to display the main the smartphone and the system. Radio Media mode; the source must be page. The temperature displayed at 6 a.m. will changed manually. Press this button to display the list of be the maximum temperature for the day. services. The temperature displayed at 6 p.m. will be Connectivity TM Press "POI on map" to display the list the minimum temperature for the night. Press Applications to display the main MirrorLink smartphone of points of interest. page. connection Press one of the buttons to search for Press "Connectivity" to access the CarPlay®, The "MirrorLinkTM" function requires a "Stations". Applications MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto functions. Activate/deactivate "Stations". compatible smartphone and compatible USB ports CarPlay® smartphone applications. Press this button to display a secondary Depending on equipment, for more information You can check that your telephone is ® connection page. on the USB ports compatible with CarPlay , compatible on the Brand's website (services). TM Connect a USB cable. The smartphone Select the "Settings” tab. MirrorLink or Android Auto applications, refer When connecting a smartphone to the to the "Ease of use and comfort" section. charges when connected by a USB cable. system, we recommend enabling Select the desired connector type. Press "Telephone" to display the ® For the list of suitable smartphones, visit CarPlay® interface. Bluetooth on the smartphone. the Brand's national website. Connect a USB cable. The smartphone Press "OK" to save. Or Connect a USB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by a USB cable. Synchronising a smartphone enables charges when connected by a USB cable. From the system, press "Applications" to Displaying weather users to display applications that support From the system, press "Applications" to display the main page. the smartphone’s MirrorLinkCarPlay®, TM or display the main page. Press "Connectivity" to access the TM information Android Auto technology on the vehicle’s Press "Connectivity" to access the "CarPlay®” "MirrorLink ” function. TM Press Navigation to display the main screen. For CarPlay® technology, the function. Press "MirrorLink " to start the page. application in the system.

216 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® Depending on the smartphone, it may be From the system, press "Applications" to interface. necessary to activate the "MirrorLinkTM" display the main page. 12 function. Press "Connectivity" to access the "Android On connecting the USB cable, the During the procedure, several screen Auto” function. CarPlay® function deactivates the pages relating to certain features are Press "Android Auto" to start the system's Bluetooth® mode. displayed. application in the system. Accept to start and complete the connection. During the procedure, several screen When the USB cable is disconnected Once the connection is established, a page is pages relating to certain features are and the ignition is switched off then back displayed, showing the applications already displayed. on, the system will not automatically switch to downloaded to the smartphone that are Accept to start and complete the connection. Radio Media mode; the source must be compatible with MirrorLinkTM technology. Access to the different audio sources remains changed manually. Access to the different audio sources remains available in the margin of the Android Auto available in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM display, using the touch buttons located in the MirrorLinkTM smartphone display, using the touch buttons located in the upper bar. upper bar. Access to the menus for the system is possible connection Access to the menus for the system is possible at any time using the dedicated buttons. at any time using the dedicated buttons. The "MirrorLinkTM" function requires a In Android Auto mode, the function that compatible smartphone and compatible There may be a pause before displays rolling menus by briefly pressing applications. applications become available, the screen with three fingers is disabled. You can check that your telephone is depending on the quality of the network. compatible on the Brand's website (services). There may be a pause before applications become available, When connecting a smartphone to the Android Auto smartphone depending on the quality of the network. system, we recommend enabling connection Bluetooth® on the smartphone. Connect a USB cable. The smartphone Install the "Android Auto" application on Car Apps charges when connected by a USB cable. the smartphone via "Google Play". Press Applications to display the main From the system, press " " to Applications The "Android Auto" function requires the use page. display the main page. of a compatible smartphone and applications. Press "Car Apps" to display the applications Press " " to access the Connectivity home page. "MirrorLinkTM” function. Connect a USB cable. The smartphone Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the charges when connected by a USB cable. application in the system.

217 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Internet Browser If the pairing procedure fails, we – “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of Wi-Fi connection sharing recommend deactivating and then audio files on the smartphone), Press Applications to display the main Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the system. reactivating the Bluetooth function on the – "Mobile internet data". page. Press Connect-App to display the main smartphone. Press "Connectivity" to access the "Connected The "Mobile internet data" profile must page. Apps” function. be activated for connected navigation (if Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Press "Connected Apps" to display the browser Procedure from the smartphone the vehicle does not have "Emergency and secondary page. home page. Select the name of the system in the list assistance call" services), after first activating Select "Share Wi-Fi connection". Select the country of residence. of detected devices. smartphone connection sharing. In the system, accept the connection request Select the "Activation" tab to activate or Select one or more profiles. Press "OK" to save and start the browser. from the smartphone. deactivate Wi-Fi connection sharing. And/or Press "OK" to confirm. Select the "Settings" tab to change the system’s Connection to the internet is via one of Procedure from the system network name and password. the network connections provided by the Press Connect-App to display the main Press "OK" to confirm. vehicle or the user. page. Wi-Fi connection Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Network connection via the smartphone's Wi-Fi. secondary page. To protect against unauthorised access ® Press Connect-App to display the main Bluetooth connection Press "Bluetooth connection". and to make all systems as secure as page. possible, the use of a security code or a The services available depend on the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Select "Search". complex password is recommended. network, the SIM card and the secondary page. The list of detected smartphones is compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. Select " ". displayed. Wi-Fi network connection Consult the smartphone user guide and the Select the name of the chosen Managing connections service provider to check which services are Select the "Secured", "Not secured" or smartphone in the list. Press Connect-App to display the main available. " ” tab. Stored page. Depending on the type of smartphone, Select a network. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the you may by prompted to accept the The Bluetooth function must be activated secondary page. transfer of contacts and messages. Using the virtual keypad , enter the Wi-Fi and the smartphone configured as Select "Manage connection". "Visible to all". network "Key" and "Password". Press " " to establish the connection. OK With this function, you can view the access to To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is Connection sharing connected services, the availability of connected used (from the smartphone or from the system), The system offers to connect the smartphone services and modify the connection mode. ensure that the code is the same in the system with 3 profiles: The Wi-Fi connection and Wi-Fi and in the smartphone. – "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), connection sharing are exclusive.

218 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Wi-Fi connection sharing Radio This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the context of radio wave transmission, and 12 Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the system. in no way indicative of an audio system Press Connect-App to display the main Selecting a station malfunction. page. Press Radio Media to display the main Press the " " button to access the OPTIONS page. secondary page. Press "Frequency". Presetting a station Select " ". Share Wi-Fi connection Press one of the buttons to perform an Select a radio station or frequency. automatic search for radio stations. (refer to the corresponding section) Select the "Activation" tab to activate or Or Press "Presets". deactivate Wi-Fi connection sharing. Move the slider to manually search for Make a long press on one of the buttons And/or frequencies up or down. to preset the station. Select the " " tab to change the system’s Settings Or network name and password. Press Radio Media to display the main Changing the waveband Press "OK" to confirm. page. Press Radio Media to display the main Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the page. To protect against unauthorised access secondary page. To change the waveband, press "Band…", and to make all systems as secure as Select "Radio stations" on the secondary displayed at the top right of the screen. possible, the use of a security code or a page. complex password is recommended. Press "Frequency". Activating/Deactivating RDS Enter the values using the virtual keypad. RDS, if activated, allows you to continue First enter the units then click on the listening to the same station by automatic Managing connections decimals field to enter the figures after the retuning to alternative frequencies. Press Connect-App to display the main decimal point. Press Radio Media to display the main page. Press "OK" to confirm. page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the secondary page. Radio reception may be affected by the secondary page. Select "Manage connection". use of electrical equipment not approved Select "Radio settings". by the Brand, such as a USB charger With this function, you can view the access to connected to the 12 V socket. Select "General". connected services, the availability of connected The exterior environment (hills, buildings, Activate/deactivate "Station follow". services and modify the connection mode. tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may block reception, including in RDS mode.

219 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Press "OK" to confirm. TA message can be heard. Normal play of the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Media previously playing media resumes at the end of secondary page. the message. Select "Radio settings". RDS station tracking may not be Select "Announcements". USB port available nationwide, as many radio Activate/deactivate "Traffic Select "General". Insert the USB memory stick into the USB stations do not cover 100 % of the country. announcement". Activate/deactivate "FM-DAB Follow-up". port or connect the USB device to the This explains the loss of reception of the Press "OK" to confirm. USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). station during a journey. Activate/deactivate "Station follow". To protect the system, do not use a USB hub. Displaying text information DAB (Digital Audio Press "OK". The "Radio Text" function displays information The system builds playlists (in temporary memory); this operation can take from a transmitted by the radio station relating to the Broadcasting) radio If “FM-DAB auto tracking" is activated, few seconds to several minutes at the first station or the currently playing song. there may be a time offset of a few connection. Press Radio Media to display the main Terrestrial Digital Radio seconds when the system switches to "FM" Reduce the number of non-music files and the page. Digital radio provides higher quality sound. analogue radio, and in some cases a change number of folders to reduce the waiting time. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the The various "multiplexes/ensembles" offer a in volume. Playlists are updated whenever the ignition secondary page. choice of radio stations organised in alphabetical When the digital signal quality is restored, the is switched off or a USB memory stick is Select "Radio settings". order. system automatically changes back to "DAB". connected. The audio system memorises these Press Radio Media to display the main Select " ". lists, which will subsequently load faster if they General page. If the "DAB" station being listened to is Activate/deactivate "Display radio text". have not been changed. Press “Band …" at the top right of the screen to not available on “FM” (“FM-DAB" option display the "DAB" waveband. shaded), or "FM-DAB auto tracking" is not Press " " to confirm. Auxiliary socket (AUX) OK activated, the sound will cut out while the Depending on equipment FM-DAB tracking digital signal is too weak. Connect a portable device (MP3 player, “DAB" does not cover 100 % of the territory. etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an Playing TA messages When the digital radio signal is poor, “FM-DAB audio cable (not supplied). The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives auto follow-up" enables you to continue listening This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this to the same station by automatically switching to has been selected in the audio settings. function needs good reception of a radio station the corresponding FM analogue station (if there First adjust the volume on the portable device that carries this type of message. While traffic is one). (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the information is being broadcast, the current Press Radio Media to display the main audio system. media is automatically interrupted so that the page. Controls are managed via the portable device.

220 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Media Selecting the source If play does not start automatically, it may be necessary to start the audio playback from the 12 Press Radio Media to display the main smartphone. page. USB port Control is from the portable device or by using Select "SOURCES". Insert the USB memory stick into the USB the system's touch buttons. Select the source. port or connect the USB device to the USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). Once connected in streaming mode, the Watching a video smartphone is considered to be a media To protect the system, do not use a USB Depending on equipment/Depending on version/ source. hub. Depending on country. Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port. The system builds playlists (in temporary Connecting Apple® players memory); this operation can take from a Video control commands are accessible Connect the Apple® player to the USB port using few seconds to several minutes at the first only through the touch screen. a suitable cable (not supplied). connection. Play starts automatically. Press Radio Media to display the main Reduce the number of non-music files and the Control is via the audio system. number of folders to reduce the waiting time. page. Playlists are updated whenever the ignition Select "SOURCES". The classifications available are those of is switched off or a USB memory stick is Select Video to start the video. the portable device connected (artists/ connected. The audio system memorises these albums/genres/playlists/audio books/ lists, which will subsequently load faster if they To remove the USB memory stick, press podcasts). have not been changed. the pause button to stop the video, then The default classification used is by artist. To remove the memory stick. modify the classification used, return to the Auxiliary socket (AUX) The system can play video files in the MPEG-4 first level of the menu then select the desired Part 2, MPEG-2, MPEG-1, H.264, H.263, VP8, Depending on equipment classification (playlists for example) and WMV and RealVideo formats. Connect a portable device (MP3 player, confirm to go down through the menu to the desired track. etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an ® audio cable (not supplied). Streaming Bluetooth The version of software in the audio system may This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed not be compatible with the generation of the has been selected in the audio settings. from your smartphone. Apple® player. First adjust the volume on the portable device The Bluetooth profile must be activated. (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the First adjust the volume on the portable device (to audio system. a high level). Controls are managed via the portable device. Then adjust the volume of the audio system.

221 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Information and advice Telephone Procedure from the system The ability of the system to connect just one profile depends on the telephone. The system supports USB mass storage Press Telephone to display the main All three profiles may connect by default. devices, BlackBerry® devices and Apple® players Pairing a Bluetooth® page. via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not Press "Bluetooth search". supplied. telephone The profiles compatible with the system Or are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, Devices are managed using the audio system The services available depend on the Select "Search". MAP and PAN. controls. network, the SIM card and the The list of detected telephones is Other devices, not recognised on connection, compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. displayed. Visit the Brand's website for more information must be connected to the auxiliary socket using Consult the telephone user guide and the Select the name of the chosen telephone (compatibility, additional help, etc.). a jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth service provider to check which services are in the list. streaming, if compatible. available. Automatic reconnection The audio system will only play audio files with On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone ".wma", ".aac", ".flac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" file Connection sharing The Bluetooth function must be activated connected is present again, it is automatically extensions, at bit rates between 32 Kbps and The system offers to connect the telephone with and the telephone configured as "Visible recognised and within about 30 seconds 320 Kbps. 3 profiles: to all” (in the telphone settings). after switching on the ignition, the pairing is It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. – "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), established automatically (Bluetooth activated). No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read. – “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is To modify the connection profile: All ".wma" files must be standard WMA 9 files. audio files on the telephone), used (from the telephone or from the system), Press Telephone to display the main The supported sampling rates are 32, 44 and – "Mobile internet data". ensure that the code is the same in the system page. 48 KHz. and in the telephone. The "Mobile internet data" profile must Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the To avoid reading and display problems, we be activated for connected navigation, secondary page. recommend choosing file names less than 20 If the pairing procedure fails, we after first activating smartphone connection Select "Bluetooth connection" to display characters long that do not contain any special recommend deactivating and then sharing. the list of paired devices. characters (e.g. “ ? . ; ù). reactivating the Bluetooth function on the Press the "Details" button. Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format telephone. Select one or more profiles. (File Allocation Table). Select one or more profiles. Press "OK" to confirm. We recommend using the original USB Procedure from the telephone cable for the portable device. Select the system name in the list of Press "OK" to confirm. Depending on the type of telephone, you may by detected devices. prompted to accept the transfer of contacts and In the system, accept the connection request messages. from the telephone.

222 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

The ability of the system to connect just Managing paired telephones Select "End call" on the touch screen. one profile depends on the telephone. This function lets you connect or disconnect a 12 All three profiles may connect by default. device or delete a pairing. Press Telephone to display the main Making a call The profiles compatible with the system page. Using the telephone is not recommended are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the while driving. MAP and PAN. secondary page. Park the vehicle. Select "Bluetooth connection" to display Make the call using the steering mounted Visit the Brand's website for more information the list of paired devices. controls. (compatibility, additional help, etc.). Press on the name of the telephone selected in the list to disconnect it. Automatic reconnection Press again to connect it. Calling a new number On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone Press Telephone to display the main connected is present again, it is automatically Deleting a telephone page. recognised and within about 30 seconds Select the basket at top right of the Enter the phone number using the digital after switching on the ignition, the pairing is screen to display a basket alongside the keypad. established automatically (Bluetooth activated). telephone chosen. Press "Call" to start the call. To modify the connection profile: Press the basket alongside the telephone Press Telephone to display the main chosen to delete it. page. Calling a contact Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Receiving a call Press Telephone to display the main secondary page. An incoming call is announced by a ring and a page. Select "Bluetooth connection" to display superimposed display in the screen. Or press and hold the list of paired devices. Make a short press on the steering Press the "Details" button. mounted telephone button to accept an the steering mounted telephone button. incoming call. Select one or more profiles. And Select "Contact". Make a long press Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Press "OK" to confirm. Select "Call". on the steering mounted telephone button to reject the call. Or

223 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Calling a recently used Press this button to sort contacts by Managing quick messages Access to email messages depends on Surname+first name or by First the compatibility between the Press Telephone to display the main number name+surname. smartphone and the onboard system. page. Press Telephone to display the main Press the " " button to access the page. The "Email" function allows email OPTIONS secondary page. Or addresses to be entered for a contact, Select " " to display the Settings Press and hold but the system is not able to send emails. Quick messages list of messages. Select the "Delayed", "My arrival", "Not the steering mounted telephone button. Managing messages Audio settings available" or "Other" tab, enabling you to Press Settings to display the main page. Press Telephone to display the main create new messages. Select "Calls". page. Press " " to write a new message. Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Create Select "Audio settings". Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the It is always possible to make a call secondary page. Select the message chosen in one of the Then select "Ambience", "Position"; "Sound", directly from the telephone; as a safety Select "Messages" to display the list of lists. "Voice" or "Ringtone". measure, first park the vehicle. messages. Press "Transfer" to select one or more Press "OK" to save the settings. Select the "All", "Incoming" or "Sent” tab. recipients. Press " Play" to start playing the Managing contacts/entries Select the details of the message chosen message. The balance/distribution (or spatialisation Press Telephone to display the main in one of the lists. with the Arkamys© system) uses audio page. Press "Answer" to send a quick message Managing email processing to adjust the sound quality Select "Contact". stored in the system. Press Telephone to display the main according to the number of passengers in the Select " " to add a new contact. Create Press "Call" to start the call. page. vehicle. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Available only with the front and rear speaker Press the " " tab to enter the Telephone Press " Play" to listen to the message. secondary page. configuration. contact’s telephone number(s). Select "Email" to display the list of Press the "Address" tab to enter the The Ambience setting (choice of 6 Access to "Messages" depends on the messages. contact’s address(es). ambiences) and the , and compatibility between the smartphone Select the "Incoming", "Sent" or "Not Bass Medium Press the "Email" tab to enter the sound settings are different and and the onboard system. read” tab. Treble contact’s email address(es). independent for each audio source. Some smartphones retrieve messages or Select the message chosen in one of the lists. Press "OK" to save. Activate or deactivate " ". email messages more slowly than others. Press " Play" to start playing the Loudness message.

224 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Access to email messages depends on The "Position” settings (All passengers, Press "OK" again to save the settings. the compatibility between the Driver and Front only) are common to all 12 smartphone and the onboard system. sources. The location for the photograph is Activate or deactivate "Touch tones", square; the system reshapes the original "Volume linked to speed" and "Auxiliary photograph if in another format. Settings input". Press this button to reset the selected Audio settings Onboard audio: Arkamys Sound Staging© profile. optimises the sound distribution inside Press Settings to display the main page. Resetting the selected profile activates the passenger compartment. the English language by default. Select "Audio settings". Configuring profiles Select a "Profile" (1 or 2 or 3) to link "Audio settings" with it. Then select "Ambience", "Position"; "Sound", Press Settings to display the main page. "Voice" or "Ringtone". Select "Audio settings". Press "OK" to save the settings. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Then select "Ambience", "Position"; "Sound", secondary page. "Voice" or "Ringtone". Select "Setting of the profiles". The balance/distribution (or spatialisation Press "OK" to save the selected profile’s © with the Arkamys system) uses audio settings. processing to adjust the sound quality Select "Profile 1", "Profile ",2 "Profile 3” or according to the number of passengers in the "Common profile". Modifying system settings Press this button to enter a name for the vehicle. Press Settings to display the main page. Available only with the front and rear speaker profile using the virtual keypad. Press "OK" to confirm. configuration. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the secondary page. Press this button to add a photograph to The Ambience setting (choice of 6 Select "Screen configuration". the profile. ambiences) and the Bass, Medium and Insert a USB memory stick containing the Treble sound settings are different and Select "Animation". photograph in the USB port. independent for each audio source. Activate or deactivate:Automatic Select the photograph. Activate or deactivate "Loudness". scrolling Press "OK" to accept the transfer of the Select "Brightness". photograph.

225 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Move the slider to adjust the brightness of Select "Setting the time-date". Press "OK" to confirm. Navigation the screen and/or the instrument panel. I cannot enter the navigation address. Press Settings to display the main page. Select "Date". The system may not automatically The address is not recognised. Press this button to set the date. manage the change between winter and ► Use the "intuitive method" by pressing Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the summer time (depending on the country of the "Search…" button at the bottom of the secondary page. Press "OK" to confirm. sale). "Navigation” page. Select "System settings". The route calculation is not successful. Select the display format for the date. The route settings may conflict with the current Select " " to change the units of distance, Units Colour schemes location (for example, if toll roads are excluded fuel consumption and temperature. Time and date setting is only available if Depending on equipment/Depending on version. but the vehicle is on a toll road). Select "Factory settings" to restore the initial "GPS synchronisation" is deactivated. ► Check the route settings in the "Navigation" settings. As a safety measure, the procedure for menu. changing the colour scheme is only I do not receive "Danger zone” alerts. Resetting the system to "Factory possible when the vehicle is stationary. settings" activates English and degrees Setting the time You have not subscribed to the online services Fahrenheit and deactivates summer time. Press Settings to display the main page. Press Settings to display the main page. option. ► If you have subscribed to the option: Select "System info" to display the versions of Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Select "Color schemes". - a few days may elapse before the service is the various modules installed in the system. secondary page. activated, Select "Setting the time-date". Select a colour scheme in the list then - services may not be selected in the system Selecting the language press "OK" to confirm. menu, Press Settings to display the main page. Select "Time". - online services are not active ("TOMTOM Whenever the colour scheme is Press this button to set the time using the TRAFFIC" not shown on the map). changed, the system restarts, temporarily Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the virtual keypad. The POIs do not appear. displaying a black screen. secondary page. Press "OK" to confirm. The POIs have not been selected. Select "Languages" to change the ► Set the zoom level to 600 ft (200 m) or select language. Press this button to set the time zone. POIs in the POI list. Frequently asked The "Danger zone" audible warning feature is Setting the date Select the display format for the time questions not working. Press Settings to display the main page. (12h/24h). The audible warning is not active or the volume Activate or deactivate summer time (+1 The following information groups together the is too low. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the hour). answers to the most frequently asked questions secondary page. Activate or deactivate GPS concerning the system. synchronisation (UTC).

226 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Navigation ► Activate the audible warning in the The altitude is not displayed. "Navigation" menu and check the voice volume On starting, GPS initialisation may take up to 12 I cannot enter the navigation address. in the sound settings. 3 minutes to receive more than 4 satellites The address is not recognised. correctly. ► Use the "intuitive method" by pressing The system does not suggest a detour ► Wait until the system has started up the "Search…" button at the bottom of the around an incident on the route. The route settings do not take account of TMC completely so that there is GPS coverage by at "Navigation” page. messages. least 4 satellites. The route calculation is not successful. ► Configure the "Traffic info " function in Depending on the geographical environment The route settings may conflict with the current the route settings list (Without, Manual or (tunnel, etc.) or the weather, the conditions of location (for example, if toll roads are excluded Automatic). reception of the GPS signal may vary. but the vehicle is on a toll road). This behaviour is normal. The system is ► Check the route settings in the "Navigation" I receive a warning about a "Danger area" dependent on the GPS signal reception menu. that is not on my route. As well as providing guided navigation, the conditions. I do not receive "Danger zone” alerts. system announces all "Danger areas" positioned You have not subscribed to the online services My navigation is no longer connected. in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may During start-up and in certain geographical option. provide an alert for "Danger areas" located on areas, the connection may be unavailable. ► If you have subscribed to the option: nearby or parallel roads. ► Check that the online services are activated - a few days may elapse before the service is ► Zoom the map to show the exact location (settings, contract). activated, of the "Danger area". You can select "On the - services may not be selected in the system route" to stop receiving warnings or decrease the menu, Radio warning duration. - online services are not active ("TOMTOM The reception quality of the tuned radio TRAFFIC" not shown on the map). Certain traffic jams along the route are not station gradually deteriorates or the station indicated in real time. The POIs do not appear. presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz On starting, a few minutes may elapse before The POIs have not been selected. is displayed, etc.). the system begins to receive traffic information. ► Set the zoom level to 600 ft (200 m) or select The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s ► Wait until traffic information is being received POIs in the POI list. transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the correctly (traffic information icons shown on the The "Danger zone" audible warning feature is geographical area. map). not working. ► Activate the "RDS" function by means of the In certain countries, only major routes The audible warning is not active or the volume short-cut menu to enable the system to check (motorways, etc.) are listed for the traffic is too low. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in information. the geographical area. This is perfectly normal. The system is dependent on the traffic information available.

227 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

The aerial is missing or has been damaged There may be an extended pause after The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with Settings (for example while entering a car wash or inserting a USB stick. the system. When the treble and bass settings are underground car park). The system reads a variety of data (folder, title, ► You can check that your telephone is changed, the ambience is deselected. ► Have the aerial checked by a dealer. artist, etc.). This can take from a few seconds to compatible on the Brand's website (services). When the ambience is changed, the treble The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, a few minutes. The volume of the telephone connected in and bass settings are reset. basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception, This is perfectly normal. Bluetooth mode is inaudible. Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and including in RDS mode. The volume depends on both the system and the Some characters in information about the bass settings, and vice versa. This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is telephone. currently playing media may not be displayed ► Modify the treble and bass or ambience not indicative of an audio system malfunction. ► Increase the volume of the audio system, to correctly. settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The audio system is unable to process certain maximum if required, and increase the volume of When the balance settings are changed, the stations received. types of character. the telephone if necessary. distribution is deselected. The name of the radio station changes. ► Use standard characters to name tracks and Ambient noise affects the quality of the When the distribution setting is changed, the The station is no longer received or its name has folders. telephone call. balance settings are deselected. changed in the list. ► Reduce the ambient noise level (close Playback of streaming files does not start. Selecting a distribution setting imposes the Some radio stations send other information The connected device does not automatically windows, reduce ventilation, slow down, etc.). balance settings, and vice versa. in place of their name (the title of the song for launch playback. Some contacts are duplicated in the list. ► Modify the balance setting or the distribution example). ► Start playback from the device. The options for synchronising contacts are: setting to obtain the desired sound quality. The system interprets these details as the station Track names and playing times are not synchronise the contacts on the SIM card, the There is a difference in sound quality name. displayed on the audio streaming screen. contacts on the telephone, or both. When both between audio sources. ► Press the "Update list" button in the "Radio The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer synchronisations are selected, some contacts To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound stations” secondary menu. of this information. may be duplicated. settings can be tailored to different audio ► Select "Display SIM card contacts" or sources, which can generate audible differences "Display telephone contacts". Media Telephone when changing source. Playback of my USB memory stick starts only I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The contacts are not listed in alphabetical ► Check that the sound settings are appropriate after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). The telephone's Bluetooth function may be order. to the sources listened to. We recommend Some telephones offer display options. Some files supplied with the memory stick may switched off or the telephone may not be visible. setting the sound functions (Bass:, Treble:, Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can greatly slow down access to reading the memory ► Check that the telephone has Bluetooth Balance) to the middle position, setting the be transferred in a specific order. stick (multiplication by 10 of the cataloguing switched on. musical ambience to "None", setting loudness ► Modify the telephone directory display time). ► Check in the telephone settings that it is correction to "Active" in USB mode and "Inactive" settings. ► Delete the files supplied with the memory "visible to all". in Radio mode. stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the ► Deactivate then reactivate the telphone’s The system does not receive SMS. ► In all cases, after applying sound settings, SMS text messages cannot be sent to the file structure on the memory stick. Bluetooth function. adjust the volume level on the portable device (to system in Bluetooth mode.

228 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Settings a high level) first. Then adjust the volume level on the audio system. 12 When the treble and bass settings are When the engine is off, the system switches changed, the ambience is deselected. off after several minutes of use. When the ambience is changed, the treble When the engine is switched off, the system's and bass settings are reset. operating time depends on the state of charge of Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and the battery. bass settings, and vice versa. The switch-off is normal: the system ► Modify the treble and bass or ambience automatically goes into energy economy mode settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. and switches off to maintain an adequate charge When the balance settings are changed, the in the battery. distribution is deselected. ► Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the When the distribution setting is changed, the charge of the battery. balance settings are deselected. Selecting a distribution setting imposes the The date and time cannot be set. Setting of the date and time is only available balance settings, and vice versa. if the synchronisation with the satellites is ► Modify the balance setting or the distribution deactivated. setting to obtain the desired sound quality. ► Settings menu / Options / Time-Date setting. There is a difference in sound quality Select the "Time" tab and deactivate the "GPS between audio sources. synchronisation" (UTC). To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound settings can be tailored to different audio sources, which can generate audible differences when changing source. ► Check that the sound settings are appropriate to the sources listened to. We recommend setting the sound functions (Bass:, Treble:, Balance) to the middle position, setting the musical ambience to "None", setting loudness correction to "Active" in USB mode and "Inactive" in Radio mode. ► In all cases, after applying sound settings, adjust the volume level on the portable device (to

229 Alphabetical index

Air conditioning, electronic (with display Bluetooth (telephone) 199–200, 222–223 A screen) 57 Bodywork 152 ABS 73 Air conditioning, manual 53, 55 Bonnet 144 Accessories 69, 96 Air intake 53–54 Boot lid 26, 28 Access to the 3rd row 43 Air vents 52 Bottle holder 45 Access to the spare wheel 156–157 Alarm 33–34 Brake discs 148 Active Safety Brake 120, 122 Android Auto connection 217 Brake lamps 163 AdBlue® 149 Anti-lock braking system (ABS) 73–74 Brakes 148 AdBlue® tank 150 Antitheft / Immobiliser 24 Braking assistance system 73–74 Additive, Diesel 147–148 Apple CarPlay connection 198, 216 Braking, automatic emergency 120, 122 Adjusting headlamps 65 Applications 217 Braking, dynamic emergency 98–99 Adjusting head restraints 45 Armrest 38 Brightness 201 Adjusting seat 38, 43 Armrest, front 45 Bulbs 160 Adjusting the air distribution 53–54 Assistance call 69–71 Bulbs (changing) 159–160 Adjusting the air flow 53–54 Assistance, emergency braking 73, 121 Bulbs (changing, type) 160 Adjusting the date 202, 226 Audible warning 73 Adjusting the height and reach of Audio streaming (Bluetooth) 185, 197, 221 the steering wheel 40 Adjusting the lumbar support 38 C Adjusting the temperature 53–54 Cable, audio 221 Adjusting the time 202, 226 B Cable, Jack 221 Advanced Grip Control 75–76 Battery 142–143, 167, 169 Capacity, fuel tank 138–139 Advice on care and maintenance 151 Battery, 12 V 147, 166–168 Cap, fuel filler 138–139 Advice on driving 7, 92 Battery, charging 168 Care of the bodywork 152 Airbags 80, 82–84 Battery, remote control 29, 59 CD 184, 197 Airbags, curtain 81–82 Bench seat, one-piece, fixed 43 CD, MP3 184, 197 Airbags, front 80–81, 84 Blind spot monitoring system 126 Central locking 23, 26 Airbags, lateral 81–82 Blind spot monitoring system, active 127 Changing a bulb 159–162 Air conditioning 52, 54, 55, 57 Blind spot sensors 126–127 Changing a fuse 164–166 Air conditioning, digital 56 BlueHDi 147, 153 Changing a wheel 154, 156 Air conditioning, dual-zone automatic 53–54 Bluetooth Changing a wiper blade 66–67 (hands-free) 186–187, 199, 222–223 Changing the remote control battery 29

230 Alphabetical index

Charger, induction 48 Courtesy lamps 60 Driving aids (recommendations) 107 Charger, wireless 48 Cover, load space 50 Driving economically 7 Checking the levels 145–147 Cruise control 111, 114–116, 119–120 Dynamic stability control (DSC) 73, 75 Checking tyre pressures Cruise control, adaptive 116 (using the kit) 154, 156 Cruise control by speed limit recognition 111 Checks 145, 147–148 Cruise control, dynamic with Stop function 111 Checks, routine 147–148 Cup holder 45 E Child lock 90–91 EBFD 73 Children 79, 85, 88–89, 90 Eco-driving (advice) 7 Children (safety) 90 Economy mode 142–143 Child seats 79, 82–85, 89, 90 D Electric windows 35 Child seats, conventional 85 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) - Electronic brake force distribution Child seats, i-Size 90 Digital radio 182, 196–197, 220 (EBFD) 73–74 Child seats, ISOFIX 88–89, 90 Date (setting) 202, 226 Emergency braking assistance (EBA) 73 Cleaning (advice) 151–152 Daytime running lamps 63, 161–162 Emergency call 69–71 Closing the doors 23, 26 Daytime running lamps, LED 162 Emergency warning lamps 52, 72 Collision Risk Alert 120–121 Deactivating the passenger airbag 80, 84–85 Emissions control system, SCR 149 Connected applications 218 Deactivation of DSC (ESC) 74 Energy economy mode 142–143 Connection, Deadlocking 27 Engine compartment 145 Bluetooth 186, 199–200, 218, 222–223 Defrosting 41, 55–56 Engine, Diesel 138, 145, 153, 175–177 Connection, MirrorLink 198–199, 217 Demisting 55–56 Engine, petrol 145, 173–174 Connection, Wi-Fi network 218–219 Demisting, rear 40, 56 Engines 173–177 Connectivity 216 Demisting, rear screen 40, 56 Environment 7, 29, 59 Container, AdBlue® 150 Dimensions 172 ESC (electronic stability control) 73 Control, emergency boot release 28 Dipstick 145 Expanded traffic sign recognition 112 Control, emergency door 23, 27–28 Direction indicators 62–63, 161–163 Control, heated seats 39 Doors, side 31 Control stalk, lighting 61, 63 Doors, side-hinged 26–27 Control stalk, wipers 65–67 Driver’s attention warning 128 F Courtesy lamp 59 Driving 92 Fatigue detection 128 Courtesy lamp, front 60 Driving abroad 62 Filling the AdBlue® tank 147, 150 Courtesy lamp, rear 60 Driving aids camera (warnings) 108 Filling the fuel tank 138–139

231 Alphabetical index

Filter, air 148 Gear lever, manual gearbox 100–101 Immobiliser, electronic 93 Filter, oil 148 Gear shift indicator ~ Gear efficiency Indicator, coolant temperature 16 Filter, particle 147–148 indicator 104 Indicator lamps, operation 61 Filter, passenger compartment 52, 147 Glove box 45 Indicators, direction 62 Finisher 159 G.P.S. 213 Inflating tyres 148, 178 Fitting a wheel 157, 159 Inflating tyres and accessories Fitting roof bars 143 (using the kit) 154, 156 Fittings, interior 45, 49 Infrared camera 108 Flap, fuel filler 138–139 H Instrument panel 9, 109 Flashing indicators 62–63, 163 Hazard warning lamps 52, 72 Internet browser 214, 218 Fluid, brake 146 headlamp adjustment 65 ISOFIX 89 Fluid, engine coolant 146 Headlamp adjustment 65 Foglamp, rear 163 Headlamps, automatic dipping 63–64, 126 Foglamps 162 Headlamps, automatic illumination 62–63 Foglamps, front 61, 161 Headlamps, dipped beam 61, 161 J Foglamps, rear 61 Headlamps, halogen 160 Jack 156, 221 Folding the rear seats 41–43 Headlamps, main beam 61, 161–162 Jump starting 167 Frequency (radio) 220 Head restraints, front 45 Fuel 7, 138 Head restraints, rear 41–42 Fuel consumption 7 Heating 52–53, 55, 57–58 Fuel tank 138–139 Heating, additional 33, 57–58 K Fusebox, dashboard 165 Heating, programmable 33, 57–58 Key 23–24, 26–28 Fusebox, engine compartment 165–166 Hill Assist Descent Control (HADC) 76–77 Key, electronic 23, 96 Fuses 164–166 Hill Descent Control 76–77 Keyless Entry and Starting 23, 25–26, 94, 96 Hill start assist 99–100 Key with remote control 26 Horn 73 Kit, hands-free 186–187, 199, 222–223 Kit, puncture repair 153 G Kit, temporary puncture repair 153–154, 156 Gauge, fuel 138–139 Gearbox, automatic 96, 100–105, 148 I Gearbox, manual 100–101, 105, 148 Ignition 96, 224 Gear lever, automatic gearbox 101–103 Ignition on 96

232 Alphabetical index

L M O Labels 4, 43 Maintenance (advice) 151 Obstacle detection 129 Labels, identification 178 Maintenance, routine 108, 147 Oil change 145 Lamps, front 161–162 Manoeuvring aids (recommendations) 107 Oil consumption 145 Lamps, parking 63 Markings, identification 178 OIl, engine 145 Lamps, rear 163 Mat 45, 108 On-board tools 153–154 Lane departure warning active 122, 127 Memorising a speed 119–120 Opening the bonnet 144 LEDs - Light-emitting diodes 63, 160–162 Menu 198 Opening the boot 23 Level, AdBlue® 147 Menu, main 180 Opening the doors 23 Level, brake fluid 146 Menus (audio) 193–194, 206–207 Level, Diesel additive 147–148 Messages 224 Level, engine coolant 16, 146 Messages, quick 224 Level, engine oil 145 Mirror, child surveillance 41 P Levels and checks 145–147 Mirror, rear view 41 Pads, brake 148 Level, screenwash fluid 66, 147 Mirrors, door 40–41, 56, 126 Paint 152, 178 Light-emitting diodes - LEDs 63, 160–162 Misfuel prevention 139 Paint colour code 178 Lighting 61 Mountings, ISOFIX 87 Park Assist 133 Lighting, exterior 61 MP3 CD 184 Parking brake 96–97, 148 Lighting, guide-me home 63 Parking brake, electric 97–99, 148 Lighting, welcome 63 Parking sensors, audible and visual 129 Loading 143 Parking sensors, front 130 Load reduction mode 143 N Parking sensors, rear 129 Locating your vehicle 24 Navigation 212–214 Plates, identification 178 Locking 23–24, 26 Navigation, connected 214–216 Player, Apple® 185, 197 Locking from the inside 30 Net 50–51 Player, Apple® 221 Low fuel level 138–139 Net, high load retaining 49 Player, MP3 CD 184 Lumbar 38 Number plate lamps 164 Player, USB 183, 196, 221 Port, USB 47, 183, 196, 216, 221 Pressures, tyres 148, 156, 159, 178 Pre-tensioning seat belts 79 Priming pump 153

233 Alphabetical index

Priming the fuel system 153 Replacing the oil filter 148 Side repeater 161 Profiles 201, 225 Replacing the passenger compartment Sliding side door, electric 26, 32 Programmable cruise control 114 filter 147 Snow chains 106, 140 Protecting children 80, 82–85, 88–89, 90 Reservoir, screenwash 147 Snow chains, link 140 Puncture 154, 156 Reversing camera 108, 131–132 Socket, 12 V accessory 45, 47 Reversing lamps 163 Socket, 220 V 47 Roof 46 Socket, auxiliary 184, 197, 221 Roof bars 143 Socket, Jack 184, 221 R Running out of fuel (Diesel) 153 Speed limiter 111–113, 119–120 Radar (warnings) 108 Speed limit recognition 109–110 Radio 181–182, 194, 197, 219 Speedometer 109 Radio, digital (Digital Audio Broadcasting - Stability control (ESC) 73–76 DAB) 182, 196–197, 220 S Starting a Diesel engine 138 Range, AdBlue 147 Safety, children 80, 82–85, 88–89, 90 Starting the engine 93 RDS 195, 220 Saturation of the particle filter (Diesel) 148 Starting the vehicle 94, 96, 101–103 Rear screen, demisting 56 Screen menu map 198 Starting using another battery 167 Recharging the battery 168 Screen, multifunction (with audio system) 180 Station, radio 181, 194, 219–220 Recirculation, air 53–54 Screenwash, front 65 Stay, bonnet 144 Recovery 170 Screenwash, rear 66 Steering mounted controls, audio 180–181, 192, Reduction of electrical load 143 SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) 149 206 Regeneration of the particle filter 148 Seat belts 77–79, 85 Steering wheel, adjustment 40 Reinitialisation of the under-inflation Seat, rear bench 41, 43 Stickers, customising ~ Stickers, detection system 107 Seats, front 37–39 expressive 152 Reinitialising the remote control 29 Seats, heated 39 Stopping the vehicle 96, 101–103 Reminder, key in ignition 96 Seats, rear 37, 41–44, 83 Stop & Start 22, 53, 56, 104–106, Reminder, lighting on 61–62 Sensors (warnings) 108 138, 144, 147, 167, 169 Remote control 23–27, 93 Serial number, vehicle 178 Storage 46 Removing a wheel 157, 159 Service indicator 16 Storage boxes 49 Removing the mat 45 Servicing 16, 147 Stowing rings 51 Replacing bulbs 159–160 Settings, system 201, 225 Sunshine sensor 52 Replacing fuses 164–166 Sidelamps 61, 63, 161–162 Switching off the engine 93, 95 Replacing the air filter 148 Side parking sensors 130 Synchronising the remote control 29

234 Alphabetical index

Windscreen, heated 56 T U Windscreen wipers 65 Tables of fuses 164–166 Under-inflation (detection) 106 Wiper blades (changing) 66–67 Tank, fuel 138–139 Unlocking 23, 25–26 Wiper, rear 66 Technical data 173–177 Unlocking from the inside 30 Wipers 65, 67 Telephone 48, 186–188, 199–200, 222–224 Updating the date 202, 226 Wipers, automatic rain sensitive 65, 67 Telephone, Bluetooth with voice Updating the time 202, 226 recognition 188 USB 183, 197, 216, 221 Temperature, coolant 16 Three flashes (direction indicators) 62 Time (setting) 202, 226 TMC (Traffic info) 213 V Tools 153 Ventilation 52–53, 57–58 Topping-up AdBlue® 150 Video 221 Towbar 74, 140–141 Visiopark 1 131 Towed loads 173–177 Voice commands 208–210 Towing another vehicle 170–171 Towing device 141 Towing eye 171 Traction control (ASR) 73, 75 W Traffic information (TA) 181 Warning and indicator lamps 11 Traffic information (TMC) 213 Warning lamp, driver''s seat belt Trailer 74, 140 not fastened 78 Trailer stability assist (TSA) 74 Warning lamps 11 Trajectory control systems 73–74 Warning lamp, seat belts 78 Triangle, warning 52 Warnings and indicators 11 Trip computer 21–22 Washer jets, heated 56 Type of bulbs 160 Washing 108 Tyres 148, 178 Washing (advice) 151–152 Tyre under-inflation detection 106, 156 Weights 173–177 Welcome lighting 24 Wheel, spare 106, 148, 153–154, 156–157, 159 Windows, rear doors 36

235

Automobiles PEUGEOT declares, in accordance with the provisions of the European legislation (Directive 2000/53) relating to End-of-Life Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by this legislation and that recycled materials are used in the manufacture of the products that it sells. Reproduction or translation of all or part of this document is prohibited without written authorisation from Automobiles PEUGEOT.

Printed in the EU

11-19

www.peugeot.com *19K9P.0040* ANG. 19K9P.0040